Geometry Modeling,Patran

C O N T E N T S MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

1 Introduction to Geometry Modeling

■

Overview of Capabilities, 2

■

Concepts and Definitions, 4 ❑ Parameterization, 5 ❑ Topology, 10 - Topological Congruency and Meshing, 12 ❑ Connectivity, 15 ❑ Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran, 17 ❑ Global Model Tolerance & Geometry, 18

■

Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran, 19 ❑ Trimmed Surfaces, 20 ❑ Solids, 24 ❑ Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25 - Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25 ❑ Matrix of Geometry Types Created, 27

■

Building An Optimal Geometry Model, 30 ❑ Building a Congruent Model, 31 ❑ Building Optimal Surfaces, 33 ❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 37 ❑ Building B-rep Solids, 40 ❑ Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids, 41

■

Overview, 46

■

Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47 ❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47 ❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 55

■

PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry, 57

■

Coordinate Frame Definitions, 60

■

Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames, 63

■

Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames, 66

2 Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

3 Coordinate Frames

4 Create Actions

■

Overview of Geometry Create Action, 70

■

Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 74 ❑ Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method), 74 ❑ Create Point ArcCenter, 79 ❑ Extracting Points, 81 - Extracting Points from Curves and Edges, 81 - Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces, 84 - Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 86 - Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 88 - Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface, 90 ❑ Interpolating Points, 91 - Between Two Points, 91 - Interpolating Points on a Curve, 94 ❑ Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points, 97 ❑ Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance, 107 ❑ Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points, 109 ❑ Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces, 112 ❑ Creating Curves Between Points, 117 - Creating Curves Through 2 Points, 117 - Creating Curves Through 3 Points, 119 - Creating Curves Through 4 Points, 123 ❑ Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method), 128 ❑ Creating Chained Curves, 131 ❑ Creating Conic Curves, 133 ❑ Extracting Curves From Surfaces, 137 - Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option, 137 - Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option, 142 ❑ Creating Fillet Curves, 144 ❑ Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points, 148 ❑ Creating Curves at Intersections, 150 - Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces, 150 - Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface, 154 - Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form, 157 - Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes, 158 ❑ Manifold Curves Onto a Surface, 160 - Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option, 160 - Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option, 164 - Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form, 167 ❑ Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal Method), 168 ❑ Creating Offset Curves, 171 - Creating Constant Offset Curve, 171 - Creating Variable Offset Curve, 173 - Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve, 174 ❑ Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces, 176 - Project Parameters Subordinate Form, 182 ❑ Creating Piecewise Linear Curves, 183 ❑ Creating Spline Curves, 185 - Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option, 185 - Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option, 189 ❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method), 193

❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑

❑

Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points (TanPoint Method), 195 Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ Method), 199 Creating Involute Curves, 203 - Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option, 203 - Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option, 206 Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 208 Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method), 214 - Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option, 214 - Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option, 218 Creating 2D Circle Curves, 222 Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves, 226 Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method), 229 - Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option, 229 - Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option, 233 - Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form, 236 Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method), 237 Creating Surfaces from Curves, 240 - Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves, 240 - Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method), 243 - Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method), 246 - Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method), 248 Creating Composite Surfaces, 250 Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 255 Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method), 257 Extracting Surfaces, 260 - Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option, 260 - Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option, 264 Creating Fillet Surfaces, 266 Matching Adjacent Surfaces, 270 Creating Constant Offset Surface, 272 Creating Ruled Surfaces, 274 Creating Trimmed Surfaces, 278 - Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option, 280 - Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option, 281 - Auto Chain Subordinate Form, 282 - Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option, 284 Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method), 287 Extruding Surfaces and Solids, 289 Gliding Surfaces, 294 - Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option, 294 - Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option, 296 Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method, 298 Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method), 305 - Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form, 306 Creating Midsurfaces, 307 - Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option, 307 - Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option, 309 Creating Solid Primitives, 311 - Creating a Solid Block, 311 - Creating Solid Cylinder, 314 - Creating Solid Sphere, 317 - Creating Solid Cone, 320

❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

- Creating Solid Torus, 323 - Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation, 326 Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method), 327 - Creating Solids from Two Surfaces, 327 - Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method), 330 - Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method), 333 - Creating Solids with the N Surface Option, 336 Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid, 338 Creating a Decomposed Solid, 340 Creating Solids from Faces, 343 Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method), 346 Gliding Solids, 348

■

Creating Coordinate Frames, 350 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method, 350 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method, 353 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method, 355 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method, 358 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method, 361 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method, 362

■

Creating Planes, 363 ❑ Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method, 363 ❑ Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method, 365 ❑ Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method, 367 - Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option, 367 - Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric Option, 369 ❑ Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method, 371 ❑ Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method, 372 - Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option, 372 - Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option, 374 ❑ Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method, 375 - Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option, 375 - Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option, 377 - Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option, 379 ❑ Creating Planes with the Offset Method, 381 ❑ Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method, 383 - Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option, 383 - Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric Option, 385 ❑ Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method, 387

■

Creating Vectors, 389 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method, 389 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method, 391 - Between Two Points, 391 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method, 393 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Normal Method, 395 - Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option, 395 - Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option, 397 - Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option, 399 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Product Method, 402 ❑ Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method, 404

5 Delete Actions

■

Overview of the Geometry Delete Action, 408

■

Deleting Any Geometric Entity, 409

■

Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors, 410

■

Deleting Coordinate Frames, 411

■

Overview of the Edit Action Methods, 414

■

Editing Points, 416 ❑ Equivalencing Points, 416

■

Editing Curves, 418 ❑ Breaking Curves, 418 - Breaking a Curve at a Point, 418 - Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location, 422 - Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location, 425 ❑ Blending a Curve, 426 ❑ Disassembling a Chained Curve, 429 ❑ Extending Curves, 431 - Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option, 431 - Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type, 436 - Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type, 438 - Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option, 440 ❑ Merging Existing Curves, 443 ❑ Refitting Existing Curves, 447 ❑ Reversing a Curve, 448 ❑ Trimming Curves, 451 - Trimming a Curve With the Point Option, 451 - Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option, 454

■

Editing Surfaces, 457 ❑ Surface Break Options, 457 - Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option, 457 - Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option, 461 - Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option, 463 - Breaking a Surface With the Point Option, 465 - Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option, 469 - Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option, 471 ❑ Blending Surfaces, 475 ❑ Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces, 478 ❑ Matching Surface Edges, 481 - Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option, 481 - Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option, 484 ❑ Extending Surfaces, 486 - Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option, 486 - Extending Surfaces to a Curve, 488 - Extending Surfaces to a Plane, 490 - Extending Surfaces to a Point, 492 - Extending Surfaces to a Surface, 494 - Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option, 496

6 Edit Actions

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

❑

❑ ❑ ❑

- Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option, 498 Refitting Surfaces, 500 Reversing Surfaces, 501 Sewing Surfaces, 503 Trimming Surfaces to an Edge, 505 Adding a Fillet to a Surface, 507 Removing Edges from Surfaces, 508 - Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option, 508 - Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option, 509 Adding a Hole to Surfaces, 510 - Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option, 510 - Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option, 512 - Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option, 514 Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces, 516 Adding a Vertex to Surfaces, 518 Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces, 520

■

Editing Solids, 522 ❑ Breaking Solids, 522 - Breaking Solids with the Point Option, 522 - Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option, 526 - Breaking Solids with the Curve Option, 531 - Breaking Solids with the Plane Option, 533 - Breaking Solids with the Surface Option, 535 ❑ Blending Solids, 538 ❑ Disassembling B-rep Solids, 541 ❑ Refitting Solids, 543 - Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option, 543 - Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option, 544 - Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option, 545 ❑ Reversing Solids, 546 ❑ Solid Boolean Operation Add, 548 ❑ Solid Boolean Operation Subtract, 550 ❑ Solid Boolean Operation Intersect, 552 ❑ Creating Solid Edge Blends, 554 - Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges, 554 - Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges, 556 ❑ Imprinting Solid on Solid, 558 ❑ Solid Shell Operation, 560

■

Editing Features, 562 ❑ Suppressing a Feature, 562 ❑ Unsuppressing a Feature, 563 ❑ Editing Feature Parameters, 564 ❑ Feature Parameter Definition, 565

■

Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods, 568 ❑ The Show Action Information Form, 569

■

Showing Points, 570 ❑ Showing Point Locations, 570 ❑ Showing Point Distance, 571

7 Show Actions

❑

- Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, 571 - Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, 573 - Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option, 575 - Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option, 577 - Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option, 579 Showing the Nodes on a Point, 581

■

Showing Curves, 582 ❑ Showing Curve Attributes, 582 ❑ Showing Curve Arc, 583 ❑ Showing Curve Angle, 584 ❑ Showing Curve Length Range, 586 ❑ Showing the Nodes on a Curve, 587

■

Showing Surfaces, 588 ❑ Showing Surface Attributes, 588 ❑ Showing Surface Area Range, 589 ❑ Showing the Nodes on a Surface, 590 ❑ Showing Surface Normals, 591

■

Showing Solids, 593 ❑ Showing Solid Attributes, 593

■

Showing Coordinate Frames, 594 ❑ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes, 594

■

Showing Planes, 595 ❑ Showing Plane Attributes, 595 ❑ Showing Plane Angle, 596 ❑ Showing Plane Distance, 598

■

Showing Vectors, 599 ❑ Showing Vector Attributes, 599

■

Overview of the Transform Methods, 602

■

Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605 ❑ Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605 ❑ Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 619 ❑ Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors, 629 ❑ Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 640 ❑ Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate Frame Reference (MCoord Method), 648 ❑ Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 656 ❑ Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 665 ❑ Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 674 ❑ Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 683

■

Transforming Coordinate Frames, 690 ❑ Translating Coordinate Frames, 690 ❑ Rotating Coordinate Frames, 693

8 Transform Actions

9 ■

Verify Action, 698 ❑ Verifying Surface Boundaries, 698 ❑ Verifying Surfaces for B-reps, 700 - Update Graphics Subordinate Form, 701 ❑ Verify - Surface (Duplicates), 702

■

Overview of the Associate Action, 704 ❑ Associating Point Object, 705 ❑ Associating Curve Object, 707

■

Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods, 710 ❑ Disassociating Points, 711 ❑ Disassociating Curves, 712 ❑ Disassociating Surfaces, 713

The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geo metry

■

Introduction, 716

■

Renumber Forms, 717 ❑ Renumber Geometry, 718

INDEX

■

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, 719 Part 2: Geometry Modeling

Verify Actions

10 Associate Actions

11 Disassociate Actions

12


CHAPTER

1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

■ Overview of Capabilities ■ Concepts and Definitions ■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran ■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model

PART 2 Geometry Modeling

1.1

Overview of Capabilities A powerful and important feature of MSC.Patran is its geometry capabilities. Geometry can be:

• Created. • Directly accessed from an external CAD part file. • Imported from an IGES file or a PATRAN 2 Neutral file. Complete Accuracy of Original Geometry. MSC.Patran maintains complete accuracy of the original geometry, regardless of where it came from. The exact mathematical representation of the geometry (e.g., Arc, Rational B-Spline, B-rep, Parametric Cubic, etc.) is consistently maintained throughout the modeling process, without any approximations or conversions. This means different versions of the geometry model are avoided. Only one copy of the geometry design needs to be maintained by the engineer, whether the geometry is in a separate CAD part file or IGES file or the geometry is part of the MSC.Patran database. Below are highlights of the geometry capabilities: Direct Application of Loads/BCs and Element Properties to Geometry. All loads, boundary conditions (BC) and element property assignments can be applied directly to the geometry. When the geometry is meshed with a set of nodes and elements, MSC.Patran will automatically assign the loads/BC or element property to the appropriate nodes or elements. Although you can apply the loads/BCs or element properties directly to the finite element mesh, the advantage of applying them to the geometry is if you remesh the geometry, they remain associated with the model. Once a new mesh is created, the loads/BC and element properties are automatically reassigned. For more information, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Direct Geometry Access. Direct Geometry Access (DGA) is the capability to directly access (or read) geometry information from an external CAD user file, without the use of an intermediate translator. Currently, DGA supports the following CAD systems:

• EDS/Unigraphics • Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology • CATIA by Dassault Systemes • EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision • CADDS 5 by Computervision With DGA, the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD user file can be accessed. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads/BC and the element properties directly to the geometry. For more detailed information on DGA, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry (p. 47). Import and Export of Geometry. There are three file formats available to import or export geometry:

• IGES

CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Geometry Modeling

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File • Express Neutral File In using any of the file formats, MSC.Patran maintains the original mathematical form of the geometry. (That is, the geometry is not approximated into the parametric cubic form.) This means the accuracy of the geometry in all three files is maintained. For more information on the import and export capabilities for IGES, PATRAN 2 Neutral File, and the Express Neutral File, see Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry (Ch. 2). MSC.Patran Native Geometry. You can also create geometry in MSC.Patran (“native” geometry). A large number of methods are available to create, translate, and edit geometry, as well as methods to verify, delete and show information. MSC.Patran’s native geometry consists of:

• Points • Parametric curves • Bi-parametric surfaces • Tri-parametric solids • Boundary represented (B-rep) solids All native geometry is fully parameterized both on the outer boundaries and within the interior (except for B-rep solids which are parameterized only on the outer surfaces). Fully parameterized geometry means that you can apply varying loads or element properties directly to the geometric entity. MSC.Patran evaluates the variation at all exterior and interior locations on the geometric entity.

3


1.2

Concepts and Definitions There are many functions in MSC.Patran that rely on the mathematical representation of the geometry. These functions are:

• Applying a pressure load to a curve, surface or solid. • Creating a field function in parametric space. • Meshing a curve, surface or solid. • Referencing a vertex, edge or face of a curve, surface or solid. For every curve, surface or solid in a user database, information is stored on its Parameterization, Topology and Connectivity which is used in various MSC.Patran functions. The concepts of parameterization, connectivity and topology are easy to understand and they are important to know when building a geometry and an analysis model. The following sections will describe each of these concepts and how you can build an optimal geometry model for analysis.


Parameterization All MSC.Patran geometry are labeled one of the following:

• Point (0-Dimensions) • Curve (1-Dimension) • Surface (2-Dimensions) • Solid (3-Dimensions) Depending on the order of the entity - whether it is a one-dimensional curve, a two-dimensional surface, or a three-dimensional solid - there is one, two or three parameters labeled ξ 1 , ξ 2 , ξ 3 that are associated with the entity. This concept is called “parameterization”. Parameterization means the X,Y,Z coordinates of a curve, surface or solid are represented as functions of variables or parameters. Depending on the dimension of the entity, the X,Y,Z locations are functions of the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 . An analogy to the parameterization of geometry is describing an X , Y location as a function of time, t t. If X = X ( t ) and Y = Y ( t ) , as t changes, X and Y will define a path. Parameterization of geometry does the same thing - as the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 change, it defines various points on the curve, surface and solid. The following describes how a point, curve, surface and solid are parameterized in MSC.Patran. Point. A Point in MSC.Patran is a point coordinate location in three-dimensional global XYZ space. Since a point has zero-dimensions, it has no associated parameters, therefore, it is not parameterized.

P

z

x

(X,Y,Z) y

Figure 1-1 Point in MSC.Patran Curve. A Curve in MSC.Patran is a one-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A curve can also be described as a particle moving along a defined path in space. Another way of defining a curve is, a curve is a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ) , from one-dimensional parametric space into three-dimensional global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-3.

5


A curve has one parametric variable, ξ 1 , which is used to describe the location of any given point, P , along a curve, as shown in Figure 1-2.

P

V2

ξ1 V1

z

x

y Figure 1-2 Curve in MSC.Patran

The parameter, ξ 1 , has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , where at ξ 1 = 0 , P is at endpoint V1 and at ξ 1 = 1 , P is at endpoint V2 . A straight curve can be defined as: P = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2

Eq. 1-1

Φ(ξ1)

0

ξ1

V2

1 z

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1

V1 x

ξ1

y

Figure 1-3 Mapping Function Phi for a Curve Eq. 1-1 of our straight curve can be represented as: Φξ 1 = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2

Eq. 1-2

The derivative of Φ ( ξ 1 ) in Eq. 1-2, would give us Eq. 1-3 which is the tangent of the straight curve. ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = V2 – V1

Eq. 1-3

Because the curve is straight, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 is a constant value. The tangent, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , also defines a vector for the curve, which is the positive direction of ξ 1 .


For any given curve, the tangent and positive direction of ξ 1 at any point along the curve can be found. (The vector, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , usually will not have a length of one.) Surface. A surface in MSC.Patran is a two-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A surface has two parameters, ξ 1 and ξ 2 , where at any given point, P , on the surface, P can be located by ξ 1 and ξ 2 , as shown in Figure 1-4.

V2

ξ2 P

V1

ξ1

z

x

V3

y V4

Figure 1-4 Surface in MSC.Patran A surface generally has three or four edges. Trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges. For more information, see Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20). Similar to a curve, ξ 1 and ξ 2 for a surface have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Thus, at ξ 1 = 0 , ξ 2 = 0 , P is at V1 and at ξ 1 = 1 , ξ 2 = 1 , P is at V3 . A surface is represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ) , which maps the parametric space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-5.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2) (0,1)

(1,1) V2

ξ2

ξ2 V1

ξ1

(0,0)

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1

0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1

ξ1

z

V3

(1,0)

x

V4

y

Figure 1-5 Mapping Function Phi for a Surface The first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ) results in two partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 :

7


∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2

Eq. 1-4

where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction and T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2 direction. At any point for a given surface, T ξ1 and T ξ2 which define the tangents and the positive ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions can be determined. Usually T ξ1 and T ξ2 are not orthonormal, which means they do not have a length of one and they are not perpendicular to each other. Solid. A solid in MSC.Patran is a three-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A solid has three parameters, can be located by ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and

ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , where at any given point, P , within the solid, P ξ 3 , as shown in Figure 1-6.

Note: The above definition applies to tri-parametric solids only. MSC.Patran can also create or import a B-rep solid, which is parameterized on the outer surface only, and not within the interior. See B-rep Solid (p. 24) for more information.

V6

V5 V2

ξ3 ξ2

P

V1

z

V3

ξ1 x

y

V7

V4

Figure 1-6 Solid in MSC.Patran A solid generally has five or six sides or faces. (A B-rep solid can have more than six faces.) The parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . At (0,0,0) P is at V1 and at (1,1,1), P is at V7 .


A solid can be represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , which maps the parametric space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-7.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2,ξ3) (0,1,1) (0,0,1)

V6 (1,1,1)

ξ3

(0,0,0)

V5

(1,0,1)

ξ2 ξ1

ξ3

V7

ξ2

(1,1,0)

V1

ξ1

(1,0,0)

0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1 0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1

V4

z

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 x

V3

y

Figure 1-7 Mapping Function Phi for a Solid If we take the first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , we get three partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ3 , shown in Eq. 1-5: ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 3 = T ξ3

Eq. 1-5

Where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction, T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2 direction, and T ξ3 is the tangent vector in the ξ 3 direction. At any point within a given solid, T ξ1 , T ξ2 and T ξ3 , which define the tangents and positive ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions can be determined.

9


Topology Topology identifies the kinds of items used to define adjacency relationships between geometric entities. Every curve, surface and solid in MSC.Patran has a defined set of topologic entities. You can reference these entities when you build the geometry or analysis model. Examples of this include:

• Creating a surface between edges of two surfaces. • Meshing an edge or a face of a solid. • Referencing a vertex of a curve, surface or solid to apply a loads/BC. Topology is invariant through a one-to-one bicontinuous mapping transformation. This means you can have two curves, surfaces or solids that have different parameterizations, but topologically, they can be identical. To illustrate this concept, Figure 1-8 shows three groups of surfaces A-D. Geometrically, they are different, but topologically they are the same.

A

A

B C

B

D

C D D* A*

C B

* Surface A is not connected to Surface D

Figure 1-8 Topologically Equivalent Surfaces Topologic Entities: Vertex, Edge, Face, Body. The types of topologic entities found in MSC.Patran are the following: Vertex

Defines the topologic endpoint of a curve, or a corner of a surface or a solid. A vertex is separate from a geometric point, although a point can exist on a vertex.

Edge

Defines the topologic curve on a surface or a solid. An edge is separate from a geometric curve, although a curve can exist on an edge.


Face

Defines the topologic surface of a solid. A face is separate from a geometric surface, although a surface can exist on a face.

Body

A group of surfaces that forms a closed volume. A body is usually referenced as a Brep solid or a Volume solid, where only its exterior surfaces are parameterized. See Solids (p. 24) for more information.

Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran. The connectivity for a curve, surface and solid determines the order in which the internal vertex, edge and face IDs will be assigned. The location of a geometric entity’s parametric axes defines the point where assignment of the IDs for the entity’s vertices, edges and faces will begin. Important: Generally, when modeling in MSC.Patran, you do not need to know the topologic entities’ internal IDs. When you cursor select a topologic entity, such as an edge of a surface, the ID will be displayed in the appropriate listbox on the form. Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 show a four sided surface and a six sided solid with the internal vertex, edge and face IDs displayed. If the connectivity changes, then the IDs of the vertices, edges and faces will also change. V7 V2

ED2

V3

ED7

ED11

ED6

V8

F6 V6 ED1

11

F4

F2 ED8

ED5 V3

100

ED3 ED10

ξ2

V5 ED2

ED3 F3 V4

F1 F5

ED9

ξ3

ED4

V2 V1

ED4

V4

ξ1 Figure 1-9 Vertex & Edge Numbering for a Surface

ED1

ξ2

V1

ξ1

Figure 1-10 Face Numbering for a Solid

For example, in Figure 1-9, the edge, ED3, of Surface 11 would be displayed as: Surface 11.3

The vertex, V4, in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as: Surface 11.3.1

V4 has a vertex ID of 1 that belongs to edge 3 on surface 11. The face, F1, of Solid 100 in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as: Solid 100.1

The edge, ED10, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as: Solid 100.1.3

ED12

1


ED10 has an edge ID of 3 that belongs to face 1 on solid 100. The vertex, V6, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as: Solid 100.1.2.2

V6 has a vertex ID of 2 that belongs to edge 2 on face 1 on solid 100.

Topological Congruency and Meshing When meshing adjacent surfaces or solids, MSC.Patran requires the geometry be topologically congruent so that coincident nodes will be created along the common boundaries. Figure 1-11 shows an example where surfaces 1 through 3 are topologically incongruent and surfaces 2 through 5 are topologically congruent. The outer vertices are shared for surfaces 1 through 3, but the inside edges are not. Surfaces 2 through 5 all have common edges, as well as common vertices. There are several ways to correct surfaces 1 through 3 to make them congruent. See Building a Congruent Model (p. 31) for more information.

2

4

2

1 3

Topologically Incongruent

5

3

Topologically Congruent

Figure 1-11 Topologically Incongruent and Congruent Surfaces For a group of surfaces or solids to be congruent, the adjacent surfaces or solids must share common edges, as well as common vertices. (MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran software product required adjacent surfaces or solids to share only the common vertices to be considered topologically congruent for meshing.)


Gaps Between Adjacent Surfaces. Another type of topological incongruence is shown in Figure 1-12. It shows a gap between two pairs of surfaces that is greater than the Global Model Tolerance. This means when you mesh the surface pairs, coincident nodes will not be created along both sides of the gap.

Incongruent Surfaces

Gap > Global Model Tolerance

Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not

Figure 1-12 Topologically Incongruent Surfaces with a Gap MSC recommends two methods for closing surface gaps:

• Use the Create/Surface/Match form. See Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270). • Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481). For more information on meshing, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Non-manifold Topology. Non-manifold topology can be simply defined as a geometry that is non-manufacturable. However, in analysis, non-manifold topology is sometimes either necessary or desirable. Figure 1-13 shows a surface model with a non-manifold edge.

Figure 1-13 Non-manifold Topology at an Edge

1


This case may be perfectly fine. A non-manifold edge has more than two surfaces or solid faces connected to it. Therefore, two solids which share a common face also give non-manifold geometry (both the common face and its edges are non-manifold). In general, non-manifold topology is acceptable in MSC.Patran. The exception is in the creation of a B-rep solid where a non-manifold edge is not allowed. The Verifying Surface Boundaries (p. 698) option detects non-manifold edges as well as free edges.


Connectivity In Figure 1-2, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-6 in Parameterization (p. 5), the axes for the parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , have a unique orientation and location on the curve, surface and solid. Depending on the orientation and location of the ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 axes, this defines a unique connectivity for the curve, surface or solid. For example, although the following two curves are identical, the connectivity is different for each curve (note that the vertex IDs are reversed):

V2

V1

ξ1

ξ1

V1

V2

Figure 1-14 Connectivity Possibilities for a Curve For a four sided surface, there are a total of eight possible connectivity definitions. Two possible connectivities are shown in Figure 1-15. (Again, notice that the vertex and edge IDs are different for each surface.) V2

V3

ED1

ED2

ξ2

ED2

ED3 V2

V1

ξ1

V3

ED4

ED1

ξ2

ED3 V4

V4

ξ1 ED4 V1

Figure 1-15 Two Possible Connectivities for a Surface

1


For a tri-parametric solid with six faces, there are a total of 24 possible connectivity definitions in MSC.Patran - three orientations at each of the eight vertices. Two possible connectivities are shown in Figure 1-16. V6

V6

V5

V5 V2

ξ3 ξ2 V1

V2

V7 V8

V8 V3

ξ1 V4

ξ1

ξ3

V1

V4

ξ2

V3

Figure 1-16 Two Possible Connectivities for a Solid Plotting the Parametric Axes. MSC.Patran can plot the location and orientation of the parametric axes for the geometric entities by turning on the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form, under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. Modifying the Connectivity. For most geometric entities, you can modify the connectivity by altering the orientation and/or location of the parametric axes by using the Geometry application’s Edit action’s Reverse method. See Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414). For solids, you can also control the location of the parametric origin under the Preferences/Geometry menu and choose either the MSC.Patran Convention button or the PATRAN 2.5 Convention button for the Solid Origin Location.


Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran The geometry’s parameterization and connectivity affect the geometry and finite element analysis model in the following ways: Defines Order of Internal Topologic IDs. The parameterization and connectivity for a curve, surface or solid define the order of the internal IDs of their topologic entities. MSC.Patran stores these IDs internally and displays them when you cursor select a vertex, edge or face. See Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran (p. 11) for more information. Defines Positive Surface Normals. Using right hand rule by crossing a surface’s ξ 1 direction with its ξ 2 direction, it defines the surface’s positive normal direction ( ξ 3 direction). This affects many areas of geometry and finite element creation, including creating B-rep solids. See Building An Optimal Geometry Model (p. 30) for more information. Defines Positive Pressure Load Directions. The parameterization and connectivity of a curve, surface or solid define the positive direction for a pressure load, and it defines the surface’s top and bottom locations for an element variable pressure load. See Create Structural LBCs Sets (p. 19) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information. Helps Define Parametric Field Functions. If you reference a field function that was defined in parametric space, when creating a varying loads/BC or a varying element or material property, the loads/BC values or the property values will depend on the geometry’s parameterization and the orientation of the parametric axes. See Fields Forms (p. 144) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information. Defines Node and Element ID Order For IsoMesh. The MSC.Patran mapped mesher, IsoMesh, will use the geometric entity’s parameterization and connectivity to define the order of the node and element IDs and the element connectivity. (The parameterization and connectivity will not be used if the mesh will have a transition or change in the number of elements within the surface or solid.) See IsoMesh (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information.

1


Global Model Tolerance & Geometry MSC.Patran uses the Global Model Tolerance when it imports or accesses geometry, when it creates geometry, or when it modifies existing geometry. The Global Model Tolerance is found under the Preferences/Global menu. The default value is 0.005. When creating geometry, if two points are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then MSC.Patran will only create the first point and not the second. This rule also applies to curves, surfaces and solids. If the points that describe two curves, surfaces or solids are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then only the first curve, surface or solid will be created, and not the second. Important: For models with dimensions which vary significantly from 10 units, MSC recommends you set the Global Model Tolerance to .05% of the maximum model dimension. For more information on the Global Model Tolerance, see (p. 57) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.


1.3

Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran Generally, there are four types of geometry objects in MSC.Patran:1

• Point (default color is cyan) • Parametric Curve (default color is yellow) • Bi-Parametric Surface (default color is green) • Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue) MSC.Patran also can access, import, and create Trimmed Surfaces, B-rep Solids and Volume Solids. See Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) and Solids (p. 24) for more information. You also can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces and solids, which are recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file. See Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) for more information. For more information on the types of geometry that can be created, see Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27).

1The

default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

1


Trimmed Surfaces Trimmed surfaces are a special class of bi-parametric surfaces. Trimmed surfaces can be accessed from an external CAD user file; they can be imported from an IGES or Express Neutral file; and they can be created in MSC.Patran. Unlike other types of bi-parametric surfaces, trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges, and they can have one or more interior holes or cutouts. Also, trimmed surfaces have an associated parent surface that is not displayed. A trimmed surface is defined by identifying the closed active and inactive regions of the parent surface. This parent surface defines the parameterization and curvature of the trimmed surface. You can create three types of trimmed surfaces in MSC.Patran:1

• General Trimmed Surface (default color is magenta) • Simply Trimmed Surface (default color is green) • Composite Trimmed Surface (default is magenta) • Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface (default color is green) (Green is the default color for both a simply trimmed surface and a general, bi-parametric surface.) Important: Simply trimmed surfaces and ordinary composite trimmed surfaces can be meshed with IsoMesh or Paver. General trimmed surfaces and composite trimmed surfaces can only be meshed with Paver. See Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information. Also note that some geometric operations are not currently possible with a general trimmed surface, e.g., a general trimmed surface can not be used to create a triparametric solid. General Trimmed Surface. A general trimmed surface can have any number of outer edges and any number of inner edges which describe holes or cutouts. These outer and inner edges are defined by a closed loop of chained curves. (Chained curves can be created with the Create/Curve/Chain form. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).) An example is shown in Figure 1-17. All general trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default color of magenta.2

1The

default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu. 2The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.


Inner Edges or Holes

Outer Surface Edges

Figure 1-17 General Trimmed Surface Simply Trimmed Surface. A simply trimmed surface can only have four outer edges. It cannot have any inner edges, or holes or cutouts. A simply trimmed surface reparametrizes the bounded region of the parent and is called an overparametrization. An example is shown in Figure 1-18. (A simply trimmed surface can have three sides, with one of the four edges degenerating to a zero length edge.) Like a general trimmed surface, a simply trimmed surface’s outer edges are defined by a closed loop of chained curves. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131). All simply trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default color of green. 1

1The


2


Four Outer Edges

Underlying Invisible Parent Surface

Figure 1-18 Simply Trimmed Surface Sometimes a three of four sided region which define a trimmed surface will be created as a general trimmed surface instead. This occurs when the overparametrization distorts the bounded region of the parent to such an extent that it would be difficult to mesh and use for analysis. Composite Trimmed Surface. The composite trimmed surface is a kind of supervisor surface that allows a collection of surfaces to be considered as one surface defined within a specific boundary. This surface can also have holes in it. Evaluations on the composite trimmed surface is similar to evaluations on the MSC.Patran trim surface (General Trimmed Surface). The big difference is that it is three to five times slower than ordinary surfaces. The composite trimmed surface should be considered a tool. Once the surface is built, it is a single entity, yet processes on multiple surfaces, relieving the applications of the task of determining where and when to move from one surface to another. APPLICATION: The composite trimmed surface supervisor is a bounded PLANAR trim surface. It acquires its name from the type of service it performs. Let us, for a moment, consider the composite trimmed surface to be a cloud in the sky. The sun, being the light source behind the cloud, creating a shadow on planet earth only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true with the composite trimmed surface, except a view vector is given to determine the light direction. “Under Surfaces” replace planet earth. The valid region on the “Under Surfaces” is defined by where the outline of the composite trimmed surface appears.


STEPS_BUILDING: There are three basic steps in building a composite trimmed surface. Step 1

Creating the outer perimeter curve. In most cases this is a MSC.Patran curve chain entity.

Step 2

Selecting an acceptable view direction for the view vector and planar Composite trimmed surface entity. The view vector is the most important aspect of building a composite trimmed surface. The resulting view vector must yield only one intersection solution at any position on the “Under Surfaces”. The user must select the proper view for the location of the composite trimmed surface with some forethought and eliminate the possibility of any of the underlying surfaces wrapping around in back of one another. In some cases this may not be possible! The user must then create more than one composite trimmed surface. Additionally, since the composite trimmed surface supervisor is PLANAR, it cannot encompass more than a 180 degree field of view. An example of this would be a cylindrically shaped group of surfaces. It would probably take three properly placed composite trimmed surface to represent it; one for every 120 degrees of rotation.

Step 3

Determines which currently displayed surfaces will be become part of the composite trimmed surface domain (“Under Surfaces”). The user may individually select the correct underlying surfaces or, if wanting to select all visible surfaces, the user must place into “ERASE” all surfaces which might cause multiple intersections and then select the remaining visible surfaces.

RULES: 1.

The composite trimmed surface domain must not encompass any dead space. If any portion has a vacancy (no “Under Surface” under it), unpredictable results will occur.

2. Processing along the view vector must yield a single intersection solution at any position on the underlying surfaces within the composite trimmed surface’s domain. Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface. The only difference between an Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface and the Composite Trimmed Surface is that this type will have only four edges comprising the outer loop and no inner loops.

2


Solids There are three types of solids that can be accessed or imported, or created in MSC.Patran:1

• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue) • B-rep Solid (default color is white) • Volume Solid (default color is pink or light red) on (p. 2) lists the types of solids created with each Geometry Application method. Tri-Parametric Solid. All solids in MSC.Patran, except for B-rep solids and volume solids, are tri-parametric solids. Tri-parametric solids are parameterized on the surface, as well as inside the solid. Tri-parametric solids can only have four to six faces with no interior voids or holes. Tri-parametric solids can be meshed with IsoMesh or TetMesh. Important: IsoMesh will create hexagonal elements if the solid has five or six faces, but some wedge elements will be created for the five faced solid. IsoMesh will create a tetrahedron mesh for a four faced solid. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling. B-rep Solid. A B-rep solid is formed from a group of topologically congruent surfaces that define a completely closed volume. Only its outer surfaces or faces are parameterized and not the interior. An example is shown in Figure 1-19. The group of surfaces that define the B-rep solid are its shell. A B-rep shell defines the exterior of the solid, as well as any interior voids or holes. Shells can be composed of bi-parametric surfaces and/or trimmed surfaces. B-rep solids can be created with the Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) on using the form.

Figure 1-19 B-rep Solid in MSC.Patran B-rep solids are meshed with TetMesh. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information. 1The



Parametric Cubic Geometry Parametric cubic geometry is a special class of parameterized geometry. Parametric cubic geometry is supported in MSC.Patran by the PATRAN 2 neutral file and the IGES file for import and export. You have the option to create parametric cubic curves, bi-parametric cubic surfaces and triparametric cubic solids, by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button found on most Geometry application forms. Important: Unless you intend to export the geometry using the PATRAN 2 neutral file, in most situations, you do not need to press the PATRAN 2 Convention button to create parametric cubic geometry. Parametric cubic geometry can also be created in MSC.Patran, which are referred to as “grids”, “lines”, “patches” and “hyperpatches.” Parametric cubic geometry is defined by a parametric cubic equation. For example, a parametric cubic curve is represented by the following cubic equation: 3

2

Z ( ξ1 ) = S1 ξ1 + S2 ξ1 + S3 ξ1 + S4

Eq. 1-6

where Z ( ξ 1 ) represents the general coordinate of the global coordinates X,Y, and Z; S 1 , S 2 , S 3 , and S 4 are arbitrary constants; and ξ 1 is a parameter in the range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . For more information on parametric cubic geometry, see MSC.Patran Reference Manual.

Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry There are some limitations on parametric cubic geometry. Limits on Types of Curvature. There are limits to the types of curvature or shapes that are allowed for a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid (see Figure 1-20). Eq. 1-7 and Eq. 1-8 below represent the first and second derivatives of Eq. 1-6: 2

Z′ ( ξ 1 ) = 3S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 ξ 1 + S 3

Eq. 1-7

Z″ ( ξ 1 ) = 6S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2

Eq. 1-8

Eq. 1-7 shows that a parametric cubic curve can only have two points with zero slope and Eq. 18 shows that it can only have one point of inflection, as shown in Figure 1-20.

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

Figure 1-20 Limitations of the Parametric Cubic Curvature

2


Limits on Accuracy of Subtended Arcs. When you subtend an arc using a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid, the difference between the true arc radius and the arc radius calculated by the parametric cubic equation will increase. That is, as the angle of a subtended arc for a parametric cubic entity increases, the accuracy of the entity from the true representation of the arc decreases. Figure 1-21 shows that as the subtended angle of a parametric cubic entity increases, the percent error also increases substantially beyond 75 degrees. When creating arcs with parametric cubic geometry, MSC recommends using Figure 1-21 to determine the maximum arc length and its percent error that is acceptable to you. For example, if you create an arc length of 90 degrees, it will have an error of 0.0275% from the true arc length. For most geometry models, MSC recommends arc lengths represented by parametric cubic geometry should be 90 degrees or less. For a more accurate model, the parametric cubic arc lengths should be 30 degrees or less.

Percent Error in the Radius (x 10-2)

Percent Error = 100*(Computed Radius - Actual Arc Radius) / Actual Radius 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0

15

30

45

60

75

90

Total Subtended Angle in Degrees Figure 1-21 Maximum Percent Error for Parametric Cubic Arc


Matrix of Geometry Types Created All Geometry Application forms use the following Object menu terms:

• Point • Curve • Surface • Solid • Plane • Vector • Coordinate Frame MSC.Patran will create a specific geometric type of the parametric curve, bi-parametric surface and tri-parametric solid based on the method used for the Create action or Edit action. Table 1-1, and list the types of geometry created for each Create or Edit action method. The tables also list if each method can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button on the application form. (Parametric cubic geometry is recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file for export.) For more information on each Create or Edit action method, see Overview of Geometry Create Action (p. 70) and/or Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414). Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran

Create or Edit Method

Type of Curve

PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic)

XYZ

Parametric Cubic

Not Applicable

Arc3Point

Arc

Yes

2D Arc2Point

Arc

Yes

2D Arc3Point

Arc

Yes

2D Circle

Circle

Yes

Conic

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Extract

Curve On Surface

Yes

Fillet

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Fit

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Intersect

PieceWise Cubic Polynomial

Yes

Involute

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Normal

Parametric Cubic

N/A

2D Normal

Parametric Cubic

N/A

2D ArcAngles

Arc

Yes

Point

Parametric Cubic

N/A

2


Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran (continued)


Type of Curve


Project

Curve On Surface

Yes

PWL

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Revolve

Arc

Yes

Spline, Loft Spline option

PieceWise Cubic Polynomial

Yes

Spline, B-Spline option

PieceWise Rational Polynomial

Yes

Spline, B-Spline option

NURB*

Yes

TanCurve

Parametric Cubic

N/A

TanPoint

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Chain

Composite Curve

No

Manifold

Curve On Surface

Yes

* NURB splines are created if the NURBS Accelerator toggle is pressed OFF (default is ON) on the Geometry Preferences form, found under the Preferences/Geometry menu. This is true whether you create the spline in MSC.Patran or if you import the spline from an IGES file. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. If the NURBS Accelerator is ON, PieceWise Rational Polynomial splines will be created instead. Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran


Type of Surface


XYZ

Parametric Bi-Cubic

Not Applicable

Curve

Curve Interpolating Surface

Yes

Decompose

Trimmed Surface

Yes

Edge

Generalized Coons Surface

Yes

Extract

Surface On Solid

Yes

Extrude

Extruded Surface

Yes

Fillet

Parametric Bi-Cubic

N/A

Glide

Parametric Bi-Cubic

N/A

Match

Parametric Bi-Cubic

N/A

Normal

Sweep Normal Surface

N/A

Revolve

Surface of Revolution

Yes


Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran (continued)


Type of Surface


Ruled

Ruled Surface

No

Vertex

Curve Interpolating Surface

Yes

Trimmed (Surface Option)

Trimmed Surface

No

Trimmed (Planar Option)

Trimmed Surface

No

Trimmed (Composite Option)

Composite Trimmed Surface

No

Table 1-3 Types of Solids Created in MSC.Patran


Type of Solid


XYZ

Parametric Tri-Cubic

Not Applicable

Extrude

Extruded Solid

Yes

Face

Solid 5Face, Solid 6Face

Yes

Glide

Glide Solid

Yes

Normal

Sweep Normal Solid

Yes

Revolve

Solid of Revolution

Yes

Surface

Surface Interpolating Solid

Yes

Vertex

Parametric Tri-Cubic

N/A

B-rep

Ordinary Body

No

Decompose

Tri-Parametric

Yes

2


1.4

Building An Optimal Geometry Model A well defined geometry model simplifies the building of the optimal finite element analysis model. A poorly defined geometry model complicates, or in some situations, makes it impossible to build or complete the analysis model. In computer aided engineering (CAE) analysis, most geometry models do not consist of neatly trimmed, planar surfaces or solids. In some situations, you may need to modify the geometry to build a congruent model, create a set of degenerate surfaces or solids, or decompose a trimmed surface or B-rep solid. The following sections will explain how to:

• Build a congruent model. • Verify and align surface normals. • Build trimmed surfaces. • Decompose trimmed surfaces into three- or four-sided surfaces. • Build a B-rep solid. • Build degenerate surfaces or solids.


Building a Congruent Model MSC.Patran requires adjacent surfaces or solids be topologically congruent so that the nodes will be coincident at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12) for more information. For example, Figure 1-22 shows surfaces 1, 2 and 3 which are incongruent. When meshing with Isomesh or Paver, MSC.Patran cannot guarantee the nodes will coincide at the edges shared by surfaces 1, 2 and 3.

2 1

3

Figure 1-22 Incongruent Set of Surfaces To make the surfaces in Figure 1-22 congruent, you can:

• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form with the Surface-Point option. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481) on using the form.

• Or, break surface 1 with the Edit/Surface/Break form. See Surface Break Options (p. 457) on using the form. The following describes the method of using the Edit/Surface/Break form. To make surfaces 1 through 3 congruent, we will break surface 1 into surfaces 4 and 5, as shown in Figure 1-23:

4

2

5 3

3


Figure 1-23 Congruent Set of Surfaces The entries for the Edit/Surface/Break form are shown below:

◆ Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method:

Break

Option:

Point Pressing this button will delete surface 1, after the break.

Delete Original Surfaces Surface List:

Surface 1

Cursor select or enter the ID for surface 1.

Break Point List

Point 10

Cursor select or enter the ID for point 10, as shown in Figure 1-24.

Since Auto Execute is ON, we do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Cursor select Surface 1 for the Surface List on the form.

2 1 Cursor select Point 10 for the Point List on the form.

10

3

Figure 1-24 Cursor Locations for Surface Break


Building Optimal Surfaces Building optimal surfaces will save time and it will result in a better idealized finite element analysis model of the design or mechanical part. Optimal surfaces consist of a good overall shape with no sharp corners, and whose normal is aligned in the same direction with the other surfaces in the model. Avoid ing Sharp Corners. In general, MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) recommends that you avoid sharp inside corners when creating surfaces. That is, you should generally try to keep the inside corners of the surfaces to 45 degrees or more. The reason is that when you mesh surfaces with quadrilateral elements, the shapes of the elements are determined by the overall shape of the surface, see Figure 1-25. The more skewed the quadrilateral elements are, the less reasonable your analysis results might be. Note: You can use the surface display lines to predict what the surface element shapes will look like before meshing. You can increase or decrease the number of display lines under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. For further recommendations, please consult the vendor documentation for your finite element analysis code.

1

1 2

2

4

4 3 Surfaces With Sharp Corners

3

Optimal Surface Shapes

Figure 1-25 Surfaces With and Without Sharp Corners

3


Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals Using Edit/Surface/Reverse. MSC.Patran can determine the positive normal direction for each surface by using right hand rule and crossing the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes of a surface. Depending on the surface’s connectivity, each surface could have different normal directions, as shown in Figure 1-26.

ξ1 ξ2

ξ2 ξ1

Figure 1-26 Opposing Normals for Two Surfaces Important: In general, you should try to maintain the same normal direction for all surfaces in a model. The normal direction of a surface affects finite element applications, such defining the positive pressure load direction, the top and bottom surface locations for a variable pressure load, and the element connectivity. Use the Edit/Surface/Reverse form to display the surface normal vectors, and to reverse or align the normals for a group of surfaces. See Reversing Surfaces (p. 501) on using the form.


Example of Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals. For example, Figure 1-27 shows a group of eight surfaces that we want to display the normal vectors, and if necessary, reverse or align the normals. To display the surface normals without reversing, do the following:

◆ Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method:

Reverse

Surface List

Surface 1:8

Make sure you turn Auto Execute OFF before cursor selecting surfaces 1-8.

Draw Normal Vectors

And do not press Apply. Apply will reverse the normals.

1

2

5

3

6

4

7

8

Figure 1-27 Group of Surfaces to Verify Normals You should see red arrows drawn on each surface which represent the surface normal vectors, as shown in Figure 1-28.

1

2

5

3

6

4

7

8

Figure 1-28 Surface Normal Vectors

3


Align the normals by reversing the normals for surfaces 1 through 4: Surface List

Surface 1:4

-ApplyDraw Normal Vectors

This will plot the updated normal vector directions.

Figure 1-29 shows the updated normal directions which are now aligned.

1

2

5

3

6

4

7

8

Figure 1-29 Aligned Surface Normal Vectors


Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces Trimmed surfaces are preferred for modeling a complex part with many sides. However, there may be areas in your model where you may want to decompose, or break, a trimmed surface into a series of three or four sided surfaces. One reason is that you want to mesh the surface area with IsoMesh instead of Paver. (IsoMesh can only mesh surfaces that have three or four edges.) Another reason is that you want to create tri-parametric solids from the decomposed three or four sided surfaces and mesh with IsoMesh. To decompose a trimmed surface, use the Geometry application’s Create/Surface/Decompose form. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 255) on using the form. When entered in the Create/Surface/Decompose form, the select menu that appears at the bottom of the screen will show the following icons: Point/Vertex/Edge Point/Interior Point. This will select a point for decomposing in the order listed. If not point or vertex is found, the point closest to edge will be used or a point will be projected onto the surface. Use cursor select or directly input an existing point on the surface. If point is not on the surface, it will be projected onto the surface. Use to cursor select a point location on an edge of a trimmed surface. Use to cursor select a point location inside a trimmed surface. Use to cursor select a vertex of a trimmed surface. Example. Figure 1-30 shows trimmed surface 4 with seven edges. We will decompose surface 4 into four four-sided surfaces.

20 21 26 3

25

24

22

23 Figure 1-30 Trimmed Surface to be Decomposed

3


Our first decomposed surface will be surface 3, as shown in Figure 1-31. The figure shows surface 3 cursor defined by three vertex locations and one point location along an edge. The point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

4 Use Use to cursor select this point location along the edge.

to cursor select these three vertices.

Figure 1-31 Point Locations for Decomposed Surface 4 Figure 1-32 shows the remaining decomposed surfaces 5, 6 and 7 and the select menu icons used to cursor define the surfaces. Again, the point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

4 Use to cursor select this point along the edge for Surface 5.

Use to cursor select these three vertices for Surface 5.

5

7

Use

Use

6

to cursor select these four vertices for Surface 7.

to cursor select these three vertices for Surface 6. Use to cursor select this point along the edge for Surface 6.


Figure 1-32 Point Locations for Decomposed Surfaces 5, 6 and 7 Use Surface Display Lines as a Guide. Generally, the surface display lines are a good guide to where the trimmed surface can be decomposed. MSC recommends increasing the display lines to four or more. The display lines are controlled under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.

3


Building B-rep Solids Boundary represented (B-rep) solids are created by using the Geometry application’s Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) for more information on the form. There are three rules to follow when you create a B-rep solid in MSC.Patran: 1. The group of surfaces that will define the B-rep solid must fully enclose a volume. 2. The surfaces must be topologically congruent. That is, the adjacent surfaces must share a common edge. 3. The normal surface directions for the exterior shell must all point outward, as shown in Figure 1-33. That is, the normals must point away from the material of the body. This will be done automatically during creation as long as rules 1 and 26 are satisfied. B-rep solids created in MSC.Patran can only be meshed with TetMesh. Important: At this time, MSC.Patran can only create a B-rep solid with an exterior shell, and no interior shells.

9

8

4 3

7

10

1 6 2

Y

5

Z X

1

Figure 1-33 Surface Normals for B-rep Solid


Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids A bi-parametric surface can degenerate from four edges to three edges. A tri-parametric solid can degenerate from six faces to four or five faces (a tetrahedron or a wedge, respectively). The following describes the best procedures for creating a degenerate triangular surface and a degenerate tetrahedron and a wedge shaped solid. Important:

IsoMesh will create hexahedron elements only, if the solid has six faces. Some wedge elements will be created for a solid with five faces. IsoMesh will create tetrahedron elements only, for a solid with four faces. TetMesh will create tetrahedron elements only, for all shaped solids.

Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle). There are two ways you can create a degenerate, three-sided surface:

• Use the Create/Surface/Edge form with the 3 Edge option. See Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method) (p. 257) on using the form.

• Or, use the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. See Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves (p. 240) on using the form. Figure 1-34 illustrates the method of using the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. Notice that the apex of the surface is defined by a zero length curve by using the Curve select menu icon shown in Figure 1-34.

Cursor select this point twice using this icon: Cursor select this edge or curve for the Starting or Ending Curve List.

in the Curve select menu for the Starting or Ending Curve List.

Figure 1-34 Creating a Degenerate Surface Using Create/Surface/Curve Building a Degenerate Solid Four Sided Solid (Tetrahedron). A four sided (tetrahedron) solid can be created by using the Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option, where the starting surface is defined by a point for the apex of the tetrahedron, and the ending surface is an opposing surface or face, as shown in Figure 1-35. Five Sided Solid (Pentahedron). A five sided (pentahedron) solid can be created by using:

4


• The Create/ Solid/Face form with the 5 Face option. See Creating Solids from Faces (p. 343) on using the form.

• The Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option. See Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method) (p. 327) on using the form. Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37 illustrate using the Create/Solid/Surface form to create the pentahedron and a wedge.

For the Starting Surface List, highlight

and

in the select menu, and cursor select this point twice for the first edge of the surface. again,

Highlight

then, cursor select this same point twice again. Cursor select this surface or face for the Ending Surface List. Figure 1-35 Creating a Tetrahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

For the Starting Surface List, highlight

and

in the select menu, and cursor select this point twice for the first edge of the surface. Highlight

again,

then, cursor select this same point twice again. Cursor select this surface or face for the Ending Surface List. Figure 1-36 Creating a Pentahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface


For the Starting Surface List, highlight in the select menu, and cursor select this curve twice.

Cursor select this surface or face for the Ending Surface List. Figure 1-37 Creating a Wedge Using Create/Solid/Surface

4



CHAPTER

2

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

■ Overview ■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry ■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry


2.1

Overview MSC.Patran can access geometry from an external CAD system user file. Geometry can also be imported (or read) from a PATRAN 2 Neutral file or from an IGES file. MSC.Patran can export (or write) some or all geometry to an external PATRAN 2 Neutral file or IGES file. Geometry can be accessed or imported into the user database either by using the File/Import menus or by using the File/CAD Model Access menus on the MSC.Patran main form. Geometry can be exported from the database using the File/Export menus. For more information on executing the File/Import and File/Export forms, see Importing Models (p. 26) and Export (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. For more information on accessing CAD models, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry (p. 47). For more information on import and export support of geometry for the PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57). For more information on which IGES entities are supported by MSC.Patran for importing and exporting, see Supported IGES Entity Types - Import (p. 51) and Supported IGES Entity Types -Export (p. 116) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

CHAPTER 2 Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

2.2

Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry MSC.Patran can directly access geometry from an external CAD file for the following CAD systems that are listed in Table 2-1. This unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature allows you to access the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD file. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads and boundary conditions as well as the element properties directly to the geometry. You can execute a specific MSC.Patran CAD Access module by using the File/Importing Models menus on the main form. See Importing Models (p. 26) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. For more information on using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, see Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files (p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files (p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Table 2-1 Supported CAD Systems and Their MSC.Patran CAD Access Modules Supported CAD System

MSC.Patran CAD Access Module *

EDS/Unigraphics

MSC.Patran Unigraphics

Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology

MSC.Patran ProENGINEER

CATIA by Dassault Systemes

MSC.Patran CATIA

EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision

MSC.Patran EUCLID 3

CADDS 5 by Computervision

MSC.Patran CADDS 5

* Each MSC.Patran CAD Access module must be licensed before you can access the appropriate external CAD file. You can find out which MSC.Patran products are currently licensed by pressing the MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) icon on the main form, and then pressing the License button on the form that appears.

Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics If MSC.Patran Unigraphics is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an external EDS/Unigraphics part file. Features of MSC.Patran Unigraphics

• Unigraphics part file can be accessed in MSC.Patran using one of two methods. The first method is express file based import. The second method is direct parasolid transmit file based import. In both cases, Unigraphics geometry is imported and stored in a MSC.Patran database.

• MSC.Patran uses the original geometry definitions of the accessed entities, without any approximations. Parasolid evaluators are directly used for entities imported via the direct parasolid method.

4


• CAD Access filters are provided that can be selected based on the defined EDS/Unigraphics entity types, levels, and layers.

• You can automatically create MSC.Patran groups when accessing the geometry based on the defined entity types, levels, or layers. For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files (p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Tips For Accessing EDS/Unigraphics Geometry for Express File Based Import 1. When you execute EDS/Unigraphics, make sure the solid to be accessed is topologically congruent with no gaps (see Figure 2-1). For more information, see Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12). Verify that the edges of the solid’s adjacent faces share the same end points or vertices, and that there are no gaps between the faces. 2. You can improve MSC.Patran Unigraphics’ performance by reducing the number of entities to be processed by using the Entity Type filter on the MSC.Patran Import form and unselect or un-highlight all entities of a particular type that you do not want, before you access the part file. For example, you can unselect the entity type, “BoundedPlane”, to eliminate all bounded plane entities. For the direct parasolid import option, the entity type filter can be used for wire body/sheet body/solid body only. 3. Put those entities in EDS/Unigraphics that you want to access into specific layers. Then select to only those layers in the MSC.Patran Import form before importing the part. 4. Make sure the MSC.Patran Global Model Tolerance is reset to an appropriate value if you will be accessing long thin surfaces and solids with small dimensions (default is 0.005). For example, set the tolerance value so that it is smaller than the smallest edge length (greater than 10.0E-6) in the model. This will improve model usability on some models.

Face 1

Face 2

NOT Topologically Valid (lacking congruent edge)

Gap

Face 1

Zero Gap

Face 2

Topologically Valid (with congruent edge)

Figure 2-1 Topologically Congruent Surfaces for MSC.Patran Unigraphics


Tips For Accessing Parasolid Geometry. This section provides helpful hints and recommendations regarding the usage of MSC.Patran as it pertains to Parasolid integration. Solid Geometry Guidelines Disassembling Solids

The Edit/Solid/Disassemble function in the Geometry Application can be used to create simply trimmed surfaces (green 4-sided) with one command. This can be a big timesaver if the B-rep Solid is being disassembled to eventually create tri-parametric solids (blue) for Hex meshing. This command will convert all 4-sided B-rep Solid faces into simply trimmed surfaces (green) which then can be used to construct tri-parametric solids.

Solids Break

If difficulties are encountered in breaking a solid: 1. First disassemble the original solid (Edit/Solid/Disassemble). 2. Try to reconstruct a new solid using Create/Solid/B-rep. If this is unsuccessful due to gaps between surfaces, use the Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. If a solid is created, continue with the break operation. 3. If steps (a) and (b) were unsuccessful:

• Break the trimmed surfaces from the disassembled solid (step (a)). If this operation is slow, refit the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit) before the break operation.

• Create the additional surfaces in the interior required to enclose the individual solid volumes.

• Create the new individual solids using Create/Solid/B-rep. If the B-rep can not be created due to surface gaps, use Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. Global Model Tolerance

After successful access of Unigraphics geometry via the Parasolid Direct method, the Global Model Tolerance will be set relative to the models geometric characteristics. This tolerance is the recommended tolerance for MSC.Patran applications to use for best results.

Solids Group Transform

Group transform for solids is not supported. For information about transforming solids in pre-release format, see (p. 50).

4


Meshing Guidelines Hybrid TetMesher Global Edge Lengths

The Hybrid tetmesher only accepts global edge lengths for mesh criteria if attempting to directly mesh a solid. If you encounter difficulties, decrease the global edge length.

Hybrid TetMesher Mesh Control

The Hybrid tetmesher does not write nodes that lie on solid edges into the mesh seed table. This limits the ability of the Hybrid tetmesher to recognize existing meshes. For example, if your requirements are: (1) to match adjacent meshes (i.e., multiple solids); (2) that the mesh be able to recognize a hard curve/point; or (3) to define mesh seed prior to solid meshing, follow these steps:

• Define any desired hard points/curves and mesh seeds. • Surface mesh the geometry using the paver, creating triangular elements which completely enclose the desired geometric volume.

• Invoke the Hybrid tetmesher, using the previously created triangular elements as input. Paver

If the paver exhibits difficulties meshing some geometry or making congruent meshes:

• Delete any existing mesh on the problematic geometry. • Perform an Edit/Surface/Refit. • Do an Edit/Surface/Edge Match if congruency is an issue. • Mesh again.


PRE-RELEASE CAPABILITY: Solid Geometry Guidelines Solids - Group Transform

Group transform for solids is not supported. If a transformed solid is required, consider the following alternatives: (1) Perform the transformation in the native CAD system and then again access the desired geometry in MSC.Patran; (2) Enable an environment variable before executing MSC.Patran. At the system prompt, type: setenv P3_UG_ENTITY_FILTER 1 which allows the transformation of Parasolid solid geometry and perform the transformation. If a solid is successfully constructed, continue as planned. If not, either:

• Mesh the original solid and transform the resulting finite element mesh, with the limitation being that element properties and loads/boundary conditions will have to be assigned directly to the finite elements; or

• Try to reconstruct a B-rep solid from the constituent surfaces that result from the transformation, by first using Geometry tools such as Edit/Surface/Sew, Edit/Surface/Edge Match, etc., to reconnect the surfaces and then use Create/Solid/B-rep.

• Initially access the original geometry (Unigraphics only) using the Express Translation method. If a solid is successfully imported, a transformation of the geometry is supported.

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Surface Congruency

Unigraphics does not automatically enforce surface congruency. Typically, CAE applications require congruent meshes; therefore, geometric surfaces must usually be congruent. Accessing geometry through Parasolid simply retrieves the Unigraphics geometry exactly as it is defined; an explicit action must be taken to sew geometric surfaces, otherwise they will not be congruent. It is recommended that models with surfaces be sewn up in Unigraphics prior to access by MSC.Patran. MSC.Patran offers the ability to also invoke the Unigraphics surface sew tool; in fact, this is the default operation when accessing Sheet Bodies.

Unigraphics Sew With Verify During Geometry Access

“Unigraphics Sew” and “Verify Boundary” toggles are, by default, ON during import. The Verification entails placement of markers at all incongruent surface edges, thus allowing a user to quickly identify whether the Unigraphics Sew was completely (or partially) successful. The markers may be removed using the Broom icon.

5


Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Problem Unigraphics Entities From Import

MSC.Patran detects three different types of anomalies during Unigraphics part file import: a) Suspect939 Entities: Sometimes Unigraphics needs to take special actions to convert surfaces from earlier version parts. These surfaces are attributed with “Suspect939.” Although for the most part these surfaces are usable, Unigraphics recommends that these surfaces be replaced. As such, MSC.Patran will not attempt to include these surfaces in the Unigraphics sewing, and we recommend that these surfaces be refitted once imported into MSC.Patran. You will find these surfaces in a group named, _UG_SUSPECT. b) Invalid Entities: Before importing the Unigraphics model, MSC.Patran will check each surface and curve entities to ensure consistency and validity. Occasionally, some entities do not pass the checks. These invalid entities will be excluded from both UG sewing and MSC.Patran import. If you see such a message in the invoke window, you should go back to UG to ensure the model is valid. Please reference the next section, Unigraphics Model Checks (p. 52) for steps to do this check. One recommended way is to refit/reconstruct the surface in Unigraphics and then reimport it into MSC.Patran. If UG sewing is turned on for the MSC.Patran import, there is a chance that invalid entities are created by the UG sew. These entities will be brought into MSC.Patran and put into a group named, _UG_INVALID. As there is no guarantee that entities in this group will work with any applications, we strongly recommend you first commit/save the MSC.Patran database and then reconstruct these bodies if possible. c) Gap Surfaces: Sometimes surfaces, that are degenerate or are/close to being zero area, appear in the model. These surfaces are called “gap surfaces.” If there are any such gap surfaces, they will be in a group named, _GAP_SURFACE. Please inspect the imported model and determine if these gap surfaces should be removed from the model.

Unigraphics Model Checks

Unigraphics provides geometry evaluation tools which are extremely useful in judging the quality of a model. Here are some geometry/topology checks Unigraphics can perform and provide results with any UG part: (1) In Unigraphics V13.0, “Info” is available at the top menu bar, under Info/Analysis/Examine Geometry. If you use this on surfaces and any are ill-defined, they will be flagged as “suspect”. (2) In Unigraphics V13.0, Info is available at the top menu bar. To run all checks:

• Use Info->Analysis->Examine Geometry... • Choose “Set All Checks”, then “OK”. • Choose “Select All” to check the entire model currently selectable. NOTE: Default Distance tolerance is 0.001 units and Default Angle tolerance is 0.5 units.


Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines MSC.Patran Surface Sew

In addition to accessing the Unigraphics surface sew tool, MSC.Patran offers an additional capability to sew surfaces beyond what Unigraphics supports (e.g., resolution of T-edges). If the Unigraphics surface sew does not resolve all incongruences, try using the MSC.Patran surface sew as well. This capability can be accessed through Edit/Surface/Sew in the Geometry application. If both the Unigraphics and MSC.Patran surface sew tools cannot remove all of the gaps and incongruencies, then two options are available. The first option is to refit all of the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit). Sometimes, after this operation, these surfaces can be sewn together (Edit/Surface/Sew). The other option for sewing the model using MSC.Patran surface sewing is to increase the global tolerance in MSC.Patran and sew the model again. Changing the global tolerance in MSC.Patran is generally not recommended, but in this case may be necessary. The necessity of increasing the global tolerance is determined by checking the incongruent edges of the model (Verify/Surface/Boundary) to see if they share vertices, or by the gap closure operation when gaps cannot be closed between surface since the edge curves are too far apart. The tolerance value should be set to a value just larger than the distance between the vertices to be equivalenced (vertices which should be shared at the ends of incongruent curves), or just larger than the “allowable gap closure tolerance” which is issued by the sewing (or edge match) operation. (Note that there are cases where sewing will report that gaps exist which are not really gaps. This is because the operation of checking for gaps does not necessarily know about the engineering intent of the model. We suggest that the user check the gaps reported to make sure that they are gaps. Furthermore, we suggest that the global tolerance be increased conservatively, e.g., double the tolerance instead of increasing it by an order of magnitude.)

Refitting Geometry

The technique of refitting geometry has been identified as a potentially viable method of removing problematic geometry that prevents subsequent meshing, application of LBC’s, editing, transforming, etc. Edit/Curve/Refit and Edit/Surface/Refit are available under the Geometry application. These functions will more regularly parameterize poorly parameterized geometry (for surfaces, this typically involves those with compound curvature), which can currently lead to difficulties in successfully building CAE models. Congruency and boundary definitions are retained.

5


Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Edit/Surface/Refit

As previously mentioned, the Edit/Surface/Refit function in the Geometry application can be used to successfully handle problematic Sheet Body geometry. The situations where this applies include:

• Accessing geometry with the Unigraphics Sew option disabled with subsequent attempts to make the surfaces congruent by using MSC.Patran’s surface sew, edge match, etc.

• Difficulties rendering, meshing, edge matching, disassembling, transforming, etc.

• Surfaces that result from disassembling solid geometry (i.e., for regioning). Curves Coincident With Surface and Solid Edges

Wire Bodies coincident with Sheet Body and Solid Body edges are not equivalenced. This is a different behavior from what occurs if the “Express Translation” method is used. If coincident curves are not detected by the user, they may, for example, apply a Loads/Boundary Condition to what they believe is a surface or solid edge, when in fact they are applying it to a curve. To avoid this situation:

• Move all Wire Bodies to a separate group and post only when required.

• If Wire Bodies are accessed, use the new Geometry function Edit/Point/Equivalence to connect the curve and surface/solid vertices.

• Disable access of Wire Bodies and only access when needed.


Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER If MSC.Patran ProENGINEER is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an external Pro/ENGINEER part file. You can execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER either from MSC.Patran or from Pro/ENGINEER by doing one of the following: Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From MSC.Patran. Execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER from MSC.Patran by using the File/Import... menu and make sure the Pro/ENGINEER button is pressed on the Import form. See Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files (p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions for more information. Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER Important: Make sure MSC.Patran ProENGINEER has been properly installed by following the instructions in Selecting Products (Ch. 3) in the MSC.Patran Installation and Operations Guide. Execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER from Pro/ENGINEER by doing the following: 1. Execute Pro/ENGINEER by entering: p3_proe will ask for the command name to run Pro/ENGINEER. Press if you want to accept the default command pro. p3_proe

Enter the command name for running Pro/ENGINEER. [pro]?:

2. Open the Pro/ENGINEER assembly file or part file. Then, select the Pro/ENGINEER menus in the following order: File Export Model Patran Geom

The MSC.Patran menu will list four options: Filter Run MSC.Patran Create .db Create .geo

You can select any one of the above four options. If Filter is selected:

• A menu appears which allows the user to select: Datum Points Datum Curves Datum Surfaces Datum Planes Coordinate System Datums for output to the intermediated .geo file. (Default = no datum entities).

5


If Run MSC.Patran is selected:

• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.

• MSC.Patran will automatically be executed and a database will be created and opened.

• The MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file containing the Pro/ENGINEER geometry will be loaded into the MSC.Patran database, and both Pro/ENGINEER and MSC.Patran will remain executing. If Create .db is selected:

• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.

• A batch job will be submitted in background mode that will: One, execute MSC.Patran and create and open a database. Two, load the.geo file into the MSC.Patran database. And, three, close the database and exit MSC.Patran. If Create .geo is selected, a MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory. For more information on the MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file, see Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER (p3_proe) (p. 122) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.


2.3

PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry The PATRAN 2 Neutral file is supported by MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran. With the PATRAN 2 neutral file, MSC.Patran can import or export only parametric cubic geometry by executing the File/Import menus on the main form. MSC.Patran cannot export non-parametric cubic geometry using the PATRAN 2 Neutral file. Instead, you may use export the entire geometry model using the IGES file. Depending on Geometry application methods used to create the geometry, you may or may not be able to create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids. Also, some geometry Create action methods can generate only parametric cubic geometry. For information on how to import or export a PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see Importing PATRAN 2.5 Neutral Files (p. 76) and Exporting a PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. For the definition of parametric cubic geometry, see Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25). For information on what types of curves, surfaces and solids you can create in MSC.Patran, see Table 1-1, and starting on (p. 27). For more information on how to export an IGES file, see Exporting an IGES File (p. 115) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

5



CHAPTER

3

Coordinate Frames

■ Coordinate Frame Definitions ■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames ■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames


3.1

Coordinate Frame Definitions MSC.Patran can create and support three types of coordinate frames:

• Rectangular (X,Y,Z) • Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z) • Spherical (R, Theta, Phi) MSC.Patran also has a default global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Coord 0 is the default reference coordinate frame for many application forms (which can be changed to another coordinate frame). Also, Coord 0 cannot be deleted, even if specified. Each coordinate system defined in MSC.Patran has three principal axes. These axes define how spatial locations are determined in that coordinate system, and are internally numbered 1, 2 and 3. The meaning of each principal axis depends on if the coordinate frame is rectangular, cylindrical or spherical. When a coordinate frame is created, its principal axes and its orientation are displayed at the appropriate location on the model. The ID of the coordinate frame is also displayed at the coordinate frame’s origin. Important: Coordinate frame angles for the cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames (that is, θ and Φ ) are expressed in degrees. Special conditions apply when defining spatial functions in cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames. For more information, see Procedures for Using Fields (p. 133) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Rectangular Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-1 shows the principal axes of a rectangular coordinate frame and a point, P, in rectangular space. In a rectangular frame, the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the X, Y and Z axes, respectively. Points in space specified in a rectangular coordinate frame are entered in the order: x-coordinate, y-coordinate and zcoordinate. Z Axis 3

P = (X, Y, Z)

Z Axis 2 Y X

Axis 1 Y X

Figure 3-1 Rectangular Coordinate Frame

CHAPTER 3 Coordinate Frames

Cylindrical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-2 shows a cylindrical frame in which the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and Z axes, respectively. Points specified in a cylindrical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate and zcoordinate. Z

Axis 3

P = (R,θ, Z)

Z Axis 2 R Axis 1

T(θ)

θ

R

Figure 3-2 Cylindrical Coordinate Frame Spherical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-3 shows a spherical frame in which the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and P ( Φ ) axes, respectively. Points specified in a spherical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate, and phicoordinate. A node’s local directions (1, 2, 3) can vary according to its position within the spherical coordinate frame. For example: If node lies along R direction, then dir 1 of node is along +R If node lies along R direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P If node lies along R direction, then dir 3 of node is along +T If node lies along T direction, then dir 1 of node is along +T If node lies along T direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P If node lies along T direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R If node lies along P direction, then dir 1 of node is along +P If node lies along P direction, then dir 2 of node is along +T If node lies along P direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R

6


See Input LBCs Set Data (Static Load Case) (p. 22) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. P (Φ) P = (R,θ, φ)

Axis 3

θ R Axis 2

Axis 1

T(θ)

φ

R

Figure 3-3 Spherical Coordinate Frame Definition


3.2

Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames There are six ways you can create a local rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame in MSC.Patran. They are listed as separate methods under the Geometry Application’s Create action:

• 3Point • Axis • Euler • Normal • 2Vector • View Vector For more information on using the application forms for the Create methods, see Creating Coordinate Frames (p. 350). You can also create coordinate frames using the Transform action’s Translate and Rotate methods. For more information, see Transforming Coordinate Frames (p. 690). The following sections briefly discuss the Create methods for coordinate frames. 3 Point Method. Figure 3-4 illustrates using the Create action’s 3 Point method for creating a coordinate frame by specifying three points:

3 A point location, using the other two points, that defines a plane formed by axis 1 and 3.

A point location on axis 3.

A point location at the origin.

2 1 Figure 3-4

Coordinate Frame Creation Using the 3 Point Method

6


Axis Method. Figure 3-5 illustrates using the Axis method to create a coordinate frame by specifying a point location at the origin, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3, and a point location on one of the two remaining axes.

Second, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3 (you may choose which one).

Third, a point location on one of the two remaining axes (you may choose which one).

Figure 3-5

First, a point location at the origin.

Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Axis Method

Euler Method. The Euler Create action creates a new coordinate frame through three rotations from an existing coordinate frame. Specifically, the following steps are performed in the order shown: 1. Input the reference coordinate frame ID. 2. Enter the point location of the coordinate frame’s origin. 3. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 1. 4. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 2. 5. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 3. The final orientation of the new coordinate frame depends on the order of rotations that are made.


Normal Method. Figure 3-6 illustrates using the Normal method to create a coordinate frame, where its origin is at a point location on a surface. The positive axis 3 direction is normal to the surface by using right-hand rule and crossing the surface’s ξ 1 parametric direction with the ξ 2 direction. The axis 1 direction is along the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the axis 2 direction is orthogonal to axis 1 and 3. For more information on the definition of the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes, see Parameterization (p. 5).

Y

X Z

ξ2 ξ1 Figure 3-6

Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Normal Method

6


3.3

Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames You can translate or scale geometry in MSC.Patran by using the Transform action’s Translate method or Scale method. For information and examples on using either form, see Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors (p. 605) or Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors (p. 629). On either form, you can choose either the Cartesian in Refer. CF toggle or the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle. If Curvilinear in Refer. CF is chosen, you can specify either an existing cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame as the reference, and the translation vector or the scale factors will be interpreted as R, θ , Z for the cylindrical system, and as R, θ , Φ for the spherical system. (Both the θ axis and Φ axis are measured in degrees.) Figure 3-7 throughFigure 3-10 are examples of using the Translate and Scale methods with the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.

7 3 1

4 1

2 T

R

2

1 Z

Y

5

6 X Z

Figure 3-7 Translate Method where Surface 1 is Translated <1 90 0> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1


2 3 1 2

1

T

R 1 Z

Y

X 4

Z

Figure 3-8 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

2 3 1

4

1

2

Y

T

R 1 Z

X Z

Figure 3-9 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

6


2 1

4

Y

1

2

T

3

R 1 Z

X Z

Figure 3-10 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <1 2 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1 Points along the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system and at the origin of a spherical coordinate system cannot be transformed uniquely in the θ (cylindrical) or θ and φ (spherical) coordinates respectively. This is due to the fact that there is no unique θ for points on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or θ and φ coordinates at the origin of a spherical coordinate system. Therefore, in MSC.Patran, any point on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or at the origin of a spherical coordinate system is not transformed.


CHAPTER

4

Create Actions

■ Overview of Geometry Create Action ■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids ■ Creating Coordinate Frames ■ Creating Planes ■ Creating Vectors


4.1

Overview of Geometry Create Action Select any method to obtain detailed help.

Object Point

Curve

Method

Description

❏ XYZ

Creates points from their cartesian coordinates or from existing nodes or vertices.

❏ ArcCenter

Creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves.

❏ Extract

Creates points on existing curves at a parametric coordinate location.

❏ Interpolate

Creates one or more points between two existing point locations that are uniformly or nonuniformly spaced apart.

❏ Intersect

Creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.

❏ Offset

Creates a point on an existing curve.

❏ Pierce

Creates a point at the location where a curve intersects or pierces a surface or solid face.

❏ Project

Creates points from an existing set of points or vertices that are either projected normally or projected through a defined vector or projected through the current view angle, onto an existing surface or solid face.

❏ Point

Creates curves through two, three or four point locations.

❏ Arc3Point

Creates arced curves through a starting, middle and ending point locations.

❏ Chain

Creates a chained composite curve from two or more existing curves. Usually used for creating trimmed surfaces.

❏ Conic

Creates a conic curve based on a defined altitude and focal point and a starting and ending points.

❏ Extract

Creates a curve on an existing surface either at a parametric coordinate location or on an edge of the surface.

❏ Fillet

Creates a fillet curve with a defined radius between two existing curves or edges.

❏ Fit

Creates a curve that passes through a set of point locations based on a least squares fit.

❏ Intersect

Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces.

❏ Manifold

Creates a curve on a a surface or solid face that is between two or more point locations.

❏ Normal

Creates a curve that is normal from an existing surface or solid face to a point location.

❏ Offset

Creates either constant or variable offset curves from an existing curve.

CHAPTER 4 Create Actions

Object Curve (cont.)

Surface

Method

Description

❏ Project

Creates curves from an existing set of curves or edges that is projected onto a surface either normally or from a defined plane or vector or based on the current view angle.

❏ PWL

Creates contiguous straight curves between two or more point locations.

❏ Spline

Creates a spline curve that passes through two or more point locations.

❏ TanCurve

Creates a curve that is tangent between two curves or edges.

❏ TanPoint

Creates a curve from a point location to a tangent point on a curve.

❏ XYZ

Creates a curve at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its length and orientation.

❏ Involute

Creates involute curves either using an Angles option or a Radii option.

❏ Revolve

Creates curves that are rotated from point locations about a rotation axis for a defined angle.

❏ 2D Normal

Creates straight curves that are perpendicular to an existing curve or edge and that lies within a defined plane.

❏ 2D Circle

Creates a circle within a defined plane.

❏ 2D ArcAngles

Creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane.

❏ 2D Arc2Point

Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that uses a starting, ending and center point locations.

❏ 2D Arc3Point

Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that passes through a starting, middle and ending point locations.

❏ Curve

Creates surfaces that passes through either two, three, four or N curves or edges.

❏ Composite

Create surfaces that are composed from multiple surfaces.

❏ Decompose

Creates surfaces from an existing surface (usually a trimmed surface) based on four cursor defined vertices that lie on the existing surface.

❏ Edge

Creates surfaces from three or four curves or edges.

❏ Extract

Creates a surface within a solid based on either the parametric coordinate location or on the face of the solid.

❏ Fillet

Creates a filleted surface with one or two defined radii between two existing surfaces or faces.

❏ Match

Creates a surface that is topologically congruent with one of the two specified surfaces.

❏ Offset

Creates constant offset surfaces from an existing surface.

❏ Ruled

Creates a surface that is created between two existing curves or edges.

❏ Trimmed

Creates a trimmed surface that consist of an outer chained curve loop and optionally, an inner chained curve loop.

7


Object Surface (cont.)

Solid

Method

Description

❏ Vertex

Creates a surface from four point locations.

❏ XYZ

Creates a surface at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its length and orientation.

❏ Extrude

Creates a surface from an existing curve or edge that is extruded through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.

❏ Glide

Creates a surface that is created from a specified director curve or edge, along one or more base curves or edges.

❏ Normal

Creates surfaces from existing curves through a defined thickness.

❏ Revolve

Creates surfaces that are rotated from curves or edges about a rotation axis for a defined angle.

❏ Mesh

Creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh (shell mesh).

❏ Primitive

Creates a solid (block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus) with user input a point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus as the tool solid.

❏ Surface

Creates solids that pass through two, three, four or N surfaces or faces.

❏ B-rep

Creates a B-rep solid from an existing set of surfaces that form a closed volume.

❏ Decompose

Creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex locations on each face.

❏ Face

Creates solids from five or six surfaces or faces.

❏ Vertex

Creates solids from eight point locations.

❏ XYZ

Creates a solid at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its length and orientation.

❏ Extrude

Creates a solid from an existing surface or face that is extruded through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.

❏ Glide

Creates a solid that is created from a specified director curve or edge, along one or more base surfaces or faces.

❏ Normal

Creates solids from existing surfaces through a defined thickness.

❏ Revolve

Creates solids that are rotated from surfaces or faces about a rotation axis for a defined angle.


Object Coord

Plane

Vector

Method

Description

❏ 3Point

Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based on defined point locations for its origin, a point on Axis 3 and a point on Plane 1-3.

❏ Axis

Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based on point locations that define the original and either points one Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1

❏ Euler

Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based on three rotation angles about Axes 1, 2 and 3.

❏ Normal

Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame whose Axis 3 is normal to a specified surface or solid face, and whose origin is at a point location.

❏ Vector Normal

Creates a plane from a specified point as the plane origin and a specified direction as the plane normal.

❏ Curve Normal

Creates a plane from a point on or projected onto a specified curve as the plane origin and the curve tangent at that point as the plane normal.

❏ Interpolate

Creates a plane from the interpolating points on a specified curve as the plane origins and the curve tangents at those points as the plane normals.

❏ Least Squares

Creates a plane from the least square based on three and more specified non-colinear points.

❏ Offset

Creates a plane that is parallel to a specified plane with a specified offset distance.

❏ Surface Tangent

Creates a plane from a specified point on or projected to a specified surface as the plane origin and the surface normal at that location as the plane normal.

❏ 3 Points

Creates a plane from three specified non-colinear points. The plane origin is located at the first point.

❏ Point-Vector

Creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.

❏ Magnitude

Creates a vector by specifying the vector base point, the vector direction and the vector magnitude of the desired vector.

❏ Intersect

Creates a vector along the intersecting line of two specified planes. The vector base point is the projection of the first plane origin on that intersecting line.

❏ Normal

Creates a vector that has the direction parallel to a specified plane and the base point at a specified point on or projected onto that plane.

❏ Product

Creates a vector that is the cross product of two specified vectors and has its base point located at the base point of the first vector.

❏ 2 Point

Creates a vector that starts from a specified base point and pointing to a specified tip point.

7


4.2

Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method) The XYZ method creates points from their cartesian coordinates or at an existing node, vertex or other point location as provided in the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

XYZ

Point ID List 5 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

Auto Execute Point Coordinates List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Point Coordinate List, within the reference frame. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing cartesian coordinates or point location for the new points, either by entering the coordinates from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.3.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)


Point XYZ Method Example Creates Point 6 using the Create/XYZ method that is located at the global rectangular coordinates X = 10, Y = 5 and Z = 3.125.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

XYZ

Before: 3

2

Point ID List 6

1

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

Auto Execute

4

Y

Point Coordinates List [10 5 3.125]

-Apply-

X

Z

5

After: 3

2

1

4

Y

Z

6

X 5

7


Point XYZ Method On a Surface Example Creates Point 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icons listed below which locates Point 5 on Surface 1, whose exact location is cursor defined. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

XYZ

Before:

2

3

Point ID List 5 1


Auto Execute

1

Point Coordinates List

Y Z

4 X

Construct Point Surface Point

-Apply-

After:

2

3

1 5

1

Y Z

Point Select Menu Icons

4 X


Point XYZ Method At Nodes Example Creates Points 1 through 4 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which locates the points at Nodes 10 through 13. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

XYZ

Before: 11

10

Point ID List 1

Refer. Coordinate Frame 13

12

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Y

Point Coordinates List Z

Node 10:13

-Apply-

X

After: 2

1

3

Y Z

Point Select Menu Icon

X

4

7


Point XYZ Method At Screen Location Example Creates Points 1 through 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which locates Points 1 through 5 by cursor defining them on the screen.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

XYZ

Before:

Point ID List 1


Auto Execute

Y

Point Coordinates List Z

[1.596433 0.096824 0.000000]

-Apply-

X

After: 1 2

3

4 5 Y Z


X


Create Point ArcCenter The ArcCenter method creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves which have a non-zero center/radius of curvature. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method: Arc Center Point ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

48

Auto Execute Curve List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the existing curves or edges either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10)

7


Point ArcCenter Method Example Creates point 3 using Create/Point/Arc Center which locates point 3 in the center of the arc. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Before:

1

Method: Arc Center Point ID List

2

3


Y

Curve 1

X

Z

1

-Apply-

After:

1

2

Y Z

3 X

1


Extracting Points Extracting Points from Curves and Edges Creates points on an existing set of curves or edges at the parametric ξ 1 coordinate location of the curve or edge, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

Select the curve icon to extract a point from a curve. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Extract

If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of the curve.

Point ID List 5

Parameterization Method ◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ ◆ Equal Parametric Values Parametric Position 0.0

Specify the curve’s or edge’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the connectivity of the curve or edge. You can plot the ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve List

-Apply-


☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Specify the existing curves or edges to extract points from, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

8


Point Extract Method Example Creates Point 7 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.75, on Curve 1. Notice that the curve’s parametric direction arrow is displayed.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point Extract

Method:

6

1

1

Point ID List 7

Parameterization Method

5 Y

◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ ◆ Equal Parametric Values

Z

X

Parametric Position 0.0

1.0 0.75

After:

u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve List 6

Curve 1 1

-Apply-

1 7

5 Y Z

X


Point Extract Method Example Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.75, on the edge of Surface 1.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

2

3

Extract

Method:

1

Point ID List 5

Parameterization Method ◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ ◆ Equal Parametric Values

1

Y Z

4 X


1.0 0.75

After:

u Parametric Value Auto Execute

2

5

3

Curve List Surface 1.4 1

-Apply-

1

Y Z

4 X

8


Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces Creates single points on an existing set of surfaces or faces at a specified u,v parametric location on the surface. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Create Point Extract Select the icon to create a Single Point.

Point ID List


1


1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value 0.0

1.0 0.5

Specify the surface or faces’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value , which have a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List

-Apply-


Specify the existing surfaces or faces to create points on, either by cursor selecting the surfaces or faces or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.


Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Method Example Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract Point from Surface or Face method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.333 and ξ 2 ( v ) is equal to 0.666, on Surface 1.

Before:

Geometry Action: Object:

2

Create

3

Point

Method:

Extract

1

Point ID List 1


1.0 0.333


Y

1

Z

4

X

1.0 0.666

After:

v Parametric Value

2

3

Auto Execute Surface List 5

Surface 1

1

-Apply-

Y Z

1 X

4

8


Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of points is defined by a diagonal of two points. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Create Point Extract Select the icon to create Multiple Points.

Point ID List 1


Number of Points u Direction

Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction of the surface.

2

v Direction 2

Bounds Diagonal Points Parametric Auto Execute Point 1 List

Point 2 List

Specify the Bounds as Diagonal Points when two point locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points to be extracted from the surface.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the two points to define the diagonal for the points, either by cursor selecting the points or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 or Curve 1.1, Surface 1.1.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

Surface List

-Apply-

Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.


Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Diagonal Method Example Creates Points 7 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by points 5 and 6. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Before:

Create

2

3

Point Extract 6 1

5

Point ID List 7


Y Z

1

4

X

4

v Direction

After: 2

6

3

Bounds Diagonal Points Parametric

26 22 18 14 10 5

Auto Execute Point 1 List Point 5

27 23 19 1 15 11 7

28 24 20 16 12 8

6 25 21 17 13 9

Point 2 List Point 6

Y

Surface List Surface 1

-Apply-

Z

1 X

4

8


Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of points is defined by a parametric ξ , ξ 2 diagonal. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Create Point Extract Select the icon to create Multiple Points.

Point ID List 1


Number of Points u Direction 2

Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction of the surface.

v Direction 2

Bounds Diagonal Points

Specify the Bounds as Parametric when two parametric locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points to be extracted from the surface.

Parametric Display the Parametric Bounds form to define the u,v parametric locations to define the bounds of the points.

[Parametric Bounds...] Auto Execute Surface List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.


Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Parametric Method Example Creates Points 5 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by u-min=0.333, u-max=0.666, vmin=0.333, and v-max=0.666. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Before: 2

Create

3

Point Extract

1

Point ID List 5


Y Z

1

4

2

3

X

4

v Direction

After:

6

Bounds Diagonal Points 25 21 17 13 9 5

Parametric [Parametric Bounds...] Auto Execute

26 22 18 1 14 10 6

27 23 19 15 11 7

28 24 20 16 12 8


Y

-Apply-

Z

1 X

4

8


Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface Parametric Bounds u v Bounds 0.0

1.0 0.0

u-Min 0.0

1.0

u-Max 1.0 0.0

v-Min 0.0

1.0 1.0

v-Max Reset

OK

(x1 has a range of 0 £ x1 £ 1 and x2 has a range of 0 £ x2 £ 1) You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

1.0

0.0

Specify the surface’s x1 (u) and x2 (v) coordinate values for the definition of the bounds of the points, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The x1and x2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face.

Cancel


Interpolating Points Between Two Points The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method: Interpolate Point ID List 5

Option: Point Number of Interior Points

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Enter the number of interior points you want to create between the specified point locations in the Point 1 and Point 2 Coordinates List.

1

Point Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

Select either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0.


Auto Execute Point 1 Coordinates List

Point 2 Coordinates List

Specify in the Point 1 Coordinates listbox, the starting point location to begin the interpolation. Specify in the Point 2 Coordinates listbox, the ending point location to end the interpolation. You can express the point location either by entering the location’s cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes or other point locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.3.1.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:


9


Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example Creates five interior points starting with Point 3 that are between Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Interpolate/Point option. The spacing is nonuniform at L2/L1 = 2.0.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method: Interpolate Point ID List 3 1

Option: Point

2

Number of Interior Points 5

Number of Spacing Method

Y

◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

Z

L1

X

L2

After: L2/L1 =

2.0

Auto Execute Point 1 Coordinates List Point 1


1

3

4

Point 2

-ApplyY Z

X

5

6

7

2


Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example Same as the previous example, except the five new points are uniformly spaced between Nodes 1 and 2, by using the Point select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Before: 2

Method: Interpolate Point ID List 1 1

Option: Point Number of Interior Points 5

Number of Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

Y Z

X

After: 2 5

Auto Execute 4


3 2

Node 1 1


1

Node 2

-ApplyY Z


X

9


Interpolating Points on a Curve The Interpolate method using the Curve option creates n points along an existing curve or edge of uniform or nonuniform spacing where n is the number of interior points to be created. Enter the number of interior points you want to create along the curves or edges that are specified in the Curve listbox.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method: Interpolate


Point ID List 5

Option: Curve Number of Interior Points Parameterization Method ◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ ◆ Equal Parametric Values Point Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of the curve. Choose either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0. The starting point of where L1 and L2 is measured from is at the curve’s or edge’s parametric origin, which is defined by its connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.



-Apply-

Specify the existing curves or edges to create points on, either by cursor selecting the curves or edges or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example Creates five uniformly spaced interior points, starting with Point 6 on Curve 1, using the Create/Point/Interpolate/Curve option. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Before:

Method: Interpolate Point ID List

5

6

Option: Curve

1 1

Number of Interior Points 5 Y

Parameterization Method ◆ Equal Arc Length

Z

X

◆ ◆ Equal Parametric Values Point Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

After:

6

Auto Execute

7

1

5 8

Curve List

1 9

Curve 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X

10

9


Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example Creates Points 5 through 9 that are nonuniformly spaced by using the Create/Interpolate/Curve option, where the points are created on an edge of Surface 1.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method: Interpolate

2

3

Point ID List 5

Option: Curve

1

Number of Interior Points 5

Parameterization Method ◆ Equal Arc Length

2 Y 1

1

◆ ◆ Equal Parametric Values Point Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform L1

Z

4 X

After: L2 2

L2/L1 =

5

6

7

8

9

3

2.0


1

Curve 1

-Apply-

2 1

Y 1 Z

4 X


Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points The Intersect method creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane. One point will be created at each intersection location. The pair of entities should intersect within a value defined by the Global Model Tolerance. If the entities do not intersect, MSC.Patran will create a point at the closest approach on each specified curve, edge, or vector for the Curve/Curve and Vector/Curve intersection options. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Point

Method: Intersect Point ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Options for 1st entity to intersect: 1. Curve (or edge of a surface) 2. Vector

24 Options for 2nd entity to intersect:

Option: Option: Auto Execute List

List

-Apply-

1. Curve (or edge of a surface) 2. Surface 3. Plane By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

The list changes depending on the option selected. Specify in List 1 and List 2 the pair of intersecting entities at which to create points, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Select menus that appear can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate entities. The Global Model Tolerance that defines the tolerance value within which the two entities can intersect is defined on the Global Preferences form under the Preferences/Global menu.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Global Preferences (p. 290) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

9


Point Intersect Method At An Edge Example Creates Point 17, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curve 3 and an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point

12


15

16

3

13

17

Option: Curve Option:

1

Curve 11

Auto Execute

Y

Curve List Curve 3

X

Z

14

Curve List Surface 1.2

After:

-Apply-

12

15

3

17

16

13

1

11 Y Z

X 14


Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curves 1 and 2. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point

Method: Intersect Point ID List 1

1


Curve


Y

Curve 1

Z

2 X

Curve List Curve 2

After: -Apply1

1

Y Z

2 X

2

9


Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Because the curves do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach of the two curves. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point

Method: Intersect Point ID List 1 1


2

Curve

Auto Execute Curve List Y

Curve 1

Z

X

Curve List Curve 2

After: -Apply-

1 1

Y Z

X

2 2


Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Surface Example Creates Points 1, 2 and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 6 with Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point 6 11


Option: Curve Option: Surface Auto Execute Curve List

Z

Y X

Curve 6


After:

-Apply6 1 1 2 3

Z

Y X

1

1


Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Plane Example Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 2 with Plane 1. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point


2


1

Plane


Y

Curve 2

Z

X

Plane List Plane 1

After: -Apply-

1

2

2

1

3 Y Z

X


Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 with Curve 2. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point


2

Option: Vector Option:

Curve

1

Auto Execute Vector List

Y

Vector 1

Z

X

Curve List Curve 2

After: -Apply1

2

2

1

3 Y Z

X

1


Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example Creates Point 1 on Vector 1 and Point 2 on Curve 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Since the entities do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach between the Vector and the Curve. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point


2


Curve

Auto Execute

1

Vector List

Y

Vector 1

Z

X

Curve List Curve 2

After: -Apply-

1

1 Y Z

X

2 2


Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Surface Example Creates Points 1 and 2 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 and Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point

Method: Intersect Point ID List 1 1

Option: Vector Option: Surface 1


Y

Vector 1

Z

X


After:

-Apply-

2

1

1

Y Z

X

1

1


Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Plane Example Creates Point 1 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 2 and Plane 1. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Point


2

1 1


Plane Y

Auto Execute

X

Z

Vector List Vector 2

Plane List Plane 1

After: -Apply-

2

1

Y Z

X

1


Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance The Offset method creates a point on an existing curve by offsetting a specified model space distance from an existing point on the same curve. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

Offset

Point ID List


1

Offset Distance

Auto Execute Reference Point List

Input the Model Space offset distance from an existing point on a curve (curve to be input).

Specify the existing points on the curve either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Curve 5.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points or vertices.

Curve/Point List

-Apply-

Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curve or edge, along with a point on the curve which indicates the direction in which the offset will be taken. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Global Preferences (p. 290) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

1


Point Offset Method Example Creates point 3 on curve one, .75 units from point 1 using Create/Point/Offset. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

Offset

Before:

1

Point ID List 3

Offset Distance 0.75

1

Auto Execute Reference Point List

2

Y

Point 1

X

Z

Curve/Point List Geometry (Curve 1)

-Apply-

After:

1

3 1 Y Z

X

2


Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points The Pierce method creates points at the intersection between an existing curve or edge and a surface or solid face. The curve or edge must completely intersect with the surface or solid face. If the curve or edge intersects the surface or face more than one time, MSC.Patran will create a point at each intersection. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

Pierce


Point ID List 1

Auto Execute


Curve List

Surface List

Specify in Curve List the existing curves or edges that intersect the surfaces and faces listed in the Surface listbox. Specify in Surface List the existing surfaces or faces that intersect with the curves and edges.

-Apply-

You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1. The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves, edges, surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:


1


Point Pierce Method Example Creates Point 15, using the Create/Pierce method at the location where Curve 3 intersects Surface 1. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

Pierce

Before:

14

Point ID List

1

15

Auto Execute

11

5

3

Curve List

1

12

Curve 3 Y

Surface List

X

Z

Surface 1

13

-Apply-

After: 14

1 11 3 15 1

Y Z

X

13

5 12


Point Pierce Method Example This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve is defined by Points 13 and 14 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

Pierce

Before:

14

Point ID List

1

15

Auto Execute

11

5

Curve List

1

12

Construct 2 Point Curve Y


X

Z

13

-Apply-

After:

14

1 11

5 15 1

Y Z

Curve Select Menu Icon

X

13

12

1


Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces The Project method creates points by projecting an existing set of points onto a surface or solid face through a defined Projection Vector. New points can be projected from other points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Method:

Project

Point ID List 5

Project onto: Surface

Normal to Surf option will project the existing points by using the normal direction of the specified surface or face. Define Vector option allows you to specify the coordinates of the Projection Vector and the Refer. Coordinate Frame to express the vector within. (Example: <1 1 0>). The Vector Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector direction. View Vector option will project the existing points by using the view angle of the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the normal direction of the screen.

Option:Normal to Surf Projection Vector <0 0 0>

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Projection Vector and Refer. Coordinate Frame is used if the Define Vector option is chosen.

Coord 0

Delete Original Points Auto Execute

If ON, after Project completes the existing points specified in Point List will be deleted from the database.



Projection Vector <0 0 0>


Delete Original Points Auto Execute Point List

Surface List

Specify in Point List the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations that you want to project onto the surfaces or faces specified in the Surface List box. Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the points will be projected onto. You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: For points - Point 1:10, Curve 5.1 Surface 5.1.1; For surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1. The Point Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Viewing Menu (p. 219) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

1


Point Project Method With Normal to Surf Option Example Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. Points 13:16, 18:20 and Node 1 are all projected normally onto Surface 1. Notice Delete Original Points is pressed in. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point

Before: 10

Project

Method:

11

15

Point ID List

16 14

21


1

1 13

Option: Normal to Surf

18 Y

Projection Vector

209 19

ZX

<0 0 0>

12


Delete Original Points

After:

Auto Execute

10

Point List 11

Point 13:16 18:20 Node 1

23 24 22


1 21

-Apply26 28

Y

9 27

ZX 12


Point Project Method With Define Vector Option Example Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Point/Project/Define Vector option. The points are projected onto Surface 1 through the vector <-1 0 1> that is expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point Project

Method:

Before:

10

11 15

Point ID List

16

13

14 Y


1 17

1 Z

X

13

Option: Define Vector 18

Projection Vector

20 19

Y 9

12 Z

<-1 0 1>

X



After:

Auto Execute Point List

10

11 23

Point 13:20 24

22

Surface List

Y

Surface 1 25

21 1

1 Z

X

-Apply26

28 27

Y 9

12 Z

X

1


Point Project Method With View Vector Option Example Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/View Vector option. The points are projected onto Surface 1 using the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in and Points 13 through 20 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Point Project

Method:

Before:

10

11 15 16

Point ID List

Y

21 1 17

Project onto: Surface Option:

14

View Vector

1 Z

18

13

20 19

Y

Projection Vector

X

9

12 Z

X

<0 0 0>


After: Delete Original Points Auto Execute 10

Point List

11 23

Point 13:20

24

Surface List

22 Y

Surface 1

1 25

-Apply-

1 Z

26

X

21

28 27

Y 9

12 Z

X


Creating Curves Between Points Creating Curves Through 2 Points The Point method using the 2 Point option creates straight parametric cubic curves between two existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Point

Curve ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: 2 Point


Auto Execute Starting Point List

Ending Point List

Specify the starting and ending point locations for the new curves. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

1


Curve Point Method With 2 Point Option Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Point/2 Point option, which is between Point 1 and Node 10. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Point

Before:

10

Curve ID List 3

Option: 2 Point Auto Execute Starting Point List

1 Y

Point 1

Ending Point List

Z

X

Node 10

-Apply-

After:

2 10

3

1 Y Z

X


Creating Curves Through 3 Points The Point method using the 3 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through three existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Point


Curve ID List 1

Option: 3 Point Parameterization Method ◆ Parametric Position ◆ ◆ Chord Length 0.0

1.0 0.5

u Value of Middle Point

Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u ) parametric position of the middle point for the new curve, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead, MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior points are located.

1


Parameterization Method ◆ Parametric Position ◆ ◆ Chord Length 0.0

1.0 0.5

u Value of Middle Point Auto Execute


Starting Point List

Middle Point List

Ending Point List

Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/3 Point option, which is created through Points 1 and 2 and Node 10. Point 2 is located on the curve at x1(u) =0.5.

Before:

Geometry Create Action: Curve Object: Method:

10

Point

Curve ID List 1


2

1

Y

1.0 0.5

Z

X

u Value of Middle Point Auto Execute Starting Point List

After:

Point 1 10

Middle Point List Point 2

Ending Point List Node 10

-Apply1 2

Y Z

1

X

1


Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 2 is located on the curve at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.75, instead of 0.5.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Point

10

Curve ID List 1


1.0 0.75

2

1

Y Z

X

u Value of Middle Point Auto Execute Starting Point List

After:

Point 1

10



-Apply-

2

Y Z

1

X

1


Creating Curves Through 4 Points The Point method using the 4 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through four existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Point

Curve ID List 1


Option: 4 Point Parameterization Method ◆ Parametric Position ◆ ◆ Chord Length [Parametric Positions...]


Second Point List

Third Point List

Ending Point List

-Apply-

Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u ) parametric position of the second and third points on the new curve, where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Press the Parametric Positions button to enter the ξ 1 locations for both points. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead, MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior points are located.

1



Auto Execute


Starting Point List

Second Point List

Third Point List

Specify the starting, second, third and ending point locations for the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Ending Point List

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/4 Point option, which is created through Points 1, 2 and 3 and Node 10. Point 2 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.333 and Point 3 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.667. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Point

Before: 10

Curve ID List 3

1

Option: 4 Point Parameterization Method ◆ Parametric Position ◆ ◆ Chord Length

2

Y

1

[Parametric Positions...] Z

X


After:

Point 1

Second Point List

10

Point 2

Third Point List Point 3 3

Ending Point List 1

Node 10 2

-ApplyY Z

1

X

1


Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Point 2 is located at x1(u) =0.25 and Point 3 is located at x1(u) =0.80. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Point

Before 10

Curve ID List 3

3


2

1

Y Z

X


After:

Point 1

Second Point List 10 Point 2

Third Point List Point 3

3


1 2

-ApplyY Z

1

X


Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions Subordinate Form This subordinate form is displayed when the Parametric Positions button is pressed on the Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Point form for the 4 Point option. Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions 0.0

1.0 0.333

u Parametric Value of second point 0.0

1.0

0.667

Enter the ξ 1 (C1) parametric position for the second and third point locations that are specified in the Second Point List and Third Point Listboxes, where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . This defines where these two points will occupy on the new curve. Either use the slide bars or enter the ξ 1 value in each databox. Moving the slidebar will automatically update the databox value. Press OK to update the

Press Cancel if you want to exit the form and not change the specified ξ 1 values.

u Parametric Value of third point OK

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

ξ 1 values.

Cancel

The direction of ξ1 is defined by the order of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

1


Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method) The Arc3Point method creates true arced curves that pass through three specified point locations. MSC.Patran calculates the arc’s center point location and the radius and angle of the arc. The three point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations that are provided on the Point select menu. If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the center location of the arc.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: Arc3Point


Curve ID List 1

Curves per Arc 1

If PATRAN 2 Convention is pressed, enter the number of curves to be created for each arc definition. Otherwise, the Curves pre Arc databox is disabled.

Create Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List


Middle Point List

Ending Point List

Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the new arc to pass through. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)


Curve Arc3Point Method Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Arc3Point method, which creates a true arc through Points 1 through 3. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed which created Point 4. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

2

Method: Arc3Point Curve ID List 3

Curves per Arc 1

Create Center Point

Y 3

Auto Execute

1 Z

X

Starting Point List Point 1

Middle Point List

After:

Point 2

Ending Point List Point 3 2

-Apply-

Y 3

4 Z

X

1

1


Curve Arc3Point Method Example This example is similar to the previous example, except that the point locations for the arc are specified with point coordinate locations. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: Arc3Point Curve ID List 3

Curves per Arc 1

Create Center Point

Y

Auto Execute

Z

X

Starting Point List [-1 0 0]

Middle Point List

After:

[0 1 0]

Ending Point List [1 0 0] 2

-Apply-

Y 3

4 Z

X

1


Creating Chained Curves The Chain method creates a chained composite curve from one or more existing curves or edges. The existing curves and edges must be connected end to end. If a chained curve is used to create planer or general trimmed surfaces for an inner loop, they must form a closed loop. Chained curves are used to create planar or general trimmed surfaces using the Create/Surface/Trimmed form. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Chain

Curve ID List


1 Auto Chain...

Delete Constituent Curves Curve List

-Apply-

If selected, the Auto Chaining form is displayed to enable auto chaining of existing curves. If ON, after Chain completes, the existing curves specified in the Curve List will be deleted from the database.

Specify the existing curves or edges to chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278) • Disassembling a Chained Curve (p. 429)

1


Curve Chain Method Example Creates Curve 11, using the Create/Chain method, which is created from Curves 3 through 10. Notice that Delete Constituent Curves is pressed and Curves 3 through 10 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Chain

Before: 8

9

Curve ID List

7

4

8

6

6

11

7

5

3

5

10

4

Auto Chain... Delete Constituent Curves Curve List Curve 3:10

-Apply-

1

3

2

Y Z

X

After: 8

1

4

6

5

11

3

2

Y Z

7

X


Creating Conic Curves The Conic method creates parametric cubic curves representing a conic section (that is, hyperbola, parabola, ellipse, or circular arc), by specifying point locations for the starting and ending points of the conic and the conic’s focal point. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Conic


Curve ID List 1


Used by the Focal Point List and the Starting and Ending Point Lists to express the point’s coordinate values that may be entered within the specified coordinate frame. Example: Coord 5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0 0.5

Conic Altitude for Parabola

Enter a value for the altitude of the conic either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox.

Focal Point

Conic Altitude

Starting Point

Conic Curve

Ending Point

1


Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0 0.5

Conic Altitude for Parabola Auto Execute Focal Point List


Starting Point List

Ending Point List

Specify the focal point location, and the starting and ending point locations that defines a conic section. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)


Curve Conic Method Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Conic method whose focal point is Point 3, the starting and ending points are Points 1 and 2, and the conic altitude is 0.50. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Conic

Before: 3

Curve ID List 1


Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0

Y

0.5

Z

X 1

Conic Altitude for Parabola Auto Execute Focal Point List

2

After: 3

Point 3


Ending Point List Point 2 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X 1

2

1


Curve Conic Method Example This is the same as the previous example, except that the conic altitude is increased to 0.75 from 0.50 for Curve 2. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Conic

Before: 3

Curve ID List 2


1

Coord 0

Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0

Y

0.75 Z

X

Conic Altitude for Parabola

1

2

Auto Execute Focal Point List

After:

Point 3 3

Starting Point List Point 1 2

Ending Point List Point 2

1

-Apply-

Y Z

X 1

2


Extracting Curves From Surfaces Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option The Extract method creates curves on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by specifying the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extract Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List 1

Option: Parametric Curve Direction ◆ u Direction ◆ ◆ v Direction

Choose either Constant u Direction or Constant v Direction. The curves will either be created along either the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction or along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction.

Curve Position 0.0

1.0 0.5

v Parametric Value

Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value for the location of the curve, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

1


Curve Direction ◆ u Direction ◆ ◆ v Direction Curve Position 0.0

1.0 0.5

v Parametric Value Auto Execute


Surface List

-Apply-

Specify the existing surfaces or faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The curve is created on Surface 2 at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extract

Before: 7 2

1

Curve ID List 1 8

Option: Parametric

2 10

Curve Direction ◆ ◆ u Direction ◆ v Direction

Y

Curve Position 0.0

X

Z

1.0

9

0.75

v Parametric Value

After:

Auto Execute 7 2

Surface List

1

Surface 2

11

-Apply-

1

8 2 10

1

Y Z

12 X

9

1


Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve X is created at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.75, instead of ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extract

7 2

1

Curve ID List 1 8 2

Option: Parametric

10

Curve Direction ◆ u Direction ◆ ◆ v Direction

Y

Curve Position 0.0

X

Z

9

1.0 0.75

v Parametric Value

After:

Auto Execute

7 2

Surface List

1

Surface 2

-Apply-

8 2

11 1 1

Y Z

X

12 9

10


Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Curve 3 which is at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 on a surface defined by Curve 2 and an edge of Surface 1 by using the Surface select menu icons listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extract

Before: 3

Curve ID List 2

1

3

Option: Parametric

5

Curve Direction

6 1

◆ ◆ u Direction ◆ v Direction

2 Y

Curve Position 0.0

Z

X

1.0

7

0.25

v Parametric Value

After:

Auto Execute

3

Surface List Construct2CurveSurface(Ev 8 2

1

-Apply3

5

6 1

9 2

Y Z

X 7

Surface Select Menu Icons

1


Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option The Extract method creates curves on specified edges of existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extract

Curve ID List


1

Option:

Edge

Auto Execute Edge List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Edge List, the existing edges of the surfaces or solid faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.1 Solid 5.1.1.

☞

More Help:



Curve Extract Method With Edge Option Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Extract/Edge option. The curve is created on one of the edges of Surface 1. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extract

Before: 5

Curve ID List 3

6

Option:

2

Edge

Auto Execute

1

1 2

1

Edge List Surface 1.2

Y 3 X

4

Z

-Apply-

After: 1 5 3

6 2

1

1 2

1

Y 3 X Z

4

1


Creating Fillet Curves The fillet method is intended for use with 2D construction. The created curve is a circular arc. For this reason, the method will not work if the provided curves are not co-planar. The Patran 2.5 switch overrides this requirement and places no restriction on coplanarity. The result is a single cubic line so that it is more like a slope continuous blend between the 2 curves. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Fillet


Curve ID List 1

Fillet Parameters Curves per Fillet 1

Fillet Radius Fillet Tolerance 0.005

Curves per Fillet specifies the number of curves you want to create for each defined fillet arc. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2 Convention. Fillet Radius specifies a real value for the radius of the fillet arc. Only one radius value is allowed which is applied to all specified curves or edges/points that are entered in the Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Fillet Tolerance specifies the accuracy MSC.Patran uses when it subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position. Decreasing the value helps when the fillet is very small compared to the geometry. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2 Convention.

Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Curve/Point 1 List

If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original curves specified in the Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original curve.

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-

Calculated Center Radius New Fillet Curve Curve 2 Endpoint

Curve 1 Endpoint

Portions to Trim



Fillet Radius Fillet Tolerance 0.005

Trim Original Curves Auto Execute

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to Press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve/Point 1 List

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-

Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the existing pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the fillet will be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

1


Curve Fillet Method Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and Point 4 and Curve 2 and Point 5, with a radius of 0.5. Notice Trim Original Curves is pressed. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Fillet

Before: 1

6

Curve ID List 3

1 2

Fillet Parameters Curves per Fillet

5

1

Fillet Radius Y

0.5

Fillet Tolerance

Z

4 X

0.005

Trim Original Curves

After:

Auto Execute 1

Curve/Point 1 List ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve

6


-Apply-

8 2 5

3 7

1 Y Z

4 X


Curve Fillet Method Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and Point 2 and Curve 2 and Point 3, with a radius of 0.25. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Fillet

Before: 3 2 1

Curve ID List

4

3


Fillet Radius

Y

2

0.25

Fillet Tolerance

X

Z 1

0.005

Trim Original Curves Auto Execute

After:


3 6

Curve/Point 2 List 3 ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve

2 1 4

5

-Apply-

2 X

Y Z 1

1


Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points The Fit method creates a parametric cubic curve by fitting it through a set of two or more point locations. MSC.Patran uses a parametric least squares numerical approximation for the fit. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Fit


Curve ID List 1

Number of Curves to Create specifies the number of curves to create to represent the fit through the specified points.

Fit Parameters Number of Curves to Create 1

Convergence Tolerance 0.005

Number of Iterations 0

Point List

-Apply-

Convergence Tolerance is used when the Number of Iterations is greater than zero. This value, measured in model units, defines the maximum the interior points will deviate from a calculated spline of the original curves that are used in the synthesis of the new curves. Default is .005. Number of Iterations is zero by default. If zero, MSC.Patran will create smooth, evenly parameterized curves. If it is greater than zero, as the value increases, the curve fit will be more accurate, but they will become more nonuniformly parameterized and they may have unwanted kinks or oscillations.

Specify the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to fit the curve through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point locations.

☞

More Help:



Curve Fit Method Example Creates three curves starting with Curve 1, using the Create/Fit method. The curve is created through Points 1 through 6. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Fit

Method:

6 2

Curve ID List 3

1

5

Fit Parameters Number of Curves to Create

1 4

3 Y

Convergence Tolerance

Z

0.005

X

Number of Iterations 0

After:

Point List Point 1: 6

-Apply6

2 7 3

3 5 2

1

4 Y Z

X

8

1


Creating Curves at Intersections Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces The Intersect method using the 2 Surface option creates curves at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces. The two surfaces or faces must completely intersect each other. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: Intersect Curve ID List 1

Option:

2 Surface

Option: Intersect Parameters...


If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 157) for more information.

Auto Execute Surface 1 List


Surface 2 List

-Apply-

Specify the existing pair of intersecting surfaces or solid faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Surface 10 Solid 10.1. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:



Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect method with the 2 Surface option. The curve is located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 2. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 4

6

2


2 1

Option:

2 Surface

Intersect Parameters... 3

Auto Execute

Y

Surface 1 List

5

Z

Surface 1

X 1

Surface 2 List Surface 2

After:

-Apply-

4

6

2 1 2 1 7

3 Y Z

5 X 1

1


Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example This example is similar to the previous example, except the second surface is instead defined by Curves 2 and 3 by using the Surface select menu icon and selecting Curves 2 and 3 to create Surface 2. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 3 8

Method: Intersect 2

Curve ID List

4

4

Option:

2 Surface

1

Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute Surface 1 List

Y

Surface 1

Z

Surface 2 List

2

3

7

X

1

Construct 2CurveSurface

After: -Apply-

3 8 4 2 4

9

Y Z

Surface Select Menu Icon

X

1

2 7 1

3


Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect/2 Surface option. The curve is located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 4. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:


1

1

Option:

2 Surface

Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute

Y

Surface 1 List Z

Surface 1

X


After: -Apply1 4 1

Y Z

X

1


Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface The Intersect method with the Plane-Surface option creates curves at the intersection of a defined plane and a surface or a solid face. The plane and the surface or face must completely intersect each other. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve


Option:

Plane-Surface

Intersect Parameters...

Auto Execute Plane List

Surface List

-Apply-

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 157) for more information. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Plane List, one or more plane definitions that intersect with the specified surfaces or faces, either by entering the vector coordinates or by cursor defining them using the Vector Select menu. Examples: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, Coord 0.1. Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or solid faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:



Curve Intersect Method With Plane-Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 1 and a plane whose normal is defined at {[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 2


1

Option:

1

Plane-Surface

Intersect Parameters...

1


Y

{[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}

Surface List

X

Z

4

Surface 1

After: -Apply-

2

3

5 1

6

1 Y Z

X

4

1


Curve Intersect Method With the Plane-Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 2 and a plane whose normal is defined by the Z axis of Coord 1, Coord 1.3, by using the Axis select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 6


Z

Option:

2

Plane-Surface

1

T

R

Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute

Y

Plane List

X

Z

Coord 1.3

5


After: -Apply-

6

Z 2 1

1 TR 7

Y Z

X 5

Axis Select Menu Icon

3


Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form The Intersect Parameters subordinate form appears when the Intersect Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Intersect Parameters Curves per Intersection 0

Max. Deviation Tolerance 0.005

Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve intersection using a tolerance based cubic spline.

Intersect Tolerance 0.05

OK

Active if PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON, on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create at each intersection.

Used by MSC.Patran to determine how many points to create to represent the curve intersection.

Cancel

☞

More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

1


Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes This form is used to create a curve from the intersection of two planes. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Create Curve

Method:

Intersect

Curve ID List 1

Curve Type PATRAN 2 Convention Option:

2 Plane

Curve Length Input Length Calculate Length 6.9282

Distance Deltax

Deltay Deltaz

Calculate Curve Length Auto Execute Plane 1 List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If ON, MSC.Patran will create parametric cubic curves. Otherwise, the new curves will be a Straight Line geometry type. Parametric cubic geometry is supported by the PATRAN 2 Neutral File for import or export. If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in model units. By default, the length is calculated from the current viewport limits to simulate an infinite construction entity. If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called Length Calculation Points will appear. You must enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes that the curve length will be calculated from. Once the points have been entered, press the Calculate Curve Length button to display the curve length in the databox based on Distance, Deltax, Deltay, Deltaz selections By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Plane 1 List, one or more plane definitions that intersect with the specified planes in Plane 2 List, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes. Examples: Coord 0.1, Plane 1 Specify in Plane 2 List, one or more plane definitions that intersect with the specified planes in Plane 1 List, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

Plane 2 List

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Creating Curve Intersect from Two Planes Example Create curve 1 with a length of 0.334 from the intersection of plane 1 and 2. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Create

Before:

Curve

Method:

Intersect

1

Curve ID List 1

Curve Type PATRAN 2 Convention

2 Option:

2 Plane

Curve Length Input Length Calculate Length

Y X

Z 0.334

Distance Deltax

Deltay Deltaz

After:

Calculate Curve Length Auto Execute Plane 1 List Plane 1

1

Plane 2 List 2

Plane 2

-ApplyY Z

X

1


Manifold Curves Onto a Surface Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option The Manifold method with the 2 Point option creates curves directly on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by using two point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: Manifold Curve ID List 1


Option: Manifold Parameters... Option:

2 Point

Auto Execute

Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When this toggle is pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.



Option:

2 Point

Auto Execute Surface List

Starting Point List

Ending Point List

-Apply-

Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the new curves will lie on, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2. Specify in Starting Point List and Ending Point List, the existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:


1


Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option Example Creates three curves starting with Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/2 Point option. The curves are created on Surface 1 between Point 7 and Points 2,5 and 8. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: Manifold

5

Curve ID List

2

8

1 4


1

6

2 Point

Auto Execute

Y

Surface List

7 X

Z

Surface 1


Ending Point List

After:

Point 2 5 8

5

-Apply-

2

8

4 1

6

4 Y

7 X

Z

2


Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option On a Face Example Creates Curve 1 using the Manifold/2 Point option on a face of Solid 1 that is between Points 5 and 12. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

6

Method: Manifold Curve ID List

12 9

1


7

1 1

2 Point

10 8 Y


X

5 Z

Surface 1.5

11


Ending Point List

After:

Point 12 6

-Apply-

12 9

7

1 1 1 10 8 Y X

5 Z

11

1


Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option The Manifold/N-Points option creates curves directly on a set of surfaces or solid faces by using two or more point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face and they can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: Manifold Curve ID List


4

Option: Manifold Parameters... Option: N-Points

Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When the Manifold Parameters... button is pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.

Surface Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that you want to create curves on, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.

Point List

-Apply-

Specify in Point List the existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:



Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on Surface 1 through Points 5, 8, 17, 18 and 4. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: Manifold

5 8

Curve ID List

6 17

1

1

Option: Manifold Parameters...

18

4

Option: N-Points 7

Surface

Y

Surface 1 X

Z

Point List Point 5 8 17 18 4

-Apply-

After:

5 8 6 17 1 1 18

4 7

Y Z

X

1


Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option On a Face Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on the top face of Solid 1, through Points 6, 12, 13 and 5. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 6

Method: Manifold 12

Curve ID List 9 1

7

1 1

Option: Manifold Parameters... Option: N-Points

13

10 8

5

Surface Y

Solid 1.5 X

Point List

Z 11

Point 6 12 13 5

-Apply-

After:

6

12 9

1

1 1

7 13

10 8

Y X

5

Z 11


Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form The Manifold Parameters subordinate form appears when the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON and the Manifold Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Manifold application form.

Manifold Parameters Curves per Manifold Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create between each pair of points (for the 2 Point option) or through a set of given points (for the N-Points option).

0

Manifold Tolerance 0.005

OK

Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the manifold using a tolerance based cubic spline.

Cancel

☞

More Help:


1


Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal Method) The Normal method creates straight parametric cubic curves from a point location, normally to a curve or an edge. The point location can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Normal

Curve ID List 1


Auto Execute Specify in Point List, the existing point locations, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Point Select menu. Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 5.2.

Point List

Curve List

Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Curve 10, Solid 5.2.1. The Curve Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

-Apply-

Point

New Curve Original Curve

☞

More Help:



Curve Normal Method Example Creates Curve 6 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 13 normally to the edge of Curve 5. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve Normal

Method:

Before:

13

Curve ID List 6 12

Auto Execute Point List Point 13 5

Curve List

Y

Curve 5 Z

X

-Apply-

After:

13 6 14

5 Y Z

X

12

1


Curve Normal Method From An Edge Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 20 normally to an edge of Surface 4 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 17 16

Normal

Method:

Curve ID List 1

Auto Execute

4

Point List Point 20 20

Curve List

Y

Curve 4 19

X

Z

18

-Apply-

After: 17 16

4

20 Y 1 Z


19

X 18

21


Creating Offset Curves Creating Constant Offset Curve This form is used to create a constant offset curve. Geometry Geometry Action: Create Object:

Curve

Method:

Offset Specify the Offset Curve type to create: 1. Constant Offset 2. Variable Offset

Curve ID List 1


Offset Parameters Constant Offset Value

Specify the constant offset value of the curve.

1.0

Repeat Count

Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using the Repeat Count parameter.

1


Draw Direction Vector

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -Apply-

Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from. Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

1


Creating Constant Offset Curve Example Create offset curves 2 thru 4 by offsetting a distance of .5 from curve 1 using a repeat count of 3. Geometry Geometry Action: Create Object:

Before:

Curve

Method:

Offset

1

Curve ID List 2

Offset Parameters Constant Offset Value .5

Repeat Count

Y

3

Z

X

Auto Execute

After:

Curve List Curve 1

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction 4

Reset Graphics 3

-Apply-

2 1

Y Z

X


Creating Variable Offset Curve This form is used to create a variable offset curve. Geometry Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Offset

Specify the Offset Curve type to create: 1. Constant Offset 2. Variable Offset

Curve ID List


1 Specify the start offset value of the curve.

Offset Parameters Start Value

Specify the end offset value of the curve.

1.0

Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using the Repeat Count parameter.

End Value

Specify the Parameterization Control of the offset curve.

1.0

Parameter Value: Defines the parametric values of the start and end offset distances.

Repeat Count

Arc Length: Function of arc length.

1

[Parameterization Control...] Auto Execute Curve List

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction Reset Graphics

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves. Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from. Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:


1


Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve This form is used to define the parameterization control for the offset curve. There are two types; Arc Length and Parameter Value. Parameterization Control Arc Length Parameter Value 0.0

Select the Parameterization Method for the offset curve. (Arc Length is Default )

1.0

0.0

1.0

1.0

Start Parameter Value 0.0 End Parameter Value OK

Cancel

Define the start and end Parameter Values for the start and end distance of the offset curve by using the slidebar or entering the value in the databox. The start Parameter Value must be less than the End Parameter Value. (Used for when the Parameterization Method is Parameter Value.


Creating Variable Offset Curve Example Create curves 2 thru 3 from curve 1 by offsetting a start distance of .25 and an end distance of 1. Use parameter values of .5 and 1.0. Geometry Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Before:

Curve

Method:

Offset

1

Curve ID List 2

Offset Parameters Start Value 0.25

End Value

Y

1.0

Z

X

Repeat Count 1

After:

[Parameterization Control...] Auto Execute Curve List

3

Curve 1 2

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -Apply-

1 Y Z

X

1


Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces The Project method creates curves by projecting a set of curves or edges along a defined projection vector, onto a surface or solid face. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Project

Curve ID List 1


Option: Project Parameters... Option: Normal to Plane

If pressed, the Project Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Project Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 182) for more information.

Available options are:

Normal to Plane - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected through a vector that is normal to at least one of the curves or edges that define a plane. Normal to Surf - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected through a vector that is normal to the surface or solid face specified in Surface List. Define Vector - The project direction is defined by the vector coordinates entered in the Projection Vector databox which is expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <1 1 0>. The Vector Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector definition. View Factor - The project direction is defined by the view angle in the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the normal direction of the screen.


If ON, after Project completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will be deleted from the database.

Option: Normal to Plane Projection Vector <0 0 0>


Used if the Define Vector option is chosen. Either enter the vector coordinates that are expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame, or use the Vector Select Menu that appears to cursor define the projection vector.

Coord 0

Delete Original Curves



Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges that you want to project onto the surfaces or faces listed in Surface List.

Surface List

Specify in Surface List, the surfaces or faces that the curves or edges will be projected onto. You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1. The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges, and surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Viewing Menu (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

1


Curve Project Method With the Normal to Plane Option Example Creates Curve 7 using the Create Project/Normal to Plane option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 that is normal to the plane defined by Curve 6. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Project

Before: 13

Curve ID List

5 15

7

2

6

Option: Project Parameters... Option: Normal to Plane Projection Vector Y <0 0 0>


Z

X

12 14

Coord 0


After:

Auto Execute

13

Curve List Curve 6 5

Surface List

15

Surface 2

2

16

7

6

-Apply-

Y Z

X

12 14


Curve Project Method With the Normal to Surf Option Example Creates Curve 8 using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 normally onto Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Project

Before: 13

Curve ID List

5

2

15

16

8 7

6

Option: Project Parameters... Option: Normal to Surf Projection Vector Y <0 0 0> Z


X

12 14

Coord 0


After: 13

Auto Execute Curve List Curve 6 5


2

16

7 17 8

-Apply-

Y Z

X

12 14

1


Curve Project Method With Define Vector Option Example Creates Curve 7 with the Define Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 through the vector that is defined by Points 19 and 20 by using the Vector select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Project

Before: 13

Curve ID List

2

7

19 6

Option: Project Parameters...

20

Option: Define Vector Projection Vector Construct2PointVector


Y X 12

Z

14

Coord 0


After: 13

Auto Execute Curve List Curve 6

Surface List

2 19

Surface 2

20

21

7

-Apply-

Y Z

X 12 14

Vector Select Menu Icon


Curve Project Method With View Vector Option Example Creates Curve 7 with the View Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 through the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Project

Before: 13

Curve ID List

2

7 6

Option: Project Parameters... Option: View Vector Projection Vector Construct2PointVector


Y Z X 12 14

Coord 0


After: 13


Surface List

2 15

Surface 2 7

-Apply-

Y Z X 12 14

1


Project Parameters Subordinate Form The Project Parameters subordinate form appears when the Project Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Project application form. Project Parameters Curves per Projection 0

Projection Tolerance

Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on the Create/Curve/Project form. If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create for a given projection location.

0.005

OK

Cancel

Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve projection location using a tolerance based cubic spline.

☞

More Help:



Creating Piecewise Linear Curves The PWL method will create a set of piecewise linear (or straight) parametric cubic curves between a set of existing point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

PWL

Curve ID List 1


Point List

-Apply-

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to connect the curves between, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point locations.

☞

More Help:


1


Curve PWL Method Example Creates seven curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/PWL method. The straight curves are created through Points 12 through 18 and Node 1.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

PWL

Before: 18

17

14

13

15

16

Curve ID List 5

Point List

1

12

Point 12: 18 Node 1 Y

-ApplyZ

X

After: 6

13

14

17

7

9

15 5

16

18

11

1 19

12

Y Z

8

10

X


Creating Spline Curves Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option The Spline method using the Loft Spline option creates piecewise cubic polynomial spline curves that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Spline

Curve ID List


1

Option: Loft Spline Curves per Spline

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.

0

End Point Slope Control Auto Execute If ON, End Point Slope Control allows you to use the Start and End Point Tangent Vector databoxes to define the tangent vector for the slopes at the spline’s start point and end point locations.

1



End Point Slope Control

Used if End Point Slope Control toggle is ON.

Auto Execute

Specify in Start Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of the slope at the first point listed in Point List.

Start Point Tangent Vector

Specify in End Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of the slope at the last point listed in Point List.

End Point Tangent Vector

You can either enter the vector coordinates that are expressed in the global rectangular frame, Coord 0 (Example: <1.5 0 0>); or you can use the Vector Select menu that appears to cursor define the slope’s vector.

Point List Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point locations.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Spline method with the Loft Spline option. The curve is created through Points 1 through 5. Notice that since End Point Slope Control are not pressed in, Start and End Point Tangent Vector are disabled. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Spline

Before: 2 1

Curve ID List

3

1 5

Option: Loft Spline Curves per Spline

4

0


Y

Auto Execute

Z

X


End Point Tangent Vector

After: 2 1

Point List Point 1:5

3 1 5

-Apply-

4 Y Z

X

1


Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve 2 is created with End Point Slope Control is pressed in. The Start Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 1 and 2, and the End Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 4 and 5, using the Vector select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Spline

Before: 2 1

Curve ID List

3

1 1

Option:Loft Spline

5

Curves per Spline 0

4


Y

Auto Execute Z


X

Construct 2PointVector

End Point Tangent Vector Construct 2PointVector


After: 2 1

3

-Apply21 5

4 Y Z

Vector Select Menu Icon

X


Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option The Spline/B-Spline option creates spline curves that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Spline


Curve ID List 1

Option: B-Spline Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.

Curves per Spline B-Spline Parameters 2

10

Order Interpolation Closed Parametrization Method ◆ Chord Length ◆ ◆ Uniform Point List

-Apply-

Specify for Order, the B-Spline’s order of the polynomials. As Order increases, MSC.Patran will create an increasingly smoother spline. MSC.Patran will not create the spline if Order is greater than the number of points listed in Point List. If Interpolation is ON, MSC.Patran will force the spline through the given points. If it is OFF, the spline will only pass through the first and last points. If Closed is ON, MSC.Patran will created a closed spline. If it is OFF, the spline will be open ended. If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the B-spline is based on the chord length distances relative to the locations of the spline’s interior points. This means the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior points are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the B-spline will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the specified points in the Point List are located. That is, the curve will be always uniformly parameterized.

☞ Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

1


Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example Creates Curve 1 with the B-Spline option. The B-spline has an order of 3 and uses Points 1 through 5. Since Interpolation is not pressed, the curve is not forced to pass through all the points.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Spline

2 1

Curve ID List

3

1 5

Option: B-Spline Curves per Spline 4

0

B-Spline Parameters 3

Y

10 Z

X

Order Interpolation Closed

After:

Parametrization Method ◆ Chord Length ◆ ◆ Uniform

2 1

3 1


5

-Apply-

4 Y Z

X


Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that the order for Curve 2 is three, instead of five.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Spline

2 1

Curve ID List 3

2

1

Option: B-Spline

5

Curves per Spline 0

4


Y

10

Z


X

After:


2 1

3

Point List

1

Point 1:5

5

-Apply4 Y Z

X

1


Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Interpolation is pressed and Curve 3 is forced to pass through Points 1 through 5. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Spline

Before: 2 1

Curve ID List 3

3

1

Option: B-Spline

5

Curves per Spline 0

4


Y

10

Z


X

After:


2 1

3

Point List

1

Point 1:5 5

-Apply4 Y Z

X


Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method) The TanCurve method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between two existing curves or edges. The curves or edges cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be able to find the tangent location on each curve. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: TanCurve


Curve ID List 1

Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Curve/Point 1 List

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-

If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the original curve. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the new curve will be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

New Curve Original Curve 1

Portions To Be Trimmed Original Curve 2

☞

More Help:


1


Curve TanCurve Method Example Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanCurve method. The curve is tangent between Curves 9 and 8 with Points 26 and 25 as the endpoints selected in the Point 1 and 2 Lists. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: TanCurve

8 9

Curve ID List 10

23


25

Auto Execute Curve/Point 1 List

26

28 Y

ConstructPoint CurveUOn Curve

Curve/Point 2 List

Z

X

ConstructPoint CurveUOnCurve

-Apply-

After:

29

30

10

8

9 23

26

28 Y Z

X

25


Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points (TanPoint Method) The TanPoint method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between a point location and a curve or an edge. The curve or edge cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be able to find the tangent location. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: TanPoint


Curve ID List 1

Closest Tangent Only Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Point List

Curve List

-Apply-

If Closest Tangent Only is chosen, the new curve will be created at the closest tangent point to the existing point location. If All Tangents is chosen, MSC.Patran will preview each curve to be created at all possible tangent points and ask if you want to create a curve at each possible location. If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve List. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the original curve.

1


Closest Tangent Only Trim Original Curves Auto Execute


Point List Specify in Point List, the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or by cursor selecting the location using the Point Select menu.

Curve List

-Apply-

Specify in Curve List, the curves or edges either by entering the IDs or by cursor selecting them using the Curve Select menu. Examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1.

New Curve Original Curve Portion to trim

Point

☞

More Help:



Curve TanPoint Method Example Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 25 and Curve 9. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 9 is trimmed. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: TanPoint

9

Curve ID List 10

25

Closest Tangent Only

26

28


Y

Auto Execute

Z

Point List

X

Point 25

Curve List

After:

Curve 9

-Apply29 9

10 25

26

28 Y Z

X

1


Curve TanPoint Method Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 9 and an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: TanPoint

1

1

Curve ID List 1 2

5

Closest Tangent Only Trim Original Curves

9 Y


Z

6 X

Point 9

Curve List Curve 1.2

After:

-Apply1

1 10 2

5

1

9 Y Z

6 X


Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ Method) The XYZ method creates parametric cubic curves, surface, or solids from a specified vector length and origin. The origin can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Method:

Set to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.

XYZ

ID List 1

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Vector Coordinates List <1 0 0>

Auto Execute Origin Coordinates List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve, surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0. Enter the vector coordinates to define the lengths and direction for the new curves, surfaces or solids. Enter the coordinates either from the keyboard (example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define the vector using the Vector Select menu that appears. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the origin or starting point location of the new curve, surface or solid. You can express the origin’s point location either by entering the cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.3.1.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

1


Curve XYZ Method Example Creates Curve 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 0>. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

XYZ

Before:

Curve ID List 3


6

Coord 0

Vector Coordinates List Y

<20 10 0>

Auto Execute

X

Z

Origin Coordinates List

After:

Point 6

-Apply-

7

3

6

Y

Z

X


Surface XYZ Method Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 5>. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

XYZ

Surface ID List 3


6

Coord 0

Vector Coordinates List

Y

<20 10 5>

Auto Execute

X

Z

Origin Coordinates List

After:

Point 6

7

-Apply-

8 3 6

Y Z

X 9

2


Solid XYZ Method Example Creates Solid 1 whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 5> which is expressed within the Reference Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

XYZ

Before:

Solid ID List 1


6

Coord 0

Vector Coordinates List

Y

<20 10 5> X

Z

Auto Execute Origin Coordinates List

After:

Point 6

7

-Apply11

8

6

1

12

10

Y 9 Z

X

13


Creating Involute Curves Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option The Involute/Angles option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended for gear designers, the Angles option requires the angle of the unwinding and the starting angle. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: Involute Curve ID List 1


Option: Angles Involute Parameters Angle to unwind the involute 0.0

Starting angle for involute 0.0

Curves per Point 1 Refer. Coordinate Frame

Specify in Angle to unwind the involute, the angle in degrees to unwind the involute. Specify in Starting angle for involute, the starting angle in degrees of the involute curve. Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the total involute. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2 Convention.

Coord 0 Involute Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}


-Apply-

Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane the involute curve will be in. Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu and cursor define the vector definition.

2


Involute Parameters Angle to unwind the involute 0.0


Curves per Point 1 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Involute Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}



-Apply-

Specify the existing point, vertex, node or other point location that defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point location.

☞

More Help:



Curve Involute Method With the Angles Option Example Creates four curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Angles option, where the curve is unwound 360 degrees about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, from Point 13. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:


5

Option: Angles Involute Parameters Angle to unwind the involute 360


Y Z

X

Curves per Point 4


After:

Coord 0

Involute Axis

15

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

6

7

Auto Execute

14

Point List

5 13

Point 13

16

-Apply-

Y Z

8 X 17

2


Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option The Involute/Radii option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point location provided on the Point select menu. Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended for the material modeling community, the Radii option requires the base radius of the bobbin and the radius of the stop of the curve.

☞

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

More Help:



Option: Radii Involute Parameters Base radius of the bobbin


0.0

Radius of the stop 0.0

Curves per Point

Specify in Base radius of the bobbin, the base radius, in model units, of the bobbin.

1

Specify in Radius of the Stop, the radius of the stop of the involute curve.


Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the total involute.

Coord 0 Involute Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}


Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane the involute curve will be in. Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu and cursor define the vector definition. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

-ApplySpecify the point, vertex, node or other point location that defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point location.


Curve Involute Method With the Radii Option Example Creates six curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Radii option, where the curve is unwound starting with a base radius of 0.1 and a stop radius of 2, about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, starting from Point 13. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:


13

Option: Radii Involute Parameters Base radius of the bobbin 0.1

Radius of the stop 2

Curves per Point

Y Z

X

6


After:

Involute Axis

18

9

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} 14

Auto Execute 5

6

Point List

17

10 Point 13 13

-Apply-

15 8

Y Z

19 X

7 16

2


Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids The Revolve method creates curves, surfaces or solids by the rotation of a point, curve or surface location, respectively. The new geometric entity is rotated about a defined axis. Point locations can be points, vertices, or nodes, Curve locations can be curves or edges. Surface locations can be surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Method:

Revolve

ID List 1

Set to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next entity type to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.


Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Revolve Parameters Total Angle 90.0

Offset Angle 0.0 per

1

Auto Execute List

Specify in Axis, the coordinate values of the rotation vector that will be expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example: {[10 0 0][10 0 1]}. You can instead use the Vector Select menu that appears, to cursor define the rotation vector in the Axis databox.

Specify in Total Angle, the total positive or negative rotation angle, in degrees, using “right-hand” rule. Specify in Offset Angle, an optional offset angle in degrees. (Default is no offset.) If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify in per , the number of curves, surfaces or solids to create within the specified Total Angle. Otherwise if PATRAN 2 Convention is OFF, per is disabled. Specify the points, curves or surfaces either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10, Curve 10, Surface 1:10. The Select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.

-Apply-

☞ By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

More Help:



Curve Revolve Method Example Creates Curves 5 and 6 using the Create/Revolve method, where the curves are created from Points 12 and 13 about the axis, {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} for 180 degrees, with an offset of 30 degrees. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method:

Before:

Revolve

Curve ID List 5

12

13


Axis Y {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Z

X

Revolve Parameters Total Angle 180.0

Offset Angle

After:

30.0

Curves per Point 6

1

Auto Execute 5

Point List

16

Point 12 13 14

-Apply12

Y Z 17

15 X

13

2


Surface Revolve Method Example Creates Surface 1 where the surface is created from a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 using the Curve select menu icon listed below. The surface is revolved 45 degrees about the axis {Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Revolve

Before:

Surface ID List 1


Coord 0

2

Axis Y {Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}

Sweep Parameters Total Angle

Z

X

45.0

Offset Angle

After:

0.0

Surfaces per Curve 1

Auto Execute

3

Curve List Construct 2 Point Curve 1

-Apply1 Y Z


X

2


Surface Revolve Method Example Creates four surfaces starting with Surface 2 using the Create/Revolve method, where the surfaces are created from Curves 9 through 12 about the axis, {[0 0 0 ] [ 1 0 0 ]} for 360 degrees. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Revolve

Before:

21

Surface ID List

12 20

2 11 19 10


17

9

18

Coord 0

Axis {Point 1 [x1 y1 1]} Y

Sweep Parameters Total Angle 360.0

Offset Angle

Z

X

After:

0.0 21

Surfaces per Curve

12

1

20 11

Auto Execute

19 10

Curve List

17 9

18

Curve 9:12

-ApplyY

2

X Z

3

4 5

2


Solid Revolve Method Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 2. The axis is defined by the Points 15 and 12 using the Axis select menu icon listed below, for a rotation of 90 degrees. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 13

14

Revolve

Solid ID List 1 2


Axis

Y

Construct2PointAxis

12

15 Z

X

Sweep Parameters Total Angle 90.0

Offset Angle

After:

0.0

Solids per Surface

14

1 13

Auto Execute Surface List 2

Surface 2

1 16

-Apply17

15

Y X Z


12


Solid Revolve Method Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 1 about the X axis of Coord 1 (by using the Axis select menu listed below) for 90 degrees. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 2 3

Revolve

1

Solid ID List

1

1

4


Axis Coord 1.1

Y

Y

1

Sweep Parameters Total Angle

Z

X

Z

X

90.0

Offset Angle

After:

0.0 2

Solids per Surface

3

1

1 1

Auto Execute

4


1

Y

-Apply-

1 Z

Y 5 6 Z

Axis Select Menu Icon 1

8 X

7

X

2


Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method) Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option The 2D Normal/Input Length option creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to a curve or an edge. The curve is defined from a specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List 1


Curve Length ◆ Input Length ◆ ◆ Calculate Length 0.0

◆ Distance◆ ◆ Deltay ◆ ◆ ◆ Deltaic ◆ Deltaz

If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in model units. See Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option (p. 218) for information on the Calculate Length button.

Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List Curve List

-Apply-

Enter in Construction Plane List, either the coordinate values of a vector that is normal to the 2D plane that the new curve will lie in (example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}); or cursor define the vector using the Vector Select menu.


Construction Plane List {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}


-Apply-

If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve length and the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity.

Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point location the curve will be created from. Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will be perpendicular to. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the locations.


☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Topology (p. 10)

2


Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option, where the curve is 1 unit long; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; it is perpendicular to the top edge of Surface 1; and its starting point is near Point 3. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 2 3

Method: 2D Normal Z

Curve ID List 1

X

Curve Length ◆ Input Length ◆ ◆ Calculate Length

Y

1

1.0 Y

◆ Distance◆ ◆ Deltay ◆ ◆ ◆ Deltax ◆ Deltaz

Z

1

X 4

Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List

After:

Cord 3.3 2

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List Point 3

3 Z 6

1

Curve List

5

X

Y

1

Surface 1.4

-Apply1

Y 4 Z

X


Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option This example is the same as the previous example, except that Flip Curve Direction is pressed. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 2 3

Method: 2D Normal Z

Curve ID List 1

Y

X

Curve Length ◆ Input Length ◆ ◆ Calculate Length

1

0.0 Y

◆ Distance◆ ◆ Deltay ◆ Deltaz ◆ ◆ Deltax ◆

1

X

Z

4

Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane

After:

Construction Plane List 2

Cord 3.3 3

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List

Z

Point 3

5

X

1

Curve List

Y 6

1

Surface 1.4

-ApplyY Z

1

X 4

2


Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option The 2D Normal/Calculate Length option, creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to an existing curve or edge. The curve is defined from specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List 4

Curve Length ◆ ◆ Input Length ◆ Calculate Length 0.0

◆ Distance◆ ◆ Deltay ◆ Deltaz ◆ ◆ Deltax ◆ Calculate Curve Length


If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called Length Calculation Points will appear (shown below). You must enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes shown below that the curve will be created between. Press Calculate Curve Length first to update the curve length displayed in the databox above, before you complete the remainder of the form (if Auto Execute is ON), or before you press the Apply button.

Project to Plane Construction Plane List Coord 0.3

Length Calculation Points Flip Curve Direction

Auto Execute


Point 1

Curve List

Point 2

-Apply-

Length Calculation Points Subordinate Form


If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

◆ Distance◆ ◆ Deltay ◆ Deltaz ◆ ◆ Deltax ◆ Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Default

Coord 0.3


If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve length and the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity. Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point location the curve will be created from. Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will be perpendicular to.

-Apply-

Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the locations.


☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Topology (p. 10)

2


Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Example Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is 1.0; it lies within the plane whose normal is the global coordinate frame’s X axis, Coord 0.1; and it is starts from a point that is closest to Point 6. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: 2D Normal

1

Curve ID List

1

1

Curve Length ◆ ◆ Input Length ◆ Calculate Length

2 5

0.0

◆ Distance◆ ◆ Deltay ◆ Deltaz ◆ ◆ Deltax ◆ Calculate Curve Length

Y 6 Z

X

Project to Plane Construction Plane List

After:

Coord 0.1 8

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List

1 1

Point 6 1

Curve List Surface 1.3

2 5

-Apply7 Y 6 Z

X


Curve 2D Normal Method With the Calculate Length Option Example Creates Curve 1 with the Calculate Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is the distance between Points 3 and 4; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; and it starts from a point that is closest to Point 3. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 2 3

Method: 2D Normal Z

Curve ID List 1

X3

Curve Length ◆ ◆ Input Length ◆ Calculate Length

Y

1

1.41421 Y

◆ Distance◆ ◆ Deltay ◆ ◆ Deltaz ◆ Deltax ◆

Z

1

X

Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List

4

After:

Cord 3.3

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List Point 3

2 3 6

1

Curve List

Z X3

5

Y

1

Surface 1.4

-Apply-

1 4

Y Z

X

2


Creating 2D Circle Curves The 2D Circle method creates circular curves of a specified radius that is within a defined 2D plane, based on a center point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: 2D Circle Curve ID List 1


Curves per Circle Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the circle.

4

Circle Radius ◆ Input Radius ◆ ◆ Calculate Radius


Auto Execute Center Point List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

If Input Radius is ON, enter the value of the circle’s radius in model units. If Calculate Radius is ON, specify the point location in Radius Point List that the radius will be measured to, from the specified center point. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (example: Point 10, Surface 3.1.1, Node 30); or cursor select the point, vertex, node or other point location using the Point Select menu.


The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default

Circle Radius ◆ Input Radius ◆ ◆ Calculate Radius


Auto Execute

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

Center Point List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

Specify the point location that defines the center of the circle, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20); or by cursor selecting the location. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point location.


☞

More Help:


2


Curve 2D Circle Method With the Input Radius Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle method with the Input Radius option, where the circle has a radius of 1.0, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 0. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: 2D Circle 1

Curve ID List 5

Curves per Circle 4

Circle Radius ◆ Input Radius

Y

◆ ◆ Calculate Radius

Z

X

1.0


After:

Cord 0.3

Auto Execute Center Point List

12

Node 1

1

-Apply-

5 Y Z

X


Curve 2D Circle Method With the Calculate Radius Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle/Calculate Radius option, where the radius is measured from Point 12 to Node 1, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: 2D Circle Curve ID List 5 1

Curves per Circle

12

4

Circle Radius ◆ ◆ Input Radius ◆ Calculate Radius

Y Z

X

Radius Point List Point 12

After:

Project to Plane Construction Plane List Cord 0.3


5

1

Node 1

-ApplyY Z

X

12

2


Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves The 2D ArcAngles method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. The Arc parameter inputs are Radius, Start Angle and End Angle. The point location for the arc’s center is to be input. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: 2D ArcAngles Curve ID List 1


Curves per Arc 1

Arc Parameters Radius

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.

1.0

Start Angle Enter the Arc parameters defined as Radius, Start Angle and End Angle (degrees).

0.0

End Angle 360.0



-Apply-

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).


Arc Parameters Radius 1.0

Start Angle 0.0

End Angle 360.0



Auto Execute

Default


-Apply-

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s center point, by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.


☞

More Help:


2


Curve 2D ArcAngle Method Example Creates Curve 1 using Create/Curve/2D ArcAngles. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

Method: 2D ArcAngles Curve ID List 1

Curves per Arc 1

Arc Parameters

Y

Radius 1.0

X

Z

Start Angle 0.0

End Angle

After:

160.0

Project to Plane

1

Construction Plane List Coord 0.3

Auto Execute

2


Y -Apply-

Z

X

1


Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method) Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: 2D Arc2Point


Curve ID List 1

Option: Center Arc2Point Parameters...

Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius. (Center parameters are displayed.)

If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p. ?) for more information.

2






Default

Starting Point List

Ending Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s center and arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Min. Angle Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Minimum Angle is chosen; the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before: 1

Method: 2D Arc2Point Curve ID List 5

Option: Center 12

Arc2Point Parameters...

13

Project to Plane Construction Plane List {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Y Z

X


After:

Point 12 5

Starting Point List

114

Point 13


-Apply-

12

Y Z

X

13

2


Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Max. Angle Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Maximum Angle is chosen; the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Before:

1

Method: 2D Arc2Point Curve ID List 5

Option: Center 12

Arc2Point Parameters...

13


Y

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Z

X

Auto Execut e Center Point List

After:

Point 12 114


Ending Point List Node 1 12

-Apply-

Y Z

X 5

13


Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve

Method: 2D Arc2Point Curve ID List


1

Option: Radius

Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius. (Center parameters are displayed.)

Arc2Point Parameters... Project to Plane Construction Plane List Coord 0.3

Arc Radius 1.0

Create Center Point Flip Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List Ending Point List

-Apply-

If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 236) for more information.

2




Arc Radius


1.0 Default

Create Center Point Flip Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List

If Create Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be created. If Flip Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be flipped to create arc.

Ending Point List

-Apply-

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.

☞

More Help:



Curve 2D Arc2Point Method with Radius Option Example Creates Curve 1 by creating an arc with a radius of 1.5 using [-1 -.5 -1] and [1 1 1] as start/end points and in the Z construction plane. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Curve

Method:2D Arc2Point Curve ID List 1

Option: Radius Arc2Point Parameters...

Y


X

Z

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Arc Radius 1.5

Create Center Point

After:

Flip Center Point

2

Auto Execute Starting Point List [-1 -.5 -1]

Ending Point List [1 1 1]

1 -Apply-

Y Z

X

1

2


Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form The Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form appears when the Arc2Point Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve 2D Arc2Point application form. Arc2Point Parameters Curves per Arc 1

Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on the Create/Curve/2D Arc2Point form. If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create per Arc.

Arc Angle:Minimum Angle

OK

Cancel

If Minimum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc based on the smallest angle possible between the specified starting and ending points. If Maximum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc based on the largest angle possible between the specified starting and ending points.


Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method) The 2D Arc3Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane, based on point locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve



Curve ID List 1

Curves per Arc 1

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.

Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

2


The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default


Create Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List Middle Point List Ending Point List


Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points, by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20); or cursor defining the point locations using the Point Select menu.

-Apply-

☞

If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the calculated center of the arc.

More Help:



Curve 2D Arc3Point Method Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc3Point method. The arced curve is created through the Points 13, 14 and Node 1 and it lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed in and Point 16 is created. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Curve


Before: 14 1

Curve ID List 5

Curves per Arc 1

Project to Plane Construction Plane List Y

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Z

13 X

Create Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List

After:

Point 13 145


1 15


-Apply-

Y Z

16 X

13

2


Creating Surfaces from Curves Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves The Curve method using the 2 Curve option creates surfaces between two curves or edges. Degenerate three-sided surfaces can be created. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41) for more information. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Surface ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: 2 Curve Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length

Deactivated and not used for the 2 Curve option.

◆ Uniform Manifold Manifold Surface

Auto Execute Starting Curve List

If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with the Surface Select menu.


Ending Curve List

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) Specify in Starting and Ending Curve Lists, the curves or edges for the new surfaces, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.


Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/2 Curve option. The curve is created between Curves 5 and 6. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Before:

17

Surface ID List 2

6

12

Option: 2 Curve

5 18

Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform 16

Y

Manifold Manifold Surface

Auto Execute

X

Z

After:

Starting Curve List Curve 5 17

Ending Curve List Curve 6 12

6

2 5

-Apply-

18

16

Y Z

X

2


Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 that is degenerate with the 2 Curve option which is between an edge of Surface 1 and a zero length curve defined by Point 5, twice. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Before:

2

3

Surface ID List 2 1 5

Option: 2 Curve Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform

1

4 Y Z

Manifold

X

Manifold Surface

Auto Execute

After:

Starting Curve List Surface 1.3

Ending Curve List

2

3

Construct 2 Point Curve 1

2

-Apply1

4 Y Z

X

5


Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method) The Curve method using the 3 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through three existing curves or edges. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Surface ID List


1

Option: 3 Curve Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Execute

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surface’s middle curve. This means the surface may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the middle curve is located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the middle curve is located. That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized.

Starting Curve List

Middle Curve List

Ending Curve List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in the Starting, Middle and Ending Curve Lists, the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:


2


Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/Curve option. The curve is created through Curves 5, 6 and 8. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Before:

19 8 21

Surface ID List 17

2

5

6

12

18

Option: 3 Curve Parameterization Method

16

◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Execute

Y X

Z

Starting Curve List Curve 5

Middle Curve List

After:

Curve 6

Ending Curve List

19 8

Curve 8

21 17

-Apply-

5

6 2

12

18 16 Y

Z

X


Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 through Curves 2, 3 and an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Before: 10 3

Surface ID List

11 8

2

2

Option: 3 Curve

1

Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Execute

9 1

6 1 Y

5 X

Z

7

Starting Curve List Surface 1.4

Middle Curve List

After:

Curve 2 10

Ending Curve List Curve 3

3

-Apply-

11

8 2 1 9 1

6 1

5

Y Z

X

7

2


Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method) The Curve method using the 4 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through four existing curves or edges. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Surface ID List


1

Option: 4 Curve Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves. This means the surface may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized.



Second Curve List

Third Curve List

Ending Curve List

Specify in the Starting, Second, Third and Ending Curve Lists, the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Surface Curve Method With 4 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Curve/4 Curve option. The curve is created through Curves 5,6 and 8 and the edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Before:

24

Surface ID List

22

2

2

3 23

Option: 4 Curve

19 8

Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform

21 17 12

18 Y


Second Curve List Curve 6

16 X

Z

Curve 5

6

5

After:

Third Curve List Curve 8 24

Ending Curve List 22 Surface 2.4

2

2 23

-Apply-

19 8

12

Z


6

5 Y

18 16

X

21

3

17

2


Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method) The Curve method using the N-Curves option creates surfaces that pass through any number of curves or edges. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve


Surface ID List 1

Option: N-Curves Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Curve List

-Apply-

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves. This means the surface may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized. Specify in Curve List, two or more curves or edges that the surface will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.2 11.1, Solid 10.1.1 12.1.1), or cursor select the curves or edges using the Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.

☞

More Help:



Surface Curve Method With N-Curves Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/N-Curves option. The curve is created through Curves 5,6,8,9 and 10. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Curve

Before:

24

22

Surface ID List

8

2 12

6

5

18

Parameterization Method 16

◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Curve List

25

23 21

17

Option: N-Curves

10

9

19

Y X

Z

Curve 5 6 8:10

-Apply-

After:

24

22 8 2

23 21

17 12

6

5

18 16 Y

Z

X

10

9

19

25

2


Creating Composite Surfaces Figure 4-1 The Composite method creates surfaces that are composed from multiple


surfaces. When toggled ON, uses all the boundary vertices from the Surface List. When toggled OFF, will enable vertex selection. If the Vertex List is left empty the original surface edges will be automatically merged until a slope change is encountered in the boundary. The slope change criteria is specified by the "NodeEdge Snap Angle" in the Finite Elements form under Preferences in the main menu. If vertices are specified, they will be graphically marked. This option is probably the most powerful as it will allow the mesher to ignore unimportant details on the boundary.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object: Surface Method:Composite Surface ID List 2

Delete Constituent Surfaces Surface List

Use All Edge Vertices

Allows the user to define larger surface regions within a model, typically when existing surfaces are too detailed for mesh creation. Composite surfaces may be meshed using a larger element edge length than supported on the more detailed, underlying surfaces. A composite surface is initially defined by selecting the existing surfaces to be combined. The surfaces will be graphically highlighted when picked or when the mouse focus is put on the surface list by picking in the listbox.

Defines where geometric vertices, and subsequently finite element nodes are to be placed on the Composite Surface boundary.

Vertex List There are three Inner Loop Options: All will use all closed loops to identify the interior boundary of the composite surface. Options... Vertex

List

Inner Loop Option: All

Preview Boundary

None will create a surface with no internal holes. Select will enable the user to identify existing interior holes to be part of the new surface. If the inner loop is defined by more than one edge, selection of any one of those will be enough. To add a hole which is not part of a surface, the Preview Boundary option must be used. In this case all curves have to be selected to identify the inner loop.

-Apply-

☞

Highlights the current outer and inner boundary free edges and enables the Modify Boundary Frame.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

2


Appears either when the Preview Boundary option is selected or if the Composite Surface Builder was not able to identify a clean boundary from the Surface List. The free edges will be highlighted and marked as follows: White: Free edges within the Surface List. Dark Blue: Free edges shared by one other surface not in the Surface List. Cyan: Free edges shared by more than one surface not in the Surface List. Red: Free edges that have not been processed due to either a gap or a multiple branch path in the Surface List.

Options... Vertex

List

Modify Boundary: ◆ Remove

◆ ◆ Add Edge List Surface 1.3

Reset -Apply-

Add/Remove toggles allow edges or curves to be added or removed from the Surface List boundary. Add places selected curves and edges in the Edge List databox and also supports curve creation on-the-fly. Remove operates in Autoexecute mode whereby previously highlighted curves or edges are simply unhighlighted.

Reset can be used to start over again. If Surface List contains a previous used surface and the boundary has been modified, the previous modification list can be used again. Apply will initiate the Composite Surface Builder to use the Edge List in conjunction with the Surface List to build a new surface. If the proposed boundary is incorrect, the problem location will be marked and a message will appear.

General Comments If valid boundary loops are identified and any of the vertices in the vertex list are not part of a boundary, the location will be marked red and the user will be prompted to “ignore and continue” or “stop”. The Surface Builder always computes the optimal view plane based on the Surface List. In most cases this is satisfactory; however, in some instances, it can create a very distorted parametrization of the new surface, leading to poor finite element mesh quality. Sometimes the view selected by the user as “best” is more successful than the recommended optimal plane (i.e., answer “No” to the prompt asking permission to reorient the model to a better view); otherwise, the proposed Composite Surface will have to be represented by multiple composite surfaces. If the Composite Surface Builder often fails because of unresolved boundary edges, the gap and clean-up tolerances are most likely too small. If edges disappear the tolerances are probably too large. The default gap and clean-up tolerances are set equal to the global model tolerance and can be changed on the Options form.


Composite Surface Options Used to create the boundary loops. This value has to be increased to automatically close existing gaps larger than the tolerance value.

Cleanup Tol.

0.005

Only used in the Surface Builder to ignore gaps between surface edges.

Gap Distance 0.005 Auto Zoom In Problem Detailed Information Display Auto Select Outer Boundary Erase Original Surfaces Ok

Will zoom on the model location where the builder has detected a boundary gap or branch. This is useful for large Composite Surfaces. Controls the appearance of warning messages when gaps or branches are encountered. For the experienced user, they may rather not see the warning messages but simply rely on graphical feedback as previously described.

Defaults

Erases (not deletes) the original surfaces upon successful construction of a Composite Surface. This is identical to using the Plot/Erase functionality under Display.

If toggled OFF, the user will be prompted to identify the outer boundary via a query process. This is needed if the default method of Auto Select fails.

2


Surface Composite Method Example Creates Surface 2 from the surfaces in the viewport. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create

Object: Surface Method: Composite Surface ID List

Z

2

1 X

Y

Delete Constituent Surfaces Surface List Surface 1T#

Use All Edge Vertices Vertex List

Options... Vertex

Inner Loop Option:

Z X Y

After:

List All

Z 1 X

Preview Boundary -Apply-

Z Y X

Y


Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces The Decompose method creates four sided surfaces from an existing surface or solid face by choosing four vertex locations. This method is usually used to create surfaces from a multi-sided trimmed surface so that you can either mesh with IsoMesh or continue to build a tri-parametric solid. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 37) for more information on how to use the Decompose method. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method: Decompose


Surface ID List 1 Enter the trimmed surface to decompose either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Surface 10); or by cursor selecting the surface.

Surface

Auto Execute Surface Vertex 1 List

Surface Vertex 2 List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to chose the Apply button to execute the form. Enter in the Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices that will define the new surface. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select the vertices.



-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

2


Surface Decompose Method Example Creates Surfaces 3, 4 and 5 using the Create/Decompose method. The surfaces are created from Trimmed Surface 2 and they are defined by the cursor selected vertices listed in the Surface Vertex databoxes on the form. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Before: 17

15

Method: Decompose 14

Surface ID List 3 2

Surface 12

Surface 2 Y

Auto Execute

Z

X


18

16

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 1.0000


After:

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 0.0000

17

15

Surface Vertex 3 List 3

Surface 2(u 0.516341)(v 0.0000


14

Surface 2(u 0.331216)(v 1.0000 19 4

2

-Apply-

20 12 Y 5 Z

X 18

16


Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method) The Edge method creates three or four sided surfaces that are bounded by three or four intersecting curves or edges, without manifolding the surface to an existing surface or face. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Edge


Surface ID List 1

Set this option to either 3 Edge or 4 Edge. The 3 Edge option will create a degenerate three sided surface.

Option: 4 Edge Manifold Manifold Surface

Auto Execute

If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with the Surface Select menu. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Surface Edge 1 List

Surface Edge 2 List

Enter in the Surface Edge 1,2, 3 and/or 4 Lists, the three or four curves or edges that will bound the new surface, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.2, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor selecting them with the Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.

Surface Edge 3 List

Surface Edge 4 List

-Apply-

☞

More Help:


2


Surface Edge Method With the 3 Edge Option Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Edge/3 Edge option. The degenerate surface is created from Curves 5 and 6 and the edge of Surface 2. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41). Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

13

14

5

Edge 16

2

Surface ID List

6

3 12

15

Option: 3 Edge Manifold Manifold Surface

Y Z

X

Auto Execute Surface Edge 1 List

After:

Curve 5

Surface Edge 2 List 13

Curve 6

14

5

Surface Edge 3 List 16

Surface 2.1

3

2

6 12

-Apply-

Y Z

X

15


Surface Edge Method With the 4 Edge Option Example Creates Surface2 using the Create/Edge/4 Edge option. The surface is created from Curves 5 through 8. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

18

Edge

6

7 12

5

Surface ID List 2

Option: 4 Edge

19 8

Manifold

17 Y

Manifold Surface Z

X

Auto Execute Surface Edge 1 List

After:

Curve 5

Surface Edge 2 List Curve 6

Surface Edge 3 List

18 7 12

Curve 7

6

2

5

Surface Edge 4 List Curve 8 19 8

-Apply-

17 Y Z

X

2


Extracting Surfaces Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them from within or on a solid, at a constant parametric ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) , or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . One surface is extracted from each solid. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Extract

Surface ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: Parametric Surface Plane ◆ Constant u Plane ◆ ◆ Constant v Plane ◆ ◆ Constant w Plane

Select either Constant u Direction, Constant v Direction, or Constant w Direction. The surfaces will either be created either along the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction; along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction; or along the ξ 3 (w) direction for Constant w Direction.

Surface Position 0.0

1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value Auto Execute Solid List

-Apply-

Specify the solid’s ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ), or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate value for the location of the surface, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 are defined by the connectivity of the solid. You can plot the parametric directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.


Surface Plane ◆ Constant u Plane ◆ ◆ Constant v Plane ◆ ◆ Constant w Plane Surface Position 0.0

1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value Auto Execute Solid List

-Apply-


Specify in Solid List, the solids that you want to extract surfaces from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 1:10), or cursor select the solids using the Solid Select menu that appears on the bottom.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

2


Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within Solid 1. Notice the parametric direction is displayed near Point 19. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Before:

Create

20

Surface

2 1

19

Extract

3

21 22

Surface ID List 2

1

Option: Parametric Surface Plane ◆ ◆ Constant u Plane ◆ ◆ Constant v Plane ◆ Constant w Plane

17

Y

18

12 Z

X 16


1.0 0.75

After:

w Parametric Value

20 2 19 1

Auto Execute

3

Solid List

21 22

Solid 1 1

-Apply-

26 23

2 1

2 17 24

Y

18

12 Z

25

X 16


Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within a solid that is defined by Surfaces 1 and 2 by using the Solid select menu icons listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 10

9

2

7

Extract

Surface ID List

8

3

Option: Parametric

5

Surface Plane ◆ ◆ Constant u Plane ◆ ◆ Constant v Plane ◆ Constant w Plane

1 Y

6

1 X

Z

4


1.0 0.75

After:

w Parametric Value

10

Auto Execute Solid List

9

2

7

Construct 2SurfaceSolid (Eva 8 14

-Apply5 11 1 Y

Solid Select Menu Icons

Z

13

3 6

1

12

X 4

2


Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them on a specified solid face. One surface is extracted from each solid face. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Extract

Surface ID List


1

Option:

Face

Auto Execute Face List

-Apply-


Specify in Face List, the solid faces to create surfaces on, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 10.2 11.1); or by cursor selecting the faces.

☞

More Help:



Surface Extract Method With the Face Option Example Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 using the Create/Extract/Face option. The surface is created on two faces of Solid 10. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 20 2 1

19

Extract

21

3

22

Surface ID List 1

2

Option:

Face

Auto Execute

17

Y

Face List Solid 1.1 1.2

18

12 Z

X 16

-Apply-

After: 20 12 19 1

1

2

23

21

22 3 1 2

17

Y Z

18

12 X 16

2


Creating Fillet Surfaces The Fillet method creates a parametric bi-cubic surface between two existing surfaces or solid faces. The existing surfaces or faces do not need to intersect. If they do intersect, the edges of the surfaces or faces must be aligned, and they must intersect so that a nondegenerate fillet can be created. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Fillet

Surface ID List


1

Fillet Parameters Fillet Radius 1 Fillet Radius 2 Fillet Tolerance 0.005

Fillet Radius 1 is the fillet radius. This is either a constant fillet radius (if Fillet Radius 2 is left blank) or part of a varying radius. Only one radius value is allowed for all pairs of surfaces or faces specified in Surface/Point 1 and 2 List. Fillet Radius 2 is optional. If a value is entered, MSC.Patran will create a fillet with a varying radius, with the first edge beginning at Radius 1 and gradually varying to Radius 2 at the opposite edge. Fillet Tolerance is used to control the accuracy of the fillet when MSC.Patran subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position. Decreasing the tolerance helps when the fillet is very small compared to the geometry model. Default is .005.

Trim Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface/Point 1 List

Surface/Point 2 List

Surface 2

Points 1 and 2 Radius 1

Fillet Patch

-Apply-

Area To Be Trimmed

Surface 1 Radius 2


Fillet Radius 1 Fillet Radius 2 Fillet Tolerance 0.005

Trim Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface/Point 1 List


-Apply-

If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original surfaces specified in the Surface/Point 1 and 2 listboxes. Each surface is trimmed from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original surface. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Surface/Point 1 List and Surface/Point 2 List, the existing pair of surfaces or faces, along with their corner points that the fillet will be created between. For each listbox, the Surface Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate surfaces or faces, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate corner point locations provided on the Point Select menu.

Surface 2

Points 1 and 2 Radius 1

Fillet Patch Area To Be Trimmed

Surface 1 Radius 2

☞

More Help:


2


Surface Fillet Method Example Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 1 and 3 with the fillet’s endpoints, Points 2 and 10, cursor selected. Surface 4 has a varying fillet radius of 0.25 to 0.5. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

2

Fillet

Surface ID List

3

4

1

Fillet Parameters Fillet Radius 1

1 10

0.25

3 4

Y

Fillet Radius 2 0.5

X

Z

9

Fillet Tolerance 0.005

Trim Original Surfaces

After:

Auto Execute Surface/Point 1 List

15

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu


1

1

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu 14

-Apply-

1

11 4

10 3 Y

12 Z

X

9


Surface Fillet Method Example Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 3 and 4 with the fillet’s endpoints, Points 19 and 25, cursor selected. Surface 5 has a constant fillet radius of 0.75. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 24

Fillet 4

20

Surface ID List

25

5 16

Fillet Parameters Fillet Radius 1

18

23 5

0.75 3

Y

Fillet Radius 2

6 17

Z

X

Fillet Tolerance

19

0.005

Trim Original Surfaces

After: 30

Auto Execute Surface/Point 1 List Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

28

4


31

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

-Apply-

27

5

18 3

Y 6 Z

26

X 19

29

2


Matching Adjacent Surfaces The Match method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces with common boundaries (or matched edges) from a pair of topologically incongruent surfaces or solid faces that have two consecutive common vertices but unmatched edges. The surface pair need not have matching parametric orientations. MSC.Patran requires geometry to be topologically congruent for IsoMesh and Paver to create coincident nodes at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12) for more information. You can also match incongruent surfaces with the Edit action’s Edge Match method. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481) for more information. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Match


Surface ID List If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface 1 and 2 List from the database.

1

Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute


Surface 1 List

Surface 2 List

-Apply-

Specify in Surface 1 List, the surface or face to which the new surface will be matched. Specify in Surface 2 List, the surface or face to match with Surface 1. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them using the Surface Select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling


Surface Match Method Example Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Match method that is topologically congruent with Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 3 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Match

Before:

13

14

18

Surface ID List 4

2

3


12

15

17

14

18

Y

Surface 1 List

Z

Surface 2

X


-Apply-

After:

13

2

12

4

15 Y Z

X

17

2


Creating Constant Offset Surface This form is used to create a constant offset surface. Geometry Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Offset

Surface ID List 1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the constant offset value of the surface.

Offset Parameters

Specify the number of copies of the offset surface to create using the Repeat Count parameter.

Constant Offset Value 1.0

Repeat Count 1

Do not use a guiding surface Auto Execute Surface List

Draw Direction Vector

By default, Do not use a guiding surface is set to use the surface normal or the direction vector, if reversed from the surface normal for the offset direction. If this toggle is changed to Use first surface as guiding surface, then the offset direction for all surfaces to be created will the same as the first surface in the Surface List. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface used to create an offset surface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 10 11. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -Apply-

Draws the direction vector of the surface to create the offset surface from. Reverses the direction vector of the surface to create the offset surface from.

☞

More Help:



Creating Constant Offset Surface Example Create surfaces 2 and 3 by offsetting from surface 1, a distance of 0.5 with a repeat count of 2 and reversing the direction vector of surface 1. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Before:

Surface

Method:

Offset

Surface ID List 1

2

Offset Parameters Constant Offset Value 0.5

Repeat Count 2

Y

Do not use a guiding surface Auto Execute Surface List

Z

X

After:

Surface 1

Draw Direction Vector 3

Reverse Direction

2

Reset Graphics

1

-Apply-

Y X

Z

2


Creating Ruled Surfaces The Ruled method creates ruled surfaces between a pair of curves or edges. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Ruled

Surface ID List 1


Surface Parameterization ◆ ◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ Equal Parametric Values

Avoid Bow Tie Surface Auto Execute Ruling Curve 1 List

Ruling Curve 2 List

-Apply-

If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will define the ruled surface’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 parametric directions based on the arc length parameterizations of the ξ 1 direction for the curves or edges in Curve 1 List, and the ξ 2 direction for the curves or edges in Curve 2 List. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, the curves or edges in Curve 1 List define the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the curves or edges in Curve 2 List define the surface’s ξ 2 direction. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the curve and surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.




If Avoid Bow Tie Surface is ON, MSC.Patran will optimize the ruled surface, so that the two curves ξ 1 directions do not need to be aligned or be in the same direction. The resulting ruled surface will not be twisted or bow tied. This is the default setting. If Allow Bow Tie Surface is ON, if the ξ 1 direction of the curves or edges in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List are not aligned, a bow tie ruled surface will be created.

Ruling Curve 2 List

-Apply-

Specify in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List, the two curves or edges to create the ruled surface between. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1); or cursor select them using the Curve Select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

2


Surface Ruled Method Example Creates Surface 1 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curves 1 and 2. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create 6

Object:

Surface

Method:

2

Ruled 5

Surface ID List 1

Surface Parameterization ◆ ◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ Equal Parametric Values 1 Y Z

X

1 4


After:

Curve 1 6

Ruling Curve 2 List 2

Curve 2 5

-Apply-

1

1

Y Z

X

1 4


Surface Ruled Method Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curve 5 and an edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Notice that since Equal Parametric Values was pressed in, Surface 3’s parametric ξ 1 direction is the same as for Curve 5. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 18

Ruled

19

Surface ID List

2

3

2 17 1

Surface Parameterization ◆ ◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ Equal Parametric Values

1 12 Y Z

20

5 X 16


After:

Curve 5 18

Ruling Curve 2 List Surface 2.4 19

-Apply2 2 17 1 1 21 12

3

Y


Z

20

5 X 16

2


Creating Trimmed Surfaces The Trimmed method creates a trimmed surface. You must first create at least one chained curve for the surface’s outer loop or boundary by using the Create/ Curve/Chain form before using this form, or by bringing up the Auto Chain form from within this form. (Note that an outer loop must be specified, and the inner loop being specified is not necessary.) Trimmed surfaces can be meshed by Paver. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method: Trimmed


Surface ID List

Options for creating trimmed surfaces:

1

1. Surface: Creates a trimmed surface that has the same curvature as a specified parent surface. The parent surface must be simply trimmed (default color is green). 2. Planar: Creates a flat or planar trimmed surface. 3. Composite: Combines surfaces into a single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a specified length, and are not required to be topologically congruent.

Option: Surface Auto Chain...

Use All Edge Vertices Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List

Delete Inner Loops Inner Loop List

Delete Constituent Surface Surface List

-Apply-

Use the Auto Chain feature to chain existing curves or surface edges into closed loops, defining the trim region. If ON, MSC.Patran will determine the new trimmed surface’s edge and vertex locations directly from the loop or chained curve’s definition. That is, the edges and vertices are defined by the links in the chained curve. If OFF, MSC.Patran will determine the edge and vertex locations of the new trimmed surface by the slope discontinuities in the chain.


Specify in Outer Loop List, one chained curve to represent the outer boundary of the trimmed surface either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Curve 10), or by cursor selecting the curve.

Delete Outer Loop

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curves specified in the Outer Loop List listbox.

Outer Loop List

Delete Inner Loops

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curve specified in Inner Loop List.

Inner Loop List

Delete Constituent Surface

Specify in Inner Loop List, one or more optional chained curves to represent holes or cutouts in the trimmed surface, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Curve 10 12), or by cursor selecting the curves.

Surface List

-Apply-

Specify in Surface List, the surfaces that will be the parent surface whose curvature will be used by the trimmed surface, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard, or by cursor selecting the surface. The parent surface must be simply trimmed (default color is green). Note: A Surface List is not required for the Planar option.

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface List below from the database.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Creating Chained Curves (p. 131) • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

2


Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Surface option which is created from chained Curve 22 for the outer loop, chained Curve 21 for the inner loop and Surface 2 for the parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are pressed in and Curves 21 and 22 and Surface 2 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Before:

16

Method: Trimmed 19

Surface ID List

2

20

18

3 21

22 12

Option: Surface Auto Chain... Use All Edge Vertices

Y X

17

Z

Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List Curve 22

Delete Inner Loops

After:

Inner Loop List

16

Curve 21

23

Delete Constituent Surface 20


19 30 29

24

26 28

-Apply21 Y X

Z

25

3 27

22 12


Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Planar option which is created from chained Curve 14 for the outer loop and chained Curve 13 for the inner loop. Notice that Delete Outer Loop and Delete Inner Loop are pressed in and Curves 13 and 14 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Before: 14

Method: Trimmed Surface ID List 2 13

12

Option: Planar Auto Chain.. . Use All Edge Vertices Delete Outer Loop

Y Z

X 16

Outer Loop List Curve 14

Delete Inner Loops

After: 18

17

Inner Loop List Curve 13

22

-Apply21

2

12

20 Y Z

X 19

16

2


Auto Chain Subordinate Form The Auto Chain form provides a more interactive, user-controllable way of creating Chain Curves. A start curve is selected for the chain and then during the creation of the chain, if necessary, the user will be prompted to make decisions on how to proceed by selecting the appropriate buttons. Toggles are provided for additional control of the chain curve creation. This subordinate form is accessible from either the Create/Curve/Chain or the Create/Surface/Trimmed forms. If ON, the start point of the start curve can be switched from one end of the curve to the other. Auto Execute must be OFF. A start curve should be selected and then toggle ON and OFF to see a white marker designating the start point.

Auto Chain Auto Execute Select a Start Curve

Specify End Point Switch Start Point Pause At Every Point Current Group Only Free Edges Only Highlight Chain Creation Delete Constituent Curves

Specify the existing curve or edge to use for the start curve of a chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. A Curve/Edge Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curve or edge.

If ON, a Point select box allows to specify an end point for the chain curve. A chain curve will be created, if it reaches the end point. If OFF, the default end point is the start point.

If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable for creating a chain. If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable for creating a chain. If ON, after chain completes, the constituent curves used to create the chain will be deleted from the database.

If ON, the created chain curve will be highlighted. Either changing the value to OFF or picking another start curve will erase the highlight. If ON, the OK button must be selected for each constituent curve that is identified as the next curve in the chain. If OFF, it will automatically continue as.far as possible before user-intervention is necessary.


Choose Curve to Continue

Next

OK

Previous

Quit

Backup

Stop

Delete

Break

-Apply-

Cancel

Next:

Used to update the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox when multiple choices are possible, i.e. a branch.

Previous: Used to update "Choose Curve to

Identifies the curve which is chosen to continue the chain.

OK:

Used to finalize the selection on the curve echoed in the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox and continue the auto chain process.

Quit:

Used to end the auto chain process without attempting to creating a chain.

Used to end the auto chain process and attempt to create a chain from the constituent curves. (Only necessary when pressing the Apply button did not create a chain.)

Continue" databox when more than two curves form a branch. Use in conjunction with the Next button.

Backup:

Used to backup one curve at a time in the list of curves that have been previously selected as constituents for the resulting chain.

Stop:

Delete:

Used to delete the curve in the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox from the database.

Break: Used to break the curve in the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox.

2


Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option The Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option provides a tool for combining surfaces into a single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a specified distance, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Though the constituent surfaces are used for all evaluations without any approximation, the resulting composite surface is seen as a single trimmed surface by all operations that reference it, such as the Paver. Shadow Surface Method. The method used to create a composite trimmed surface is called a Shadow Surface Method. The best way to describe a shadow surface is to use a real life analogy. Consider a cloud in the sky to be a shadow surface. Then the sun, being the light source behind the cloud, creates a shadow on the planet Earth, only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true of the shadow surface, except a view vector is used to determine the light direction. The shadow itself is called an Under Surface, whose valid region is defined by where the outlines of the shadow surface appear with respect to a given view. The Shadow Surface itself is a collection of specified surfaces, which may have gaps or overlaps of a specified distance, and may or may not be topologically congruent. It is bounded by outer and inner loops, defined as closed chains of curves or surface edges. During surface evaluations, the Under Surface is used to classify the point relative to which constituent surface (amongst the Shadow Surface) contains it. The point is mapped to the parameter space of that constituent surface, and the evaluation is done directly on that surface. Creating Composite Surfaces. The steps in creating composite surfaces are, for the most part, the same as those for creating a normal trimmed surface, with the following exceptions:

• More than one surface is specified to define the curvature (multiple parent surfaces). • A Gap Distance parameter must be specified to define the maximum length for gaps or overlaps.

• An appropriate view must be obtained, satisfying the following: • Double Intersections between the Shadow Surface and the view vector must not occur. In other words, the Shadow Surface must not wrap around on itself relative to the current view. This is because the Under Surface is flat, and there is not necessarily a one-to-one mapping from the Shadow Surface to the Under Surface. Surfaces that combine to create a cylinder, therefore, cannot be used to create a single composite surface.

• No Dead Space. Unpredictable results will occur if any portion of the Shadow Surface does not have an Under Surface counterpart. An example of dead space would be an area on the Shadow Surface which runs parallel to the view vector. Since this portion has no area with respect to its projection onto the Under Surface, it will not be represented properly in the resulting composite surface. This can cause unwanted holes or spikes in the geometry.


Shadow Plane Not Acceptable

S2 S1

Acceptable

S2 S1

2


Surface Trimmed Method - Composite Option Example Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option which is created from chained Curve 5 for the outer loop, chained Curve 4 for the inner loop and Surface 1:4 for the parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are pressed in and Curves 1 and 2 and Surfaces 1:4 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Before: 2

5

3 10 12

Method: Trimmed

11 13

4

2

1

Surface ID List 5

7

Option:Composite

1

Auto Chain...

3

4

8 6

Y

Gap Distance

Z X

0.005

Use All Edge Vertices Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List Curve 5

Delete Inner Loops

After: 2

3

5

10 12

Inner Loop List

11 13

Curve 4

5

Delete Constituent Surface Surface List Surface 1:4

-Apply-

8 1

4 Y Z X

6


Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method) The Vertex method creates four sided surfaces from four existing point locations that define the surface’s vertices or corners. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Vertex

Surface ID List 1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If ON, MSC.Patran will allow you to specify a surface or solid face in the Manifold Surface databox to manifold the new surface onto.


Auto Execute Surface Vertex 1 List

If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with the Surface Select menu.


Surface Vertex 2 List Surface Vertex 3 List

Specify in Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 Lists, the four points, vertices, nodes or other point locations that define the surface’s vertices or corners. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.1.1); or cursor select them using the Point Select menu.


-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

2


Surface Vertex Method Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12, 13, 14 and Node 1. Notice that since Manifold is not on, the Manifold Surface databox is disabled. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 1

14

Vertex

Surface ID List 2


Auto Execute

Y 13

12


Z

X

Point 12

Surface Vertex 2 List Point 13

After:

Surface Vertex 3 List 15

Point 14

14

Surface Vertex 4 List Node 1

-Apply-

2

Y 13

12 Z

X


Extruding Surfaces and Solids The Extrude method creates surfaces or solids by moving a curve or edge, or a surface or solid face, respectively, through space along a defined axis with the option of scaling and rotating simultaneously. This method is convenient for adding depth to a cross section, or for more complex constructions that require the full capabilities of this form. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Method:

Set to either: Surface or Solid.

Extrude

ID List 1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.


Origin of Scale and Rotate [0 0 0]

Translation Vector <1 0 0>

Sweep Parameters Scale Factor 1.0

Angle 0.0 per

1

Auto Execute List

-Apply-

Refer. Coordinate Frame is used by the Origin of Scale and Rotate databox and the Translation Vector databox to express the coordinates of the origin and vector within a specific coordinate frame. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0. Enter in Origin of Scale and Rotate, the point location of the origin of scaling and rotation. Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]); or use the Point Select menu to cursor define alternate point locations. Enter in Translation Vector, a vector definition defining the direction and distance that the curve or surface is moved through space. Either enter the coordinate values (example: <10 10 1>); or use the Vector Select menu to cursor define the translation vector.

2



Angle 0.0 per 1

Enter in Scale Factor, a scaling factor value to be applied in the two or three directions of the surface or solid, respectively. A scale factor of one means no scaling will take place. Enter in Angle, an optional angle value in degrees to rotate the curve or surface about the translation vector. per is not active or used if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF. If ON, enter how many parametric bi-cubic surfaces per curve or how many parametric tri-cubic solids per curve to create.

Auto Execute List

-Apply-


Specify in List, the curves or edges, or surfaces or solid faces that you want to extrude to create the surfaces or solids, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)


Surface Extrude Method Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from Curve 5. The surface is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction.

Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

Extrude

Surface ID List 1 12


5

Y

Origin of Scale and Rotate

13

[0 0 0]

Translation Vector

X

Z

<1 0 0>

Sweep Parameters Scale Factor

After: 3

1.0

Angle

4

0.0

Surface per Curve 1

Auto Execute

1

Curve List Curve 5

-Apply-

Y 1 Z

X

5 2

2


Surface Extrude Method Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surface 1 is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction about an angle of 90 degrees and with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale and rotation is at Point 14. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

Extrude

Surface ID List 1 12


14 Y

Origin of Scale and Rotate

5

Point 14

Translation Vector

13 X

Z

<0 10 0>


After: 16

2.0

Angle 90.0

Surface per Curve 1

Auto Execute

15

Curve List

2

Curve 5

-Apply-

12

Y

14 Z

X 13


Solid Extrude Method Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from a face of Solid 1. The solid is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction, with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale is at Point 21. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Extrude

Before: 12

13

15 21

Solid ID List 2

14 1


Coord 0

Origin of Scale and Rotate Point 21



20

18Y X

Z

19

After:

2.0 22

Angle 0.0

23

25

Solids per Curve 24

1

Auto Execute 2

Surface List Solid 1.5

12

-Apply15

Y

17 Z

X

1

21 14

13

20

18 19

2


Gliding Surfaces Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option The Glide method creates biparametric surfaces by sweeping base curve along a path defined by a set of director curves or edges. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Glide

Surface ID List 1

Option:1 Director Curve Glide Input Options ◆ Fixed Glide ◆ ◆ Normal Project Glide Sweep Parameters Scale Factor 1.0

Auto Execute Director Curve List

Base Curve List

-Apply-


If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting the surface. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which basically drags the director curve along the base curve surface without rotating. Three degrees-of-freedom of motion are eliminated. Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no change will occur in the size of the director curve during the glide. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Curve List, one or more base curves or edges for surfaces. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve


Surface Glide Method - 1 Director Curve Example Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 10 for the Director Curve and Curves 11, 13 and 14 for the Base Curves. The scale is set to 1.0 and Fixed Glide is pressed in. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 16

Glide

Surface ID List

10

2

Option:1 Director Curve Glide Input Options

12

◆ Fixed Glide ◆ ◆ Normal Project Glide

11

18

13

Y

19 14

X

Z

17


After:

Auto Execute

16 20

Director Curve List

21

Curve 10

Base Curve List

10

22

2

Curve 11 13 14

3 4

-Apply12

11

18

Y

13

19 14

Z

X 17

2


Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option This option sweeps a base curve along a path defined by a pair of director curves. Automatic scaling is optional. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Glide

Surface ID List


2

Option:2 Director Curve Scale Base Curve Auto Execute Director Curve 1 List

Director Curve 2 List

Base Curve List

If this toggle is ON, the base curve will automatically be scaled to fit between the two director curves, If OFF, no scaling will occur. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Director Curve 1 List and Director Curve 2 List provide a moving local coordinate system which provides for sweeping and scaling of the base curve. The Base Curve is swept along the two director curves. It does not need to be attached to either director. A copy will be transformed into its appropriate position for exclusive used by the surface.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Surface Glide Method - 2 Director Curve Example Creates Surface 1 by using Curves 1 and 2 as the director curves and Curve 3 as the base curve to glide along. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

Glide

Surface ID List 6

2 4

1

3

1

2

5

1

3

Option:2 Director Curve Scale Base Curve Auto Execute Director Curve 1 List

Y Z X

Curve 1

Director Curve 2 List Curve 2

After:

Base Curve List Curve 3

-Apply-

6

Y Z

X

3 5 1

1

1 2

2 4

2


Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method The Normal method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces or solids which are defined by a set of base curves or surfaces, respectively, and an offset distance from those curves or surfaces in the direction of the curvature. The offset may be constant or have a varying thickness. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Method: Normal ID List

Set to either Surface or Solid. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If more than one ID is listed, the thickness of each surface or solid is based on dividing the number of surfaces or solids into the thickness value.

1

Thickness Input Options ◆ ◆ Constant Thickness

If Constant Thickness is ON, a single thickness value is entered in the Thickness databox below (not shown here) which represents a constant offset distance for the Normal.

◆ Varying Thicknesses Thickness at u=0; v=0 1.0

Thickness at u=0; v=1 1.0 per 1

If Varying Thickness is ON, you must enter two thickness values for surfaces and four thickness values for solids at the parametric ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate locations shown on the form. (The form here shows the thickness databoxes for creating a surface.)


Shown only for creating surfaces. If Frenet Frame is ON, MSC.Patran uses a Frenet Frame in which the surfaces are blended together across the contiguous edges, provided the edges have the same ξ 1 ( u ) directions. If Construction Point is ON, enter the point location in the Construction Point databox, which defines the offset or thickness direction. The direction is measured from the first point of the first curve given in Curve List, to the construction point location. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Node 100, Curve 12.1); or cursor select the point location by using the Point Select menu.

Thickness at u=0; v=0 1.0

Thickness at u=0; v=1 1.0

per

1

Construction Point Options ◆ Frenet Frame

Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. If ON, specify the number of parametric bi-cubic surfaces or parametric tri-cubic solids to create from each curve or surface specified in List below.

◆ ◆ Construction Point Construction Point

Flip Normal Auto Execute List

If ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the parametric ξ1 direction for the base curves listed in Curve List below.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to chose the Apply button to execute the form.

☞ Specify in List, the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces that you want to create surfaces or solids from, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

More Help:


2


Surface Normal Method Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Curve 5. It has a varying thickness of 0.75 at ξ 1 = 0 and x2=0 and a thickness of 2.0 at x1=0 and x2=1. Notice that the parametric direction is on. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 13

Normal 5

Surface ID List 2

Thickness Input Options ◆ ◆ Constant Thickness ◆ Varying Thicknesses 1

Thickness at u=0; v=0

Y

0.75

Thickness at u=0; v=1

Z

12

X

2.0

Surfaces per Curve 1

After:

Construction Point Options ◆ Frenet Frame ◆ ◆ Construction Point

15

Construction Point

Flip Curve Normal 2


13 5

Y

-Apply-

Z

X

11 122

14


Surface Normal Method Example Creates Surface 2 which is created from an edge of Surface 1. It has a constant thickness of 0.25 and the normal direction is defined by a construction point, Point 9. Notice that the normal direction is measured from the first vertex of the edge (Point 5) to Point 9. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Surface

Before: 9

Method: Normal Surface ID List

1

2

Thickness Input Options ◆ Constant Thickness ◆ ◆ Varying Thicknesses

1 5

2

Y

Thickness 0.25

6

Z

Surfaces per Curve

X

1

Construction Point Options ◆ ◆ Frenet Frame ◆ Construction Point

After: 9

Construction Point 2

Point 9 10

Flip Curve Normal Auto Execute Curve List

1

5

11

Surface 1.2

1 Y

6 2

Z X

3


Solid Normal Method Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Surface 1 and has a thickness of 0.5. Notice that since PATRAN 2 Convention is not pressed in, the Solids per Surface databox is disabled. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Normal

Before:

5

Solid ID List 1

1

6

1


4 Y

Thickness X

Z

0.5

Solids per Surface 1

Flip Surface Normal

After:


8

Surface 1

-Apply-

5

7

9 1 1

6

1 10 Y 4

Z

X


This example is similar to the previous example, except that the thickness is -0.5 instead of +0.5. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Normal

Before:

5

Solid ID List 1

1

6

1


4 Y

Thickness X

Z

-0.5


After: Flip Surface Normal 5

Auto Execute Surface List Surface 1

10 1

1

6

1

-Apply7

Y

Z

9

4

8 X

3


Solid Normal Method From a Face Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from a face of Solid 1 and has a thickness of 0.25. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create 22

Object:

Solid

Method:

Normal

23

Solid ID List 20

2

1

3 2 1 18

Thickness Input Options 21

◆ Constant Thickness ◆ ◆ Varying Thicknesses Y

12

Thickness 0.25

19

X

Z

17


After: Flip Surface Normal 24


1

322 2

25

Solid 1.6 2

-Apply-

23

27 3 2 18 26 11

20

21

Y 12 Z

X 17

19


Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method) The Mesh method creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh. Vertices can be defined on the surface boundary by selecting nodes in the Outer Corner Nodes or Additional Vertex Nodes listboxes. Every edge of the surface will have at least one node. If no node is selected to identify a vertex, then one will be selected automatically. The nodes entered in the Outer Corner Node listbox will define the parametrization of the surface and will also be a vertex. If no nodes are selected, 4 appropriate nodes will be selected automatically. Also the 4 nodes selected should be on the outer loop. Additional vertices can be defined by selecting nodes in the Additional Vertex Nodes listbox. The longest free edge loop will be the outer loop of the surface. The holes inside the mesh can be preserved or closed by invoking the options in the Inner Loop Options pull-down menu. When few of the inner holes need to be preserved Inner Loop Options is set to Select. Identify the holes by selecting at least 1 node on the hole. If selected, nodes on the outer loop and those not on the free boundary, will be ignored. The parametrization of the surface can also be improved by setting Surface Creation Methods to Better Parametrization. However, if speed were important and the mesh used to create the surface is of poor quality, selecting the Fast option under the Surface Creation Methods pulldown menu would create a better surface. Tessellated Surface is a representation of the underlying mesh that is used to create it. Therefore the surface is piecewise planar and the normals are not continuous. The surface is primarily generated to facilitate the meshing operation on complex surface models. Though these surfaces support most of the geometry operations, it has limitations due to the nature of the surface. To create a tessellated surface the mesh should have the following characteristics:

• Congruent 2-D elements • Should be one connected set of elements • No more than 2 elements should share the same 2 nodes • The outer or inner loop should not intersect.

3


Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form Figure 4-2 Geometry Create

Action:

Object: Surface Mesh

Method:

Surface ID List 9

Delete Original Elements

If toggled ON, the elements selected will be deleted when the surface is created successfully.

Element List Elm 1:322 364:445 Congruent element list that defines the surface.

Outer Corner Nodes 1 Node 292

2 Node 288

3 Node 273

4 Node 253

Select four corner nodes that define the four vertices of the resulting green surface or the parent surface of a trimmed surface. If any of the boxes are left empty, one will be selected automatically.

If there are more than four vertices for the surface, the additional nodes can be listed in the Additional Vertex Nodes listbox.

Additional Vertex Nodes Node 50 34 303

Inner Loop Options:

By setting Inner Loop Options to All, None or Select, the holes in the resulting surface can be defined.

All

Surface Creation Methods Fast

Note: When the Inner Loop Options is set to Select, a node listbox opens. Here the holes to be preserved can be identified by the nodes on its edge. Any nodes not on the hole edge or on the outer boundary will be ignored.

-Apply-

By selecting the surface creation option, emphasis can be placed on parametrization or speed.


Creating Midsurfaces Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Automatic Method. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Create Surface

Method: Midsurface


Surface ID List Specify the midsurface option:

1

1. Automatic 2. Manual

Max. Thickness

Specify the maximum distance the solid face pairs can be apart in order to calculate a midsurface between (wall thickness)

0.01


-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the solid(s) to create a midsurface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solid.

☞

More Help:


3


Create Midsurface Automatic Example Create surfaces 1t6 by automatically computing the midsurfaces of solid 1 where the solid wall thickness is less than 8.1. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Surface

Method: Midsurface Surface ID List 1

1

Max. Thickness 8.1

Auto Execute Z

Solid List

Y X

Solid 1

-Apply-

After:

5

3 1 4 1 2

Z Y X

6


Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Manual Method. The resulting midsurface will be trimmed to the domain of the parent surface pairs. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Create Surface

Method: Midsurface


Surface ID List

Specify the midsurface option:

1

1. Automatic 2. Manual

Auto Execute First Surface Set

Offset Surface Set

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the first surface set of the pair to create a midsurface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1, Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the offset surface set of the pair to create a midsurface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 2, Solid 1.2. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface.

☞

More Help:


3


Create Midsurface Manual Example Create surfaces 1t3 by manually selecting solid faces Solid 1.5 and Solid 1.9, Solid 1.4 and Solid 1.8, Solid 1.7 and Solid 1.10 as face pairs to create the midsurfaces from. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Surface

Method: Midsurface Surface ID List 1 1

Auto Execute Solid Face List Solid 1.5 1.4 1.7 Y

Offset Solid Face List Solid 1.9 1.8 1.10

-Apply-

X

Z

After:

1 1

2

Y Z

X

3


Creating Solid Primitives Creating a Solid Block This form is used to create a solid block with user input a point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created block as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Specify the Solid Primitive type to create: 1. Block 2. Cylinder 3. Cone 4. Sphere 5. Torus

Solid ID List 1

Block Parameters

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the length, width, and height of the block.

X Length List 1.0

Y Length List 1.0

Z Length List 1.0

Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

Auto Execute Base Origin Point List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created block. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the block. Default is the global coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the base origin point of the block. Under The Refer. Coordinate Frame, the created block will start at this location extending length in x-axis, width in y-axis, and height in z-axis. If the base origin point is an [x,y,z] definition, the origin of the block will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.

☞

More Help:


3


Creates solid blocks 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] and [2 0 0] with parameters of X=1.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 and X=2.0, Y=2.0, Z=2.0 respectively. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List 1

Block Parameters X Length List 1.0 2.0 Y

Y Length List X

Z

1.0 2.0

Z Length List

After:

1.0 2.0


Auto Execute Base Origin Point List [0 0 0] [2 0 0] Y

-ApplyZ

X


Creates solid block 1 at [-1 .5 .5] with parameters of X=5.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Before:


Create Solid

Method: Primitive

1

Solid ID List 2

Block Parameters X Length List 5.0 Y

Y Length List 1.0

X

Z

Z Length List

After:

1.0


Auto Execute Base Origin Point List Boolean Operation [-1 .5 .5] Geometry -Apply-

Y

Target Solid List

Z

Solid 1

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK

Cancel

X

3


Creating Solid Cylinder This form is used to create a solid cylinder with user input a point, height, radius, optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cylinder as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive


Solid ID List 1

Cylinder Parameters

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Height List

Specify the height, radius, and optional thickness which is used to shell the cylinder.

1.0

Default = 0.0 which designates no shelling.

Radius List 1.0

[Thickness List] 0.0


Auto Execute Base Center Point List [0 0 0]

Axis List

If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created cylinder. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the cylinder. Default is the global coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the base center point and the axis of the cylinder. If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the cylinder will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cylinder axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

Coord 0.3

☞ -Apply-

More Help:



Creates solid cylinder 1 at point 1with parameters of Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, along X axis. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List 1

1

Cylinder Parameters Height List 3.0 Y

Radius List 0.25

X

Z

[Thickness List]

After:

0.0


Auto Execute Base Center Point List Point 1

Axis List Y

Coord 0.1 Z

-Apply-

X

3


Creates Solid Cylinder 1 at point 1 with parameters Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, a wall thickness = 0.125 along X axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Before:

Geometry Action:

Create 8

Object:

Solid

Method: Primitive

9 5 1 4

Solid ID List 2

Cylinder Parameters 6

Height List

3

3.0 Y

Radius List

2 X

Z

0.25

[Thickness List]

After:

0.125

Modify Solid 8

Boolean Operation...

9

5


4

Coord 0

Auto Execute Base Center Point ListBoolean Operation Geometry point 1

3 2

Axis List Y

Coord 0.1

Target Solid List

Z

X

Solid 1

-ApplyUpdate Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK

Cancel


Creating Solid Sphere This form is used to create a solid sphere with user input a point, radius, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created sphere as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive


Solid ID List 1

Sphere Parameters

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the radius of the sphere

Radius List 1.0



If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created sphere. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the sphere. Default is the global coord 0.


Axis List

Specify the center point and the axis of the sphere.

Coord 0.3

If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the sphere will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the sphere axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:


3


Creates Solid Sphere 1 at [0 0 0] with a Radius of 1.0 along the Z axis. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List 1

Sphere Parameters Radius List 1.0 Y

Modify Solid

X

Z

Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame

After:

Coord 0


Axis List Coord 0.3

-ApplyY Z

X


Creates Solid Sphere 1 at point 1with a Radius of 0.5 along the Y axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Before:


Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List 2

Sphere Parameters Radius List 0.5 Y

Modify Solid

X

Z

Boolean Operation...

After:


Auto Execute Center Point List Point 1

Axis List Coord 0.2

-Apply-

Boolean Operation Geometry Y

Target Solid List

Z

Solid 1


Cancel

X

3


Creating Solid Cone This form is used to create a solid cone with user input a point, base radius, top radius, height, optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cone as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive


Solid ID List 1

Cone Parameters Height List 1.0

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the height, top radius, bottom radius, and optional thickness. The optional thickness is used to create a hollow cone. Default = 0.0 which designates no hollowing.

Base Radius List 1.0

Top Radius List 0.5

[Thickness List] 0.0


If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created cone. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the cone. Default is the global coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the base center point and the axis of the cone.

Auto Execute Base Center Point List [0 0 0]

If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the cone will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cone axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

Axis List Coord 0.3

☞ -Apply-

More Help:



Creates Solid Cone 1 at [0 0 0] and Cone 2 at [3 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Height=2.0, Base Radius=1.0, Top Radius=0.5 and Thickness for Cone 1=0.0 and Thickness for Cone 2=0.125 Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List 1

Cone Parameters Height List 2.0 Y

Base Radius List X

Z

1.0

Top Radius List

After:

0.5

[Thickness List] 0.0 0.125


Auto Execute Base Center Point List Y [0 0 0] [3 0 0] Z

Axis List Coord 0.3

-Apply-

X

3


Creates Solid Cones 1 and 2 at [.5 1 .5] along the Y axis with parameters Height=-5.0, Base Radius=0.25, Top Radius=0.0625 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1 and 2.

Before:


Create Solid

Method: Primitive

1

Solid ID List 1

Cone Parameters Height List

2

2.0 Y

Base Radius List X

Z

1.0

Top Radius List

After:

0.5

[Thickness List] 0.0 0.125


Boolean Operation Geometry

Auto Execute Base Center Point List

Y

[0 0 0] [3 0 0]

Axis List

Target Solid List

Coord 0.3

Solid 1 2

-Apply-

Z

X


Cancel


Creating Solid Torus This form is used to create a solid torus with user input a point, major radius, minor radius, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created torus as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive


Solid ID List


1

Torus Parameters

Specify the major radius and minor radius.

Major Radius List 1.0

Minor Radius List 0.5

Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame

If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created torus. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the torus. Default is the global coord 0.

Coord 0


By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the center point and the axis of the torus. If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the torus will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the torus axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

Axis List Coord 0.3

-Apply-

☞

More Help:


3


Creates Solid Torus 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.5 and Torus 1 along the X axis and Torus 2 along the Y axis. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List 1

Torus Parameters Major Radius List 1.0 Y

Minor Radius List X

Z

0.5

Modify Solid

After:

Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0


Axis List Coord 0.1 0.2

Y

-ApplyZ

X


Creates Solid Torus 1 at [0 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.25 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1.

Before:


Create Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List 2

Torus Parameters Major Radius List 1.0 Y

Minor Radius List 0.25

X

Z

Modify Solid

After:

Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0


Axis List


Coord 0.3

Y

-ApplyTarget Solid List Solid 1

Z


Cancel

X

3


Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation on an existing solid during the creation of a new primitive solid. This is a child form of the parent Create,Solid,Primitive form.


Specify the boolean operation type: 1. Add 2. Subtract 3. Intersect

Target Solid List


Cancel

Specify the solid to perform a boolean operation on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids. This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after a boolean operation. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the target solid.


Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method) Creating Solids from Two Surfaces The Surface method with the 2 Surface option, creates solids between two surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface

Solid ID List


1

Option: 2 Surface Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Align Orientations

Deactivated and not used for the 2 Surface option. If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. On the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric you can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by turning the Parametric Direction toggle ON.

Auto Execute Starting Surface List

Ending Surface List

Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the surfaces to be created, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor define the surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

-Apply-

☞

Topology (p. 10) Connectivity (p. 15) Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

• • • • • By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

More Help:

3


Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surfaces 2 and 3. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create

Object:

7 10

Solid

Method:

11

6

Surface 3

Solid ID List 1

9

2

12

Option: 2 Surface Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform

Y Z

8

X

Auto Align Orientations

5


After:

Surface 2 7

Ending Surface List

10 11

Surface 3

6

3

-Apply-

1 9

2

12

Y Z

8

X 5


Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6, using the Surface select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface

22

6 23

Solid ID List 20

1

18

5

Option: 2 Surface

21

Parameterization Method

2

◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Align Orientations

12

19

Y X

Z

17


After:

Surface 2 22

Ending Surface List

6

Construct2CurvesSurface(Eval 23

-Apply20

5

1 18 21 2

12


Z

Y X 17

19

3


Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method) The Surface method with the 3 Surface option creates solids that pass through three existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface

Solid ID List 1

Option: 3 Surface Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute Starting Surface List

Middle Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the solid’s starting, middle and ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized. If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.


Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute Starting Surface List

Middle Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-


Specify in Starting, Middle and Ending Surface Lists, the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor defining the surface locations using the Surface Select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

3


Solid Surface Method With 3 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/3 Surface option. The solid is created between a face of Solid 1, Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 by using the Surface select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface

Before: 6

22

23

5

20

21 18 2

Solid ID List

19

12 17

2

Option: 3 Surface

31 30


27 26 1

Y

28


29

X

Z

24 25

Auto Execute Starting Surface List Solid 1.2

After: 22

Middle Surface List 20

Surface 2

6 23

5 21

Ending Surface List

18 2

Construct2CurveSurface(Eval

19

12 17

-Apply-

31 30 27 26 1

Y


28 Z

29

X 24 25


Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method) The Surface method using the 4 Surface option creates solids that pass through four existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface

Solid ID List


1

Option: 4 Surface Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Align Orientations

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the solid’s starting, second, third and ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.


Second Surface List

Third Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-

If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

3


Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute Starting Surface List


Second Surface List

Third Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-

Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or by cursor defining the surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

☞

More Help:

Topology (p. 10) Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

• • • •


Solid Surface Method With 4 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/4 Surface option. The solid is created between a face of Solid 1, Surface 2, a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 and Surface 3. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface

Before: 35 3 33

32

34

6

22

Solid ID List

21

2

2 12

Option: 4 Surface Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform

23

5

20

18

19

17 31

27

30

26

Y

1 28


X

Z

24

25


29

After:

Solid 1.2

Second Surface List

35 3 33

32

Surface 2

34

Third Surface List 22

Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 20

Ending Surface List

5

12

18

31 Y

30

26 1 28

Z

19

17

-Apply27

23

2 21 2

Surface 3

6

X

24

25

29

3


Creating Solids with the N Surface Option The Surface method using the N-Surfaces option creates solids that pass through any number of existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface


Solid ID List 1

Option: N-Surfaces Parameterization Method ◆ ◆ Chord Length ◆ Uniform Auto Align Orientations Surface List

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surfaces specified in Surface List. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.

If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

-ApplySpecify in Surface List, two or more surfaces or faces that the solid will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Solid Surface Method with N-Surfaces Option Example Creates Solid1 using the Create/Surface/N-Surfaces option. The solid is created between Surfaces 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

Before: Geometry Action:

Create

42 41 39

Object:

Solid

Method:

Surface

38 36 10

35

Solid ID List

9

1 43

Option:N-Surfaces

40

28 Y

20

2 34

16

X

14

13 7 37

24


33

8 32

Z

15

12

Auto Align Orientations Surface List

After:

Surface 2 7:10

-Apply-

42 41 39 38 36 10

35 9 33

1 8 32 43 40

28 Y

20 X

14

13 7 37

24

2 34

16

Z 12

15

3


Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid The B-rep method creates boundary represented solids by specifying a list of surfaces or solid faces that form a closed topologically congruent volume. B-rep solids can only be meshed with MSC.Patran’s TetMesh. For more information, see Gliding Solids (p. 348). Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

B-rep

Solid ID List 1

Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List

-Apply-

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces from the database that are specified in Surface List. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify in Surface List, a set of surfaces or solid faces that form a closed volume. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu that appears.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • B-rep Solid (p. 24) • Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)


Solid B-rep Method Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Solid/B-rep method which is created from Surfaces 2, 3, 4, and 8 through 14. Notice that since Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in, the surfaces are deleted. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 4 3

8

B-rep

Solid ID List

2

14 9

1

Delete Original Surfaces

11

13 10

Auto Execute Surface List Y Surface 2 3 4 8:14

12 X

Z

-Apply-

After:

1

Y Z

X

3


Creating a Decomposed Solid The Decompose method creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex locations on each face and then a solid is created from the two decomposed faces. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method: Decompose Solid ID List 2


Solid Faces ◆ Face 1 ◆ ◆ Face 2

The switch to select/show the two Solid Faces.

Solid Face 1

Auto Execute

Enter the first solid face to decompose either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Solid 1.1); or by cursor selecting the solid face.

Face Vertex 1 List Face Vertex 2 List Face Vertex 3 List Face Vertex 4 List

-Apply-

Enter in the Face Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices that will define the surface from which the new solid will be created from. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select the vertices.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)


Solid Decompose Method with Face 1 Option Example Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid 1.5. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Step 1:

2

Method: Decompose

3

6

Solid ID List

7

2

1

Solid Faces ◆ Face 1 ◆ ◆ Face 2 Solid Face 1 Solid 1.6

Auto Execute Face Vertex 1 List 1.6(u0.250000)(v0.750000)

Face Vertex 2 List 1.6(u0.788091)(v0.706851)



-Apply-

1

Y Z

4

5 X

8

3


Solid Decompose Method with Face 2 Option Example Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid 1.6. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Step 2:

2

Method: Decompose

3

6

Solid ID List

7

2

1

Solid Faces ◆ Face 1 ◆ ◆ Face 2 Solid Face 2

1

Y

4

5 X

Z

8

Solid 1.5

Auto Execute Face Vertex 1 List

Final Step:

1.5(u0.314087)(v0.722847)

Face Vertex 2 List

2

1.5(u0.707491)(v0.666261)

Face Vertex 3 List

6

1.5(u0.658263)(v0.286671)

Face Vertex 4 List

3

13 9

1.5(u0.291373)(v0.250680)

2

7 12 14

16 15

1 10

-Apply-

Y Z

5 X

4

11 8


Creating Solids from Faces The Face method creates a solid from five or six surfaces or solid faces which define the solid’s exterior faces. The surfaces or faces can be in any order and they can have any parametric orientation, but they must define a valid exterior of a solid. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:


Face

Solid ID List 1

Option: 6 Face Auto Execute Solid Face 1 List

Solid Face 2 List

Solid Face 3 List

Set this option to 5 Face or 6 Face. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify in the Solid Face Lists, the list of surfaces or solid faces that the solid will be created from. Depending if the form is set to the 5 Face or 6 Face option, you will see five or six Solid Face List boxes. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them using the Surface Select menu.

Solid Face 4 List

Solid Face 5 List

☞ Solid Face 6 List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

3


Solid Face Method With 6 Faces Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 2 through 7. The option is set to 6 Face. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Before:

5

Method:

Face

Solid ID List 4

1

7 6

Option: 6 Face

3

Auto Execute Solid Face 1 List

Y

2

Surface 2

Solid Face 2 List

X

Z

Surface 6

Solid Face 3 List

After:

Surface 4

Solid Face 4 List Surface 5


Solid Face 6 List 1

Surface 3

-ApplyY Z

X


Solid Face Method With 5 Faces Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 1 through 5. The option is set to 5 Face. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 3

Face

5

1

Solid ID List

3

4

1 5

Option: 5 Face Y

Auto Execute Solid Face 1 List

2

2

1

Z

6

4 X

Surface 1


Solid Face 3 List

After:

Surface 2 3

Solid Face 4 List Surface 4 5


1 2

1

-ApplyY Z

4 X

6

3


Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method) The Vertex method creates parametric tri-cubic solids by specifying a list of eight point locations that represent the eight vertices of the new solid. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Vertex


Solid ID List 1

Auto Execute Solid Vertex 1 List


Solid Vertex 2 List

Solid Vertex 3 List

Solid Vertex 4 List

Specify in Solid Vertex 1-8 Lists, the list of points, vertices, nodes or other point locations that the solid will be created from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or cursor select them using the Point Select menu.

Solid Vertex 5 List

Solid Vertex 6 List

Solid Vertex 7 List

Solid Vertex 8 List

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)


Solid Vertex Method Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12 through 15 and Nodes 34, 44, 254 and 264. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Vertex

14

13

15

12

Solid ID List 2

Auto Execute Solid Vertex 1 List Point 12

Solid Vertex 2 List

Y

Point 13

Solid Vertex 3 List

X

Z

Point 14

Solid Vertex 4 List

After:

Point 15

Node 34

14

13

Solid Vertex 5 List

15

12

Solid Vertex 6 List 1

Node 44

19

Solid Vertex 7 List 16

Node 254

18

Solid Vertex 8 List Node 264

17 Y

-Apply-

Z

X

3


Gliding Solids The Glide method creates triparametric solids by sweeping a base surface curve along a path defined by a set of director curves or edges. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Glide

Solid ID List


1

Glide Input Options ◆ Normal Project Glide ◆ ◆ Fixed Glide

If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting the solid. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which basically drags the director curve along the base curve or base surface without rotating. Three degrees-of -freedom of motion are eliminated.


Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no change will occur in the size of the director curve during the glide.

Auto Execute Director Curve List

Base Surface List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Surface List, a base surface or face for the Glide method for solids. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

☞

More Help:



Solid Glide Method Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 5 for the Director Curve and Surface 2 for the Base Surface. The scale is set to 0.25 and Fixed Glide is pressed in. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Solid

Method:

Glide

Before:

16 17 2

Solid ID List 1

12 18

Glide Input Options

5

◆ ◆ Normal Project Glide ◆ Fixed Glide Sweep Parameters

15

Z Y

X

Scale Factor 0.25

Auto Execute

After:

Director Curve List Curve 5 16

Base Surface List 17

Surface 2

2 12

-Apply18

1 5 20 21

Z Y

X

19 15

3


4.3

Creating Coordinate Frames Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method The 3Point method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying three point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. For more information, see Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63). Geometry Action: Object:

Create Coord

Method: 3Point Coord ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

Auto Execute Origin

Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0] Point on Axis 3 [0 0 1] Point on Plane 1-3

Specify three point locations for: 1 ) the new coordinate frame’s origin; 2) a point on the third axis; and 3) a point on the plane formed by the coordinate frame’s first and third axes. Either enter the point locations’ coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor select the point locations using the Point Select menu.

[1 0 0]

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/3Point method. Its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a point on its Z axis is at [0,0,1]; and a point on the R-Z plane is at [0,0,1]. The coordinate values are expressed within the global coordinate frame, Coord 0. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create

Object:

Coord

Method: 3Point Coord ID List 100

Type:

2

Cylindrical

Refer. Coordinate Frame Y

Coord 0

Z

Auto Execute

X

Origin [0 0 0]

Point on Axis 3

After:

[0 0 1]

Point on Plane 1-3 [1 0 0]

T

-Apply2

Y Z

X

Z R 100

3


Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200. Its origin is located at Point 8; a point on its Z axis is at [x8 y8 2] (which is at the X and Y coordinates of Point 8 and at Z=2); and a point on the R-Z plane is at Point 6. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create

Object:

Coord

Method: 3Point

1 1

Coord ID List 200

Type:

Cylindrical

5


2 8

Coord 0 Y

Auto Execute

6

Z

Origin

X

Point 8

Point on Axis 3

After:

[x8 y8 2]

Point on Plane 1-3 Point 6

1 1

-Apply5

T 2 200 Z8 R Y Z

6 X


Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method The Axis method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying three point locations for the coordinate frame’s origin, at the first, second or third axis and on one of the remaining two axes. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63). Geometry Action: Object:

Create Coord

Method: Axis


Coord ID List 1

Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular Refer. Coordinate Frame

Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Coord 0

Axis: Axis 1 and 2 Auto Execute Origin

Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0] Point on Axis 1 [1 0 0] Point on Axis 2

Specify three point locations for: 1) the new coordinate frame’s origin, 2) a point on axis 1, 2 or 3 and 3) a point on axis 2, 3 or 1. Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor select the point locations by using the Point Select menu.

[0 1 0]

-Apply-

☞

More Help:


3


Coordinate Frame Axis Method Example Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/Axis method. Its definition is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0; its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a point on its X axis is at Point 20; and a point on its Y axis is at Point 12. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create 16

19

Coord

Method: Axis Coord ID List 100 2

12


20

Coord 0

Y

Axis: Axis 1 and 2

Z

17

X

18

Auto Execute Origin [0 0 0]

After:

Point on Axis 1 Point 20

16

19

Point on Axis 2 Point 12

-Apply2

100 Y Z

12

X 20 Y 17

Z

X

18


Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method The Euler method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame through three specified rotations about the axes of an existing coordinate frame. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63). Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Create Coord Euler


Coord ID List 1

Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.


Specify the coordinate frame whose axes the three rotations will be about. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Coord 0

Axis:Rotation Parameters ... Auto Execute Origin [0 0 0]

-Apply-

When ON, a Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears which is described on Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example (p. 357). By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the point location for the origin of the new coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values which are expressed within the reference coordinate frame (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the Point Select menu.

☞

More Help:


3


Coordinate Frame Euler Method Example Creates a spherical coordinate frame, Coord 200, using the Create/Euler method. Its definition is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100; its origin is located at Point 14 and it is rotated 45 degrees about Coord 100’s X axis. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create

Object:

Coord

Method:

Euler

13

Coord ID List 200

Type:

Spherical


Y

Coord 100 Z

Y

Axis: Rotation Parameters ...

100

X 12

X 14

Z

Auto Execute Origin

After:

Point 14

-Apply-

13

Y

Z Y

Y

X Z

X 12

200 X

Z

100


Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example The Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears when the Rotation Parameters button is pressed on the Geometry Application Create/Coord/Euler form. See Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method (p. 355). This form allows you to define up to three rotations to be performed about the specified Reference Coordinate Frame axes. The rotations are performed in sequence from top to bottom on the form. Rotation Parameters First Rotation Axis:

About Axis 3

Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.

Angle of Rotation Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to rotate about the indicated axis.

0.0

Second Rotation Axis:

About Axis 1



0.0

Third Rotation Axis:

About Axis 3



0.0

OK

Cancel

☞

More Help:


3


Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method The Normal method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its origin at a point location on a specified surface or solid face, and its axis 3 direction normal to the surface or face. The coordinate frame’s axis 1 direction can be aligned with the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 direction, and its axis 2 direction will be aligned with the ξ 2 direction or visa versa. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63) for more information. You can plot the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction button on the Geometric Properties form under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Coord

Method: Normal


Coord ID List 1 Create x-axis of the coordinate frame along the u-direction or along the v-direction of the surface. Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular Auto Execute Origin [0 0 0]

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Origin, the point location for the origin of the new coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values that are expressed within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0 (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the Point Select menu.

Surface

-Apply-

Specify in Surface, the surface or solid face that the new coordinate frame will be created on, whose normal direction will define the coordinate frame’s axis 3 direction. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select it by using the Surface Select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Coordinate Frame Normal Method Example Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1, using the Create/Normal method whose Z axis is normal to Surface 2 and its origin is at Point 16. Notice that Coord 1’s X and Y axis are aligned with Surface 2’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions. Geometry Action:

Before:

Create 13

Object:

15

Coord

Method: Normal 16

Coord ID List 1

2

Type: Rectangular

2

Auto Execute

Y

Origin

1 12 Z

X

Point 16

14

Surface Surface 2

After: 13

-Apply-

15 Y X

Z 16 1 2

2 Y Z

1 12 X 14

3


Coordinate Frame Normal Method On a Face Example Creates rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2 at Point 17, whose Z axis is normal to the top face of Solid 1. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Coord

Method: Normal

1

Coord ID List

17

13 9

2 16 10

T

Type: Rectangular

12

Z

Auto Execute

R

Y

11

14

15

Origin Z

Point 17

X

Surface solid 1.6

After:

-ApplyZ 1

17 X2

13

Y 9

16 10

T Z

Y Z

12

R 11

X

15

14


Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method The 2 Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its origin at the designated location. Two of the through coordinate frame axes are defined using existing vectors; their directions are imposed at the selected origin and the new coordinate frame is then created. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Coord

Method: 2Vector Coord ID List


1

Type: Rectangular

Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.



Coord 0 Axis: Axis 1 and 2

Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.

Auto Execute Origin Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

[0 0 0]

Vector for Axis 1 Vector for Axis 2

-Apply-

Select the vectors that define two of the through coordinate frame axes.

3


Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method The View Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate frame at the designated origin, using the Euler angles that define the current model orientation within the graphics viewport. Geometry Action: Object:

Create Coord

Method:View Vector Coord ID List


1

Type: Rectangular

Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.


Select the reference coordinate frame from which the Euler angles are to be computed and subsequently used to define the new coordinate frame.

Coord 0 Auto Execute Origin

Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

[0 0 0]

-Apply-


4.4

Creating Planes Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method The Point-Vector method creates planes at a point and normal to a vector. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Point-Vector

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Plane ID List 1

Auto Execute Point List Vector List

Apply

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the points from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point1 5, Curve 1.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points. Specify the vectors for the new planes. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.

☞

More Help:


3


Point-Vector Method Example Creates a plane at a point and normal to a vector. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create Plane Point-Vector

Plane ID List 1 1

1

Auto Execute Point List Y

Point 1

Vector List

Z

X

Vector 1

Apply

After:

1

1

Y Z

X


Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Vector Normal Plane ID List 1

Plane Offset Distance

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to define the plane offset from the vector base point.

0.0



Point 2

Apply

Specify the vectors from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.

☞

More Help:


3


Vector Normal Option Example Creates a plane from Vector 1. The normal of the plane is parallel to the Vector. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Object: Plane Method Vector Normal Plane ID List 1 1

Plane Offset Distance 0.0


Y

Vector 1

X

Z

Apply

After:

11

Y Z

X


Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option The Point on Curve method using the Point option creates Planes normal to a tangent vector of a point along a curve. The plane centroid will be the point location on the curve. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Curve Normal Plane ID List

Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric.

1

Option:

Point



Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

Point 2

Point List

Apply

Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

☞

More Help:


3


Point Option Example Creates a plane whose normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 on the location where Point 3 is projected on the curve. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Object: Plane Method Curve Normal

3

2

Plane ID List 1

Option:

1

Point 1


Y

Curve 1

Z X

Point List Point 3

Apply

After:

3 1

1 1

Y Z X

2


Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric Option The Point on Curve method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are normal to a specified curve at a parametric position along the curve. The plane centroid will be the parametric position along the curve. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Curve Normal Plane ID List 1 Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric.

Option: Parametric Parametric Position 0.0

1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve List

Apply

Specify the curves’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. You can plot the ξ1 direction by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

☞

More Help:


3


Parametric Option Example Creates a plane on Curve 1 at the specified parametric location. Its normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 at that location. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Object: Plane Method Curve Normal

1

Plane ID List 1


1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value

1

Y Z

Auto Execute

2 X

Curve List

After:

Curve 1

1

Apply

1

Y Z

1

2 X


Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method The Plane Normal method creates a plane normal to an existing plane. The line defined by the projection of the new plane onto the existing plane is defined by selecting a vector; this vector is projected normally onto the existing plane. The new plane’s normal direction is defined by the vector cross product of the existing plane normal by the projected vector. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Plane Normal Plane ID List 1

Auto Execute


Plane List Select existing plane that is perpendicular to newly created plane.

Vector List Select vector that defines orientation of newly created plane.

Apply

3


Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents at the interpolating points on the curve. Uniform option will space the planes along the curve based on the equal arc lengths or equal parametric values upon the user’s choice. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Create Plane Interpolate

Plane ID List 1

Number of Planes 3

Parameterization Method ◆ Equal Arc Length ◆ ◆ Equal Parametric Values Plane Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is 1, one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2, two planes are created at both end of the curve. The default value is 3.

Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or parametric values. Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio for Nonuniform spacing.



Apply

Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

☞

More Help:



Plane Interpolate Example Creates planes on curve 1 at the interpolating points. The plane’s normals are parallel to the tangents of Curve 1 at each location. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create Plane Interpolate

Plane ID List 1 1

Number of Planes

2

3 1


Y Z

X

Plane Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

After:

2


1 4

Curve 1 3 1 1

Apply Y

Z

X

1

3


Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents at the interpolating points on the curve. Nonuniform option will space the planes along the curve based on the space ratio applied on the arc length or the parametric values upon the user’s choice. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Create Plane Interpolate Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Plane ID List 1

Number of Planes 3


Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is 1, one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2, two planes are created at both end of the curve. The default value is 3.

Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or parametric values.

Plane Spacing Method ◆ ◆ Uniform ◆ Nonuniform . L1.

L2/L1 =

.

Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio for Nonuniform spacing.

.

1.5

L2 . By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

Curve List

Apply

☞

More Help:



Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option The Least Squares method using the Point option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a set of points that are not co-linear. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Least Squares Plane ID List 1

Option:

Point


Used to express the entity type to create the plane from. Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.

Point List

Apply

Specify the points from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 to 5. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

☞

More Help:


3


Point Option Example Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Point 1:4. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Object: Plane Method Least Squares

3

Plane ID List 1 1

Option:

Point

2

Point List

4

Point 1:4 Y

Apply

X Z

After:

3

1 1 2 4

Y X Z


Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option The Least Squares method using the Curve option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a non-linear curve. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Least Squares Plane ID List


1

Option:

Curve


Apply



Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

☞

More Help:


3


Curve Option Example Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Curve 1. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Plane Object: Method Least Squares Plane ID List

2

1

Option:

Curve

1

Auto Execute

1

Curve List Curve 1 Y Z

Apply

X

After:

2

1 1 1

Y Z

X


Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option The Least Squares method using the Surface option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a surface. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Least Squares Plane ID List


1

Option:

Surface


Apply



Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

☞

More Help:


3


Surface Option Example Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Surface 1. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Object: Plane Method Least Squares

2

3

Plane ID List 1

Option:

Surface

1

Auto Execute Surface List Surface 1 Y

Apply

Z X

1

4

2

3

After:

1 1

Y Z

X

1

4


Creating Planes with the Offset Method The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Create Plane Offset

Plane ID List


1

Plane Offset Distance

Used to define the plane offset from the input plane.

1.0

Repeat Count

Used to define the number of repeat. The number created planes equals the number of repeat count.

1


Apply


Specify the Planes from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

☞

More Help:


3


Offset Method Example Creates planes, which are parallel to Plane 1 but have a offset of 1.0 from each other. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create Plane Offset 1

Plane ID List 2

Plane Offset Distance 1.0

Repeat Count Y

3

Z

Auto Execute

X

Plane List Plane 1

Apply

After:

1

2

Y Z

X

3

4


Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option The Tangent method using the Point option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface at a specified point on the surface. The plane centroid will be the point location on the surface. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Surface Tangent Plane ID List


1

Option:

Point


Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

Point List

Apply Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

☞

More Help:


3


Point Option Example Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at Point 5. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Plane Object: Method Surface Tangent

2

3

Plane ID List 1 5

Option:

Point

1

Auto Execute Surface List Surface 1 Y

Point List

Z

Point 5

Apply

X

1

4

2

3

After:

5 1 1

Y Z

X

1

4


Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric Option The Tangent method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface at a parametric position on the surface. The plane centroid will be the tangent point on the surface. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Surface Tangent Plane ID List


1

Option: Parametric

Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric.


1.0 0.5


1.0 0.5

Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of ξ1and ξ2 are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ1 and ξ2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List

Apply


Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

☞

More Help:


3


Parametric Option Example Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at the specified parametric locations. Geometry

Before:

Create Action: Plane Object: Method Surface Tangent

2

3

Plane ID List 1 1


1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value Y

0.0

1.0 0.5

Z

X

1

4

2

3

v Parametric Value Auto Execute

After:


Apply 1

1

Y Z

X

1

4


Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method The 3 Point method creates Planes which pass through three specified points that are not colinear. The plane centroid will be average of the first point. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Create Plane 3 Points

Plane ID List 1

Auto Execute Point 1 List Point 2 List

Point 3List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the three point locations for the new planes. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Apply

☞

More Help:


3


3 Points Method Example Creates a plane from Point 1:3. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create

2

Plane 3 Points

Plane ID List 1

Auto Execute Point 1 List 3

1

Point 1

Point 2 List Y X

Point 2

Point 3List

Z

Point 3

After: Apply

2

1 1

Y X Z

3


4.5

Creating Vectors Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method The Magnitude method creates Vectors from a specified vector magnitude, direction and base point. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Create Vector Magnitude


Vector ID List 1


Vector Direction List <1 0 0>

Vector Magnitude List 1.0

Auto Execute Base Point List

Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0. Enter the vector coordinates to define the direction for the new vectors. Enter the coordinates either from the keyboard (Example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define the vector direction using the Vector Select menu that appears.

Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05) By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0]

Apply

Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

☞

More Help:


3


Magnitude Example Creates a vector based at point 1 and directing along the X axis. The vector has a magnitude of 1.0. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create Vector Magnitude

Vector ID List

1

1


Vector Direction List Y

<1 0 0>

Z

X


Auto Execute

After:

Base Point List [0 0 0]

Apply

11

Y Z

X


Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method Between Two Points The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Vector

Method: Interpolate Vector ID List 5

Number of Vectors

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Enter the number of interior vectors you want to create.

1


Vector Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

Auto Execute Curves List


-Apply-

☞

More Help:


3


Vector Interpolate Method Example Creates. Geometry Action:

Create

Object:

Vector

Before:

Method: Interpolate Vector ID List 5

Number of Vectors 1


Vector Spacing Method ◆ Uniform ◆ ◆ Nonuniform

Auto Execute Curves List

-Apply-

After:


Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method The Intersect method creates Vectors from the intersections of pairs of Planes. The origins of the two planes will be projected onto the intersection line to determine the base and tip of the resulting vector. If the base and tip are not unique, the tip will be assumed. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry Action: Object: Method

Create Vector Intersect

Vector ID List


1

Reverse Vector Direction Auto Execute Plane 1 List

Indicate whether the direction of the resulting vector should be reversed. The direction may be controlled via the order of the input planes, except when the projection of the plane origins onto the intersection line is not unique. In such a case, if desired, this toggle may be used to reverse the direction.

Coord 0

Plane 2 List <1 0 0>

Apply

Specify the two planes from which the new intersection vector is to be created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

☞

More Help:


3


Intersect Example Creates a vector along the intersection of Plane 1 and Plane 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create Vector Intersect 2

Vector ID List 1

Reverse Vector Direction Auto Execute

1

Plane 1 List Z

Plane 1

Plane 2 List

X Y

Plane 2

Apply

After:

Z X Y

1 2 1


Creating Vectors with the Normal Method Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane; originating at the plane and passing through a point. The tip point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry Create

Action: Object: Method

Vector Normal

Vector ID List


1

Option:

Plane

Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.

Vector Magnitude List Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)

1


Point List

Apply

Specify the planes from which the new normal vectors will be created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.


☞

More Help:


3


Plane Option Example Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Plane 1. Geometry

Before:

Create


Vector Normal

Vector ID List 1

1

Option:

Plane

Vector Magnitude List 1 Y

Auto Execute X

Z

Plane List Plane 1

Plane Point List [0 0 0]

After:

Apply 1 1

Y Z

X


Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.


Create Vector Normal


Vector ID List Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.

1

Option:

Surface

Vector Magnitude List

Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)

1.0

Base at Surface Centroid Auto Execute

Default Base Point will not be at the Surface Centroid. If ON, the surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base Point Listbox.

Surface List

Base Point List

Apply

Specify the surfaces from which the new normal vectors will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.


☞

More Help:


3


Surface Option Example Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Surface 1 at Point 5. Geometry

Before:

Create


3

Vector Normal

Vector ID List 1

Option:

1

Surface

5


Base at Surface Centroid Auto Execute

Y X

Surface List

4 Z

Surface 1

Base Point List

After: 3

Point 5

Apply

1 1 5

4

Y X

Z

1

2

1

2


Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option The Normal method using the Element Face option creates Vectors from normal vectors to an Element Face. The base point of the vector will be the element face centroid by default, but a node on the element face may also be specified. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.


Create Vector Normal


Vector ID List Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.

1

Option:Element Face Vector Magnitude List

Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)

1.0

Base at Surface Centroid Element Type: 2D Auto Execute Element Face List

Base Node List

Apply

Default Base Point will be at the Surface Centroid. If ON, the surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base Point List box. Used to express the element type to calculate vector normal from. Options are 2D and 3D. Specify the element faces from which the new normal vectors will be created. Either cursor select the element face or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Elm 1.5. The Element Face Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate element faces.

Specify the base node locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Node 20.

☞

More Help:


3


Element Face 2D Option Example Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 6. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create

2 13

Vector

14 13

Normal

15

Vector ID List

3 16

16

14 9

17

15 10

1

18 11

8 9

7

Option:Element Face

5

10

6

Vector Magnitude List

12

1 1

1.0 11

Element Face List Elem 1

5

2

6 3

Y

Element Type: 2D Auto Execute

8

4 3

2

Base at Surface Centroid

12 11 7

4 4

X

Z

After:

Base Node List

2 13 14

Node 6

13

15 3 16 16 14 17 15 9 10 18 11 8 9 12 7 1 12 5 10 11 1 6 1 7

Apply

4

2

3

11

8 5

2

Y

6 3 4 4

Z

X


Element Face 3D Option Example Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create

2

Vector

3

6

Normal 7

Vector ID List 1

Option:Element Face Vector Magnitude List 1.0

1

Base at Surface Centroid

4

5

Y

Element Type: 3D Auto Execute Element Face List Elem 8

8 X

Z

After: 2

Base Node List 3

6

Node 12

7

Apply

2

1

4

5

Y

Z

1

X

8

4


Creating Vectors with the Product Method The Product method creates vectors of the cross products of two existing vectors. The base point of the created vector will be the base point of the first vector. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.


Create Vector

Method: Product Vector ID List 1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Auto Execute Vector 1 List

Vector 2 List

Specify two vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1. The vector select menu that appears can be used to define how you want the cursor to select the appropriate vectors, coords, and planes.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Product Example Creates Vector 3, which is the cross product of Vector 1 and Vector 2. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Create Vector

Method: Product Vector ID List 3

Auto Execute Vector 1 List Vector 1 2

Vector 2 List Y

Vector 2

Z X

-Apply-

1

After:

2 1 3 1 3 Y X Z

4


Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method The 2 Point method creates vectors between two existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.


Create Vector 2 Point

Vector ID List


1

Auto Execute Base Point List

Tip Point List

Specify the base and tip point locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Apply

☞

More Help:



2 Point Option Example Creates a vector starting from Point 1 and ending at Point 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method

Before:

Create

2

Vector 2 Point

Vector ID List 1

Auto Execute Base Point List Point 1

Tip Point List Point 2

Y Z

1

X

Apply

After: 2

Y Z

1 X

1

4



CHAPTER

5

Delete Actions

■ Overview of the Geometry Delete Action ■ Deleting Any Geometric Entity ■ Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors ■ Deleting Coordinate Frames


5.1

Overview of the Geometry Delete Action The Geometry Application Delete action can remove any or all geometric entities from the database. Objects that are available for deletion are listed in Table 5-1. Table 5-1 Geometry Delete Action Objects and Descriptions Object

Description

Any

Deletes different types of geometric entities at the same time.

Point

Deletes any number of points.

Curve

Deletes any number of curves.

Surface

Deletes any number of surfaces.

Solid

Deletes any number of solids.

Coord

Deletes any number of user defined coordinate frames.

Auto Execute Is Off By Default. By default, the Auto Execute toggle is OFF. For more information, see Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Using the Abort and Undo Buttons. When the Delete action form starts to execute, you may press the Abort key at any time to halt the delete process. You may also press the Undo button immediately after the Delete action completes to restore the deleted entities back to the database. See System Icons (p. 24) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran for more information.

CHAPTER 5 Delete Actions

5.2

Deleting Any Geometric Entity Setting the Object menu to Any deletes any number of points, curves, surfaces, solids or coordinate frames (except the global coordinate frame, Coord 0) from the database. You can also delete geometric entities by using the Group/Delete menu. Geometry Action:

Delete

Object:

Any

Delete Point Curve Surface Solid Coordinate Frame

You can turn ON or OFF any number of these geometry type toggles. These toggles act like a filter, such that if a toggle is OFF, none of the specified entities of the toggle type that are listed in Geometric Entity List will be deleted. Example: If Point 1 2 3 are listed in Geometric Entity List and the Point toggle is OFF, then MSC.Patran will not delete the specified points.

Plane Vector Auto Execute Geometric Entity List

-Apply-


Specify the existing geometric entities to be deleted either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 3 Surface 5:10 Solid 12 Coord 10. The select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, curves, surfaces, solids and coordinate frames.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Group Delete (p. 197) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

4


5.3

Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors Setting the Object menu to Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector removes any number of specified points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from the database. Geometry Action: Object:

Delete

Auto Execute List

-Apply-

Set to either: Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is OFF which means you need to press the Apply button or turn ON Auto Execute to execute the form.

Depending if Object is set to Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector specify one or more points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors to delete from the databox. You can either cursor select them by using the Point Select Menu, Curve Select Menu, Surface Select Menu, Solid Select Menu, Vector Select Menu,or Geometry Select Menu (Plane); or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 7 10 or Surface 3:10, Plane 1, Vector 2.

☞

More Help:

• Understanding the List Processor (p. 55) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Group Delete (p. 197) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 5 Delete Actions

5.4

Deleting Coordinate Frames Setting the Object menu to Coord removes any number of specified user defined coordinate frames from the database The global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, cannot be deleted. Also, a coordinate frame will not be deleted if it is being referenced as a Nodal Reference Coordinate Frame or Analysis Coordinate Frame, elsewhere in the model. Geometry Action: Object:

Delete Coord

Auto Execute Coordinate Frame List

-Apply-


Specify list of coordinate frames to be deleted either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 2 10.

☞

More Help:

• Understanding the List Processor (p. 55) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • Node Coordinate Frames (p. 50) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

4



CHAPTER

6

Edit Actions

■ Overview of the Edit Action Methods ■ Editing Points ■ Editing Curves ■ Editing Surfaces ■ Editing Solids ■ Editing Features


6.1

Overview of the Edit Action Methods

Object

Method

Description

Point

❏ Equivalence

Finds groups of points which are within global model tolerances of each other and for each group, equivalences the points into one point.

Curve

❏ Break

Breaks curves into n+1 curves at either a point location or at a parametric coordinate location.

❏ Blend

Creates curves from two or more curves or edges by forcing a first derivative continuity across the boundaries.

❏ Disassemble

Creates curves that represent a specified chained curve.

❏ Extend

Extends or lengthens one curve or edge or a pair of curves or edges, either through a straight line extension, or through a continuous curvature.

❏ Merge

Creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or edges. Some of the original curvature may be lost.

❏ Refit

Creates Uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic curves from existing curves.

❏ Reverse

Redefines the connectivity of a curve or edge by reversing the curve’s or edge’s positive parametric direction.

❏ Trim

Shortens the length of a curve or edge at either a point location or a parametric coordinate location on the curve.

❏ Break

Breaks a surface or a solid face into two or four smaller surfaces at either a point, curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate location on the surface.

❏ Blend

Creates surfaces from two or more surfaces or solid faces by forcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries.

❏ Disassemble

Creates surfaces that represent the specified B-rep solid.

❏ Edge Match

Recreates a specified surface either by closing a gap between it and another adjacent surface; or by creating an additional vertex and converting the surface into a trimmed surface.

❏ Extend

Extends or lengthens a surface: by a percentage in the U and/or V parametric directions, to its intersection with a curve, plane, point or another surface, or by a fixed length. Also extends a pair of surfaces to their intersection.

❏ Refit

Creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic patches from existing surfaces.

❏ Reverse

Redefines the connectivity of a surface or solid face by reversing the surface’s or face’s positive parametric directions.

❏ Sew

Combines Edit, Point, Equivalence and Edit, Surface, Edge Match functionality to equivalence surface vertices and merge edges.

Surface

CHAPTER 6 Edit Actions

Object Solid

Feature

Method

Description

❏ Break

Breaks a solid into two, four or eight smaller solids either at a point, curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate location.

❏ Blend

Creates solids from two or more solids by forcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries.

❏ Disassemble

Creates surfaces that represent a specified B-rep solid.

❏ Refit

Creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic solids from existing solids.

❏ Reverse

Redefines the connectivity of a solid by reversing the solid’s positive parametric directions.and moving the location of the parametric origin.

❏ Suppress

Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that can be suppressed from the geometric model

❏ Unsuppress

Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that can be unsuppressed from the geometric model.

❏ Parameters

Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the geometric model based on the new parameter values.

4


6.2

Editing Points Equivalencing Points The Point Equivalence method finds groups of points which are within global model tolerance of each other and for each group and equivalences the points into one point. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Point

Method: Equivalence Point List Point 5 6

-Apply-

Specify in Point List, the points to be equivalenced, either by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location. The Vertex select menu will appear.


Editing Point Equivalence Method Example Equivalences points 5 and 6 resulting in point 5 at the mid-point between points 5 and 6. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit

2

3

Point

Method: Equivalence Point List Point 5 6

1 -Apply-

Y Z X1

6

5

4

After: 2

3

1

Y ZX 1

5

4

4


6.3

Editing Curves Breaking Curves Breaking a Curve at a Point The Break method with the Point option creates n+1 curves by breaking an existing curve or edge at one or more point locations. The point locations can be defined by either existing points, nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. Also, the break point location does not have to lie on the curve or edge. If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will be deleted from the database.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break

Curve ID List 1

Option:

Point

Delete Original Curves Auto Execute

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Used to express the point type to create the curve from. Options are Point, Parametric and Plane. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve List

Break Point List

Specify the existing curves or edges to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

-ApplySpecify the point break locations along each curve either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Node 15. The point locations may be specified in any order. If an endpoint of a curve is specified, then MSC.Patran will create a zero length curve. The Point select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select each break point location.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10)


Curve Break Method At a Point Example Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at Point 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break

Before: 2 1

1

Curve ID List 2

Option:

4

Point


Y

Curve List Curve 1

Z

X

Break Point List Point 2

After: -Apply-

2 1

2

3 4

Y Z

X

4


Curve Break Method Between Two Points Example Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 (by using the Curve select menu icon listed below) at the break location of Node 1. Notice that Node 1 does not have to be colinear with Points 1 and 2. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break

Before: 2

1

Curve ID List 1

1

Option:

Point


Y

Curve List Construct2PointCurve(Eval

Z

X

Break Point List Node 1

-Apply-

After:

1

1

3

1

Y Z


X

2

2


Curve Break Method At An Edge Example Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (using the Curve select menu icon listed below) at the break location defined by Node 1. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break

Before: 5

Curve ID List

6

1

1

Option:

Point


1

Auto Execute

1

Curve List

4

Y

Surface 1.4

Z

Break Point List

X

Node 1

-Apply-

After: 5

6

1 1

1

1 Y Z


X

2

4

4


Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location The Break method with the Parametric option creates two curves from an existing curve or edge, at the curve’s parametric ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Used to express the point type to create the curve from. Options are Point, Parametric and Plane.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break


Curve ID List 1

Option: Parametric Break Point 0.0

1.0 0.5

Specify the curve’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the curve’s connectivity. You can plot the x1 direction by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display

u Parametric Value Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List

-Apply-

If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will be deleted from the database. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing curves or edges to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location Example Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at ξ 1 = 0.25 . Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed in and the Parametric Direction is turned ON. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break

Before:

1

1

Curve ID List

1

2

Option: Parametric

5

Break Point 0.0

1.0 0.25

u Parametric Value

Y


Z

X


After:

Curve 1

-Apply-

6 2 1

1 3

1 5

Y Z

X

4


Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location On An Edge Example Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon listed below) at ξ 1 = 0.25 . Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break

Before: 6 1

Curve ID List

7

1

2 1

Option: Parametric

1

Break Point 0.0

1.0 0.25

Y

5

u Parametric Value

Z


X


After:

Surface 1.4

6 -Apply-

1 7 2 11 8 1 1

Y Z Curve Select Menu Icon

1 2

5 X


Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location The method breaks a curve with a plane. The curve will be broken at each intersection point with the plane. Used to express the point type to create the curve from. Options are Point, Parametric and Plane.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Break

Curve ID List 1

Option:

Plane

Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List

Break Plane List

-Apply-

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will be deleted from the database. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the curves to be broken. Specify the planes to break the curve. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

☞

More Help:


4


Blending a Curve The Blend method creates a set of parametric cubic curves from an existing set of two or more curves or edges by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The set of existing curves or edges must be connected.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Blend

Curve ID List 1

Blend Parameters Weighting Factors 1.0

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Enter n-1 weighting factors of curve i relative to curve i+1, where the factor can be any value. By default, a value of 1.0 will cause all curves to receive equal weight. A large value will cause the first curve of the curve pair to dominate the slope. A small value will cause the second curve of the pair to dominate the slope.

Delete Original Curves If ON, after Blend completes, the existing curves specified in the Curve listbox will be deleted from the database.

Curve List

-Apply-

Specify the existing curves or edges to blend either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)


Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factor = 1.0 Example Creates Curves 6 through 10 by equally blending Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed in. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Blend

Before: 1 4 1

Curve ID List

5 5

3

6

2

Blend Parameters

4

2

6

3

Weighting Factors 1.0

Y


Z

Curve List

X

Curve 1:5

-Apply-

After: 1 4 6

8 2

7

Y Z

X

3

9

5 10 6

4


Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factors Other Than 1.0 Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that four weighting factors are used for the four curve pairs: 1e-6, 1.0, 1.0, 1e6. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Blend

Before: 1 4 1

5 5

3

Curve ID List

2

6

4

2

6

3

Blend Parameters Weighting Factors 1e-6 1.0 1.0 1e6

Y Delete Original Curves

Z

X

Curve List Curve 1:5

-Apply-

After: 1 4 1 6

83 2

27

Y Z

X

3

94

5 10 5 6


Disassembling a Chained Curve The Disassemble method operates on one or more chains (composite curves) and breaks them into the original curves that composed the chain. A chained curve can be created by using Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Chain form. Chained curves are usually used in MSC.Patran for creating trimmed surfaces. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method: Disassemble Delete Original Chains

If ON, after Disassemble completes, the existing chained curves specified in Chain List will be deleted from the database.

Chain List Specify the chained curves to disassemble either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 11.

-Apply-

Example

➠

☞ More Help: • Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Creating Chained Curves (p. 131) • Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)

4


Curve Disassemble Method Example Creates Curves 8 through 13 from chained Curve 7. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 7 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Before: 6

5 7

Method: Disassemble Delete Original Chains Chain List Curve 7

-Apply-

1 Y Z

2

3

4

X

After: 6

12

5

13

11

9 1

Y

8

Z

X

2

3

10

4


Extending Curves Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option The Extend method with the 1 Curve option extends one or more curves which start at either the beginning or the end of an existing curve or edge, and moves in the tangent direction for a defined length. You can either extend curves in a straight line or maintain the same curvature as the existing curve or edge. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created (only used if the curve selected is an edge of a surface or solid). See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Curve ID List 1

Option: 1 Curve

Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from. Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.

Extend Method ◆ Straight Line ◆ ◆ Continuous Curvature ◆ ◆ Through Points ◆ ◆ Full Circle Curve Length ◆ Actual ◆ ◆ Fraction of Original

Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of the existing curve or edge. Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by maintaining the same curvature of the existing curve. Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting one end of the curve through N-points. Full Circle - will extend the existing curve by creating a full circle at the start or end of the curve.

Actual - the value entered will be the length to extend the existing curve.

Auto Execute Curve/Point List

-Apply-

Fraction of Original - the length to extend the existing curve will be defined by multiplying the value entered with the length of the existing curve. Example: a value of 1.5 means the length of the new curve will be one and a half times as long as the existing curve.

4


Curve Length ◆ Actual ◆ ◆ Fraction of Original

Auto Execute


Curve/Point List

-Apply-

Cursor select the existing curve or edge, followed by the endpoint that you want to extend from. MSC.Patran will assemble a “Construct PointCurveUOnCurve...” argument string in Curve/Point List that is recognized by MSC.Patran’s List Processor. The Curve select menu will appear, followed by the Point select menu to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the curve or edge and the endpoint location for the Extend.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Understanding the List Processor (p. 55) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran


Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example Extends curve 1 in a straight line by an actual length of 1.0. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Before:

1

Curve ID List

1

1

6

Option: 1 Curve Extend Method ◆ Straight Line ◆ ◆ Continuous Curvature ◆ ◆ Through Points ◆ ◆ Full Circle

Y Z

X


After:

1.0

7

Auto Execute Curve/Point List Construct PointCurveUOnCurve

1 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X

4


Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Continuous Curvature is pressed in, instead of Straight Line, and Fraction of Original is pressed in based on a value of 1.5. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Before:

Curve ID List 1

Option: 1 Curve

1

Extend Method

1

◆ ◆ Straight Line ◆ Continuous Curvature ◆ ◆ Through Points ◆ ◆ Full Circle

Y Z

X

Curve Length ◆ ◆ Actual ◆ Fraction of Original

After: 7

1.5

Auto Execute Curve/Point List Construct PointCurveUOnCurve

-Apply-

Y Z

1 1 X

6


Curve Extend Method For One Edge Example Creates Curve 1 by extending it from an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon listed below). Both Straight Line and Actual are pressed in, with a length of 1.0 entered. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Before:

1

Curve ID List 1

6

7

Option: 1 Curve

1

Extend Method ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

8

Y

Straight Line Continuous Curvature Through Points Full Circle

Z

X


After:

1.0

9 Auto Execute Curve/Point List

1

Construct PointCurveUOnCurve

6

7

1

-Apply-

8

Y Z


1

X

4


Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Through Points switch modifies one curve by extending the curve through N-points. Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from. Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Curve ID List 1


Option: 1 Curve Extend Method ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

Straight Line Continuous Curvature

Through Points Full Circle

Auto Execute

Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of the existing curve or edge. Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by maintaining the same curvature of the existing curve. Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting one end of the curve through N-points. Full Circle - will extend the existing curve by creating a full circle at the start or end of the curve.

Curve Cursor select the existing curve or edge. The Curve select menu will appear to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the curve or edge for the Extend.

Point List

-Apply-

Specify the point locations for the curve to extend through. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

• Topology (p. 10) • Understanding the List Processor (p. 55) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran


Curve Extend Method For Through Points Example Extends Curve 1 by passing through the selected screen points. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Before:

1

Curve ID List 2

2

Option: 1 Curve Extend Method

1

◆ ◆ Straight Line ◆ ◆ Continuous Curvature ◆ Through Points ◆ ◆ Full Circle

Y Z X

Auto Execute Curve

After:

Curve 1

Point List [0.759383 0.351561 0.00000]

1 -Apply-

1

Y Z X

2

4


Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Full Circle switch creates one curve by extending the curve to a full circle, given the start, end, or interior point of the curve. If the curve has zero radius of curvature, a circle will not be created. Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from. Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend


Curve ID List 19

Option: 1 Curve

Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of the existing curve or edge.

Extend Method

Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by maintaining the same curvature of the existing curve.

◆ ◆ Straight Line ◆ ◆ Continuous Curvature

Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting one end of the curve through N-points.

◆ ◆ Through Points

Full Circle - will extend the existing curve by creating a full circle at the start or end of the curve.

◆ Full Circle Delete Original Curves

Toggle to delete original curves after the extension.

Auto Execute Curve/Point List

-Apply-

Cursor select the existing curve or edge, followed by the endpoint that you want to extend from. MSC.Patran will assemble a “Construct PointCurveUOnCurve...” argument string in Curve/Point List that is recognized by MSC.Patran’s List Processor. The Curve select menu will appear, followed by the Point select menu to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the curve or edge and the endpoint location for the Extend.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

• Topology (p. 10) • Understanding the List Processor (p. 55) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran


Curve Extend Method For Full Circle Example Extends Curve 1 to a full circle by selecting Curve 1 and then Point 1. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Before: 1 2

Curve ID List 2

Option: 1 Curve Extend Method

1

◆ ◆ Straight Line ◆ ◆ Continuous Curvature

Y

◆ ◆ Through Points ◆ Full Circle

X

Z


After:

Curve/Point List Geometry (Curve1) (Point1)

1 2

-Apply-

2 1 Y Z

X

4


Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option The Extend method with the 2 Curve option extends a set of curves in a straight line by extending them from two existing curves or edges. MSC.Patran will extend the specified endpoints to where the two curves will intersect. If the distance from the intersection to the endpoint of one of the existing curves, is within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then MSC.Patran will extend only one curve instead of two. (The Global Model Tolerance is defined on the Global Preferences form under the Preferences/Global menu). Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from. Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Curve ID List 1

Option: 2 Curve Auto Execute Curve 1 List

Curve 2 List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created (used only if the curve to be extended is an edge of a surface or solid). See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing pair of curves or edges that you want to extend straight curves from by either cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 2 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

-Apply1

3 1

Before:

☞

3

After:

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Global Preferences (p. 290) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Example

➠


Curve Extend Method For Two Curves Example Extends Curves 1 and 2 to their point of intersection. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Before:

1 5

Curve ID List

1

2

3

Option: 2 Curve

2 3

Auto Execute Curve 1 List

Y

Curve 2

Z

X

Curve 2 List Curve 1

-Apply-

After:

1 5 1

2 2 3 Y Z

X

3 4 6

4


Curve Extend Method For A Curve and An Edge Example Creates Curve 3 and extends Curve 1 by extending them from Curve 1 and an edge of Surface 1 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Extend

Before:

1

Curve ID List

1

2

Option: 2 Curve

1

7

5

2 3

Auto Execute Curve 1 List Curve 1

Y

Curve 2 List

Z

8 X

Surface 1.4

-Apply-

After:

1 1 1

7

Y Z X


8

2 3

3 2 9

5


Merging Existing Curves The Merge method creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or edges. The shape of the new curves, relative to the existing curves or edges, will be preserved to the extent possible, but, in general, some detail will be lost. The existing curves or edges must be connected. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Merge

Curve ID List 1


Merge Parameters Number of Curves to Create 1

Merge Tolerance

Specify the number of curves to create from the original curves and the tolerance to use to control the accuracy of the merge process.

0.005


If ON, after Merge completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will be deleted from the database.

Curve List

-Apply-

Specify the existing curves or edges to merge either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

Example

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Parameterization (p. 5) • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

➠

4


Curve Merge Method Example Creates Curve 6 by merging Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curves 1 through 5 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Merge

Before:

12

3

6

8

2

Curve ID List

5

4

1

3 5

Merge Parameters Number of Curves to Create

7 6

Y

1

Z

Merge Tolerance

X

0.005

Delete Original Curves Curve List Curve 1:5

After: -Apply-

2

3

8 4

1

7 5 Y Z

X

6


Curve Merge Method Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that the merge tolerance is 0.00001. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Merge

Before:

12

Curve ID List

3

8

2

6

Merge Parameters

5

4

1

3 5

Number of Curves to Create

7 6

1

Y

Merge Tolerance

Z

0.00001

X


After: -Apply-

2

3

8 4

1

5 Y Z

X

7 6

4


Curve Merge Method Example Creates Curves 6 through 8 from merging Curves 1 through 5. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Merge

Before:

Curve ID List

12

3

6

8

2

Merge Parameters Number of Curves to Create

5

4

1

3

7

5

6

3

Merge Tolerance

Y

0.00001

Z

X


After: -Apply-

9

6

8 7

1

10 Y Z

X

8


Refitting Existing Curves The Refit method using the Uniform option creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic curves from existing curves. The number of piecewise cubic segments per curve is input as the refit parameter. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve Refit

Method:

Curve ID List


1

Option:

Uniform

Refit Parameters Segments per Curve 1

Used to express the refit option. Options are Uniform and Nonuniform. Uniform: Enter a value to define the number of piecewise cubic segments to refit the original curve into. Enter the value from the keyboard. Nonuniform: Displays the refit tolerance.

Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing curves or edges to refit either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Parameterization (p. 5) • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

4


Reversing a Curve The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of curves or edges by reversing the positive ξ 1 direction of the curves or edges. You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form found under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Reverse Reverse Associated Elements

Option: Auto Execute Curve List

-Apply-

If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically reverse the connectivity of any finite elements that are associated with the curves or edges specified in Curve List. If OFF, MSC.Patran retain the original connectivity of the elements.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing curves or edges to reverse either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:



Curve Reverse Method Example This example reverses Curves 6, 7 and 8. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed for the curves. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Reverse

Before:

6 Reverse Associated Elements

1

1

1

7 8

Option: Auto Execute Curve List

Y

Curve 6 7 8

Z

X

-Apply-

After:

1

6

7 1 Y Z

X

1

8

4


Curve Reverse Method With Associated Elements Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Curves 7, 8 and 9 have associated bar elements. Although the node IDs are not reversed, MSC.Patran internally reverses the bar elements’ connectivities. For example, for Bar 1 the nodes are stored as Nodes 2 and 1, instead of 1 and 2. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Reverse

Before: 1 2

1

6 2

Reverse Associated Elements

1

3

Option: Auto Execute

3

Curve List Curve 6 7 8

-Apply-

Y 4

Z

X

After:

2 6 2 3

13 Y 4

Z X

1

1


Trimming Curves Trimming a Curve With the Point Option The Trim method with the Point option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming them at a specified point location along each curve. The trim point can be defined by either existing points, nodes, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. You cannot trim existing edges. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method: Option:

Used to express the Trim method to create the curve from. Options are Point and Parametric.

Trim Point

Auto Execute


Trim Point List

Curve/Point List

-Apply-

Specify in Trim Point List, the point location either by cursor selecting the point location or by entering the ID of the point or node. Example: Point 11 Node 20. Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curves that you want to trim, along with a point location that defines the end of the curve that MSC.Patran will discard or trim off. A Curve select menu will appear, followed by a Point select menu.

Trim Point Location

Original Curve

Point Location of End to Discard Discard This Section

Example

☞

➠

More Help:


4


Curve Trim Method At a Point Example Trims Curve 9 at Point 9, with Point 9 cursor selected in the Curve/Point List as end of the curve to discard or trim off. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method: Option:

Before:

Trim

8 Point

Auto Execute

9 1 9

Trim Point List Point 9

Y

Curve/Point List

Z

X


-Apply-

After:

9 1 9 Y Z

X


Curve Trim Method At a Point Example Trims Curve 9 at the intersection of Curves 9 and 10 by using the Point select menu icon listed below for the Trim Point List. Point 8 is cursor selected for the Curve/Point List as the end of the curve to trim. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method: Option:

Before: 10

Trim Point

Auto Execute

9 10

Trim Point List Construct 2Curve Point(Evalua

1

Curve/Point List Construct PointCurveUOnCurve

8

Y Z

9

X

-Apply-

After: 10

9 10 8

1 Y Z Point Select Menu Icon

X

9

4


Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option The Trim method using the Parametric option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming them at a specified ξ 1 parametric coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . You cannot trim existing edges. Used to express the Trim method to create the curve from. Options are Point and Parametric.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Trim

Option: Parametric Trim Point 0.0

1.0 0.5

u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve/Point List

-Apply-

Specify the curve’s ξ 1 coordinate value, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the curve’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 direction by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form under the menu Display/Geometry.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to chose the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curves that you want to trim, along with a point location that defines the end of the curve that MSC.Patran will discard or trim off. A Curve select menu will appear, followed by a Point select menu.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:



Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example Trims Curve 9 at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.75 , where Point 8 is cursor selected as the end of the curve to trim. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Before:

Trim

1

Option: Parametric

9

Trim Point 0.0

1

1.0 0.75

8

u Parametric Value

Y Z

Auto Execute

X

Curve/Point List Construct PointCurveUOnCurve

-Apply-

After:

9 1 8

1 Y Z

X

4


Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 1 instead of Point 8 is cursor selected as the end of the curve to trim in the Curve/Point List box. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Curve

Method:

Before:

Trim

Option: Parametric

1

9

Trim Point 0.0

1.0 0.75

1

u Parametric Value

8 Y

Auto Execute

Z

Curve/Point List

X


-Apply-

After:

11 9 Y Z

X

8


6.4

Editing Surfaces Surface Break Options Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option The Break method with the Curve option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid face at a curve location.The curve location does not have to lie on the surface, but it must intersect on opposite edges of the surface or face. The curve location can be a curve, an edge or other curve locations provided on the Curve select menu. Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface Break

Method:

Surface ID List


2

Option:

Curve

If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified in Surface List will be deleted from the database.


Break Curve List


Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

-ApplySpecify one curve break location for each surface or face specified in Surface List, either by cursor selecting it or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 10, Surface 11.1. The Curve select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select each curve break location.

☞

More Help:


Example

➠

4


Surface Break Method At a Curve Example Breaks Surface 1 at Curve 3. Notice that Curve 3 does not lie on Surface 1. Instead, MSC.Patran projects the curve break location on the surface. Also, Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 9

Break

Method:

3

Surface ID List 2

8

Option:

Curve


6


1

7

Y 1

Surface 1

Z

X 5

Break Curve List Curve 3

-Apply-

After: 9 3 8 11

6

3 10

Y 1 Z

7 2

X 5


Surface Break Method At Two Points Example This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve break location is defined by Points 8 and 9 using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 9

Break

Method:

Surface ID List 2

8

Option: Curve Delete Original Surfaces

6 1


7

Y 1

Surface 1

X

Z

Break Curve List

5

Construct 2PointCurve(Evalua -Apply-

After: 9

8 6

3 10

Y 1 Z


11 7

2

X 5

4


Surface Break Method At a Curve on a Face Example Breaks a face of Solid 1 using the Surface select menu icon listed below, at the break location of Curve 1. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 8

Break

Method:

12

Surface ID List 1

13

1

11

9

Option: Curve

10

1

Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List Solid 1.6

Break Curve List

6 Y

7

Z 1

X 5

Curve 1

-Apply-

After:

8

1 12

13

1

11

2

9 1

10

6 Y Z

7 1

X 5



Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option The Break method with the Surface option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid face at a surface location.The surface break location must intersect the surface or face on opposite edges. The surface break location can be a surface or a solid face. Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface Break

Method:

Surface ID List


2

Option: Surface



Break Surface List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

-ApplySpecify one surface break location for each surface or face specified in Surface List, either by cursor selecting it or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 10, Solid 11.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select each surface break location.

☞

More Help:


Example

➠

4


Surface Break Method At a Surface Example Creates Surface 4 and 5 by breaking Surface 1 in half with the break location of Surface 3. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 2 6

Break

Method:

Surface ID List

1

4

1

Option:

3

Surface


Y


3

4 7

Z

X

1

Break Surface List Surface 3

After: -Apply-

28 6 4 5 1

3

3

4 Y Z

X

7 1


Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option This method breaks a surface with a plane. The surface will be broken along its intersection with the plane. Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface Break

Method:

Surface ID List


2

Option:

Plane


Break Plane List

If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified in Surface List will be deleted from the database. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

-ApplySpecify the planes to break the surface. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:


4


Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option Example Creates Surfaces 3 and 4 by breaking Surface 2 in half with the break location of Plane 1. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 3

2

Break

Method:

Surface ID List

1

3

Option:

52

Plane

Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List Surface 2

Y Z

4

X 1

Break Plane List Plane 1

After: -Apply-

3

7

2

1 4

Y Z

XX1

3

5

6

4


Breaking a Surface With the Point Option The Break method with the Point option creates two or four surfaces by breaking an existing surface or solid face defined at a point location. If the point is on an edge, then two surfaces are created. If the point is located on the interior, then four surfaces are created. The point location can be a point, a node, a vertex, a curve/curve intersection or a curve/surface intersection. Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface Break

Method:

Surface ID List 2

Option:

Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified in Surface List will be deleted from the database.

Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List Surface 1 Break Point List Point 4

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

Example

☞

➠

More Help:


4


Surface Break Method At a Point Example Breaks Surface 1 into four Surfaces at Point 5. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 2

Break

Method:

Surface ID List

15

2

Option:

1 Point


3


Y Z

Break Point List

4 X

1

Point 4

After: -Apply-

2 5 3 7 5

1 6

4 2

3

Y Z

4 X

1


Surface Break Method At a Point Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at Point 4 instead of Point 5, and Surfaces 2 and 3 are created instead of four surfaces. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 2

Break

Method:

Surface ID List

15

2

Option:

1 Point


3

Auto Execute

Y


Z

Break Point List

4 X

1

Point 4

After: -Apply-

2

3 2

1

5

3 Y Z

4 X

1

4


Surface Break Method At a Vertex Example Breaks Surface 1 along the diagonal into Surfaces 2 and 3 at Point 1 which is located at the vertex of Surface 1. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 4

Break

Method:

2

Surface ID List 2

Option:

1

Point


3


Y Z

Break Point List

X

1

Point 1

After: -Apply-

4 2

23

3 Y Z

X

1


Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option The Break method using the 2 Point option creates two surfaces by breaking an existing surface or solid face defined by two point locations. The point locations must lie on opposite edges of the surface or face. The point locations can be points, nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface Break

Method:

Surface ID List


2

Option: 2 Point



Break Point 1 List

Break Point 2 List

-Apply-


Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

Specify two point break locations for each surface or face either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1 Node 10. If two vertices of the surface or face are selected, they must be diagonal from each other. The Point select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select each point location.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:


4


Surface Break Method At 2 Points Example Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 defined by Point 5 and Node 1. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 4

2

Break

Method:

5

Surface ID List 2

1

Option: 2 Point Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute

1

Surface List

Y Z

Surface 1

Break Point 1 List

2 1 1

X 3

Point 5

Break Point 2 List

After:

Node 1

4

2

-Apply-

5

3 2 1 Y Z

1 X 3

2 16

2 1


Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option The Break method with the Parametric option creates two surfaces from an existing surface or solid face. The break location is defined at the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Select either Constant u Direction or Constant v Direction. The break will either be along the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction or along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

Break

Method:

Surface ID List 1

Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.

Option: Parametric Break Direction ◆ Constant u Direction ◆ ◆ Constant v Direction Break Curve 0.0

1.0 0.5

Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of ξ 1 and ξ 2 are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form under the menu Display/Geometry.

v Parametric Value Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran If ON, after Break completes, the surfaces specified in Surface List will be deleted from the database.

• Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

4


Surface Break Method At Parametric Location u=0.25 Example Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.25 . Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is displayed. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 2

4

Break

Method:

5

Surface ID List 2

1

Option: Parametric Break Direction ◆ ◆ Constant u Direction ◆ Constant v Direction

1 Y Z

Break Curve 0.0

1.0

2 1 X 3

0.25

v Parametric Value Delete Original Surfaces

After: 4

Auto Execute

2


3 -Apply-

1 2 6 5 Y Z

2 X 3

2

11


Surface Break Method At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 . Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 4

2

Break

Method:

5

Surface ID List 2

1

Option: Parametric Break Direction ◆ Constant u Direction

1

◆ ◆ Constant v Direction

Y Z

Break Curve 0.0

1.0 0.25

2 1 X 3


After: 4

Auto Execute

62


2

-Apply-

3

1 Y Z

1 X 3

2 5

21

4


Surface Break Method On a Face At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example Breaks a face of Solid 1 by using the Surface select menu icon listed below at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 . Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 9

Break

Method:

6

Surface ID List

8

1

10

1

Option: Parametric

3 2 1 1

Break Direction ◆ Constant u Direction

7

◆ ◆ Constant v Direction

11 Y

Break Curve 0.0

X

Z

1.0

5

0.25


After: 9


2 12 1

Solid 1.6

6

82 1 -Apply-

1 1

2 10

1

3 2 1 13 11

Y Z Surface Select Menu Icon

X

5

7


Blending Surfaces The Blend method creates a set of parametric bi-cubic surfaces from an existing set of two or more surfaces or solid faces by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The set of existing surfaces or faces must share at least one edge with another surface or face in the set. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface Blend

Method:

Surface ID List 2


Blend Parameters Surface Edge List

Weighting Factors 0.5

Delete Original Surfaces Surface List

-Apply-

Specify in Surface Edge List, a surface edge that the weight factor will be applied, either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID. Example: Surface 1.2. If left blank, MSC.Patran will apply the specified weight factor to all surfaces. Specify in Weighting Factors, a value between 0.0 and 1.0 for each specified surface edge (a maximum of four per surface or face). A value of 1.0 will cause the edge to remain rigid as possible. A value of 0.0 will allow the edge to remain as flexible as possible. The default value is 0.5. If ON, after Blend completes, the surfaces specified in Surface List will be deleted from the database. Specify the surfaces or faces to blend either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

Example

➠

4


Surface Blend Method Example Blends Surfaces 1, 5, 3 and 4 with a default weight factor of 0.5 applied to all surface edges. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before:

Blend

Method:

Surface ID List

1

2

1

4

3 5

6

5

Blend Parameters

7

3

6

8 Surface Edge List

4 Y

Weighting Factors

Z

10

X

0.5


After:

Surface 1 5 3 4

1 -Apply-

4

2

6

3 7 5 6

7

8 8

9 Y Z

X

10


Surface Blend Method Example Blends Surfaces 1 through 4 with a weighting factor of 1.0 applied to two edges (highlighted in the “Before” picture). Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 1

Blend

Method:

2

1

4

Surface ID List

3

5

3 2

Blend Parameters Surface Edge List

7

5 6

Surface 3.1 4.3

8

4

Y

Weighting Factors 1.0 1.0

X

Z

9


After:

Surface 1:4

1 -Apply-

5

4

2 3 7

6

7

5

8

8 6 Y Z

X

9

4


Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces The Disassemble method operates on one or more trimmed surfaces and creates the parent surface that has the same curvature as the trimmed surface. A trimmed surface can be created either by using the Geometry Application’s Create/Surface/Trim form or by using the Create/Surface/Planar Trim form. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method: Disassemble Delete Original Surfaces

If ON, after Disassemble completes, the surfaces specified in Trimmed Surface List will be deleted from the database.

Trimmed Surface List Specify the trimmed surfaces to disassemble either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 11.

-Apply-

Example

☞

➠

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)


Surface Disassemble Method Example Operates on Surface 2 which is a general trimmed surface. Surface 3 is the new parent surface. Notice that new curves associated with Surface 2 are also created. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before:

Method: Disassemble

15

Delete Original Surfaces Trimmed Surface List

2 13

16

Surface 2

18 -Apply-

Y

Z 17

X

After:

2015 4

1 5 23

16 19

13

2 Y

18 3

Z X

17 22

21

4


Surface Disassemble Method Example Operates on Surface 1 which is a planar trimmed surface. Notice that the new parent surface, Surface 2, is also planar and that new curves associated with Surface 1 are created. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 5

8

Method: Disassemble Delete Original Surfaces

1

Trimmed Surface List

1

Surface 1

-Apply-

Y 6 Z

7

X

After: 9

5

4

1

21 5

8

12 1

3 10

6

2

Y Z

X 11

7


Matching Surface Edges Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option The Edge Match method with the 2 Surface option recreates the second surface of a specified pair that share two common vertices but has a gap or unmatched edges. The gap must be less than 10 times the Global Model Tolerance or else MSC.Patran will not close the gap. The existing pair of surfaces or faces do not need to have matching parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 orientations. This method is useful for correcting topologically incongruent surface pairs so that they are congruent before you mesh. Also see Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270). Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method: Edge Match Option: 2 Surface Auto Execute


Surface 1 List Surface 2 List

Specify the first and second surfaces or faces of the pair to match in Surface 1 List and in Surface 2 List, respectively. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not

Gap must be less than10 times the Global Model Tolerance.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)

4


Surface Edge Match Method Example Edits Surface 2 which is specified as the second surface of the pair and closes the gap between Surfaces 1 and 2. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before:

Method: Edge Match

2 Option:

3

6

2 Surface

1

Auto Execute

2


1

Surface 2 List

Z

Surface 2

4

Y

5

X

-Apply-

After:

2

3 1

1

Z

2 4

Y X

6

5


Surface Edge Match Method Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Surface 1 is specified as the second surface of the surface pair.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before:

2

3

6

Method: Edge Match Option:

1

2

2 Surface

Auto Execute

1

Surface 1 List

Y

Surface 2

Z

4

5

3

6

X


-Apply-

After:

2 1 1

Y Z

2 4

X

5

4


Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option The Edge Match method with the Surface-Point option recreates a specified surface as a trimmed surface that includes an additional cursor defined vertex point. This method is useful for correcting topologically incongruent pairs of surfaces so that they are congruent before you mesh. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method: Edge Match Option: Surface-Point Auto Execute Surface

Point List

-Apply-


Specify in the Surface listbox, the existing surfaces or faces, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces. Specify in Point List, the vertex point locations along an edge of each specified surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the vertex point location. The Vertex select menu will appear.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:



Surface Edge Match Method With Surface-Point Example Recreates Surface 1 which was a parametric bi-cubic surface, into a trimmed surface which has the vertices Points 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 so that Surface 1 is congruent with Surfaces 2 and 3. The additional vertex specified in the Point List was cursor selected at Point 5 by using the Vertex select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Before: 2

3

8

Method: Edge Match

3

Option:Surface-Point Auto Execute

1

Surface

5

6

Surface 1

Point List

2

Surface 1 (u1.000000) (v 0.4

Y Z

-Apply-

X 1

4

7

2

3

8

After:

3

1

5

6

2 Y Vertex Select Menu Icon

Z

X 1

4

7

4


Extending Surfaces Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option This form is used to extend two surfaces to their line of intersection. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit Surface Extend

Specify the extend option to use: 2 Surface To a Curve To a Plane To a Point To a Surface Percentage Fixed Length

Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only selected surfaces.

Auto Execute Surface 1 to Extend

Surface 1 Edge

Surface 2 to Extend

Surface 2 Edge

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the first surface to extend to the second surface either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the edge of the first surface to start the extension from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge. Specify the second surface to extend to the first surface either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 2. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the edge of the second surface to start the extension from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.Example: Surface 1.2. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran


Extending a Surface With the 2 Surface Option Example Extend surface 1 to the line of intersection of surface 2. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend

2 1

Y X

Z

Auto Execute Surface 1 to Extend Surface 1

Surface 1 Edge Surface 1.3

Surface 2 to Extend Surface 2 2

Surface 2 Edge

1

Surface 2.2

-ApplyY Z

X

4


Extending Surfaces to a Curve This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting curve. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend



Auto Execute Surface to Extend

Surface Edge

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting curve either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface.

Intersecting Curve

Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge.

-Apply-

Specify the Intersecting Curve to extend the surface to either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curve.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:



Extending a Surface to a Curve Example Extend Surface 1 to the edge of Surface 2. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend 1

2

Y

Auto Execute

Z

X

Surface to Extend Surface 1

Surface Edge

After:

Surface 1.3

Intersecting Curve Surface 2.4

1

-Apply-

Y Z

X

2

4


Extending Surfaces to a Plane This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting plane. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend




Surface Edge

Intersecting Plane

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting plane either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge. Specify the Intersecting Plane to extend the surface to either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1. The Plane select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate plane.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:



Extending a Surface to a Plane Example Extend Surface 1 to Plane 1. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend

1


Y X

Z

Surface 1

Surface Edge

After:

Surface 1.3

Intersecting Plane Plane 1

-Apply1

Y Z

X

4


Extending Surfaces to a Point This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting point. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend




Surface Edge

Intersecting Point

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting point either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge. Specify the Intersecting Point to extend the surface to either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Point 1. The Point select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:



Extending a Surface to a Point Example Extend Surface 1 to Point 1. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit

Before: 3

Surface

Method:

4

Extend

1


Y

Surface 1

Z

2

5

1

X

Surface Edge Surface 1.3

After:

Intersecting Point

3

6

Point 1

-Apply1

2

1

Y Z

X

4


Extending Surfaces to a Surface This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting surface. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend

Specify the extend option to use: 2 Surface To a Curve To a Plane To a Point To a Surface Percentage Fixed Length Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only selected surfaces.


Surface ID List 1

Break Intersecting Surface Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface to Extend

Surface Edge

Intersecting Surface

By default, the Intersecting Surface will be broken at the line of intersection of the two surfaces. By default, the Intersecting Surface will be deleted after the break operation which creates two new surfaces. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting surface either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge.

-ApplySpecify the Intersecting Surface to extend the surface to either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface.

Example

☞

➠

More Help:



Extending a Surface to a Surface Example Extend Surface 1 to the line of intersection of Surface 2 and break Surface 2 at the line of intersection to create Surface 3 and 4, then delete Surface 2. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend

1

2

Surface ID List Y

3

Break Intersecting Surface Delete Original Surfaces

X

Z

After:

Auto Execute Surface to Extend Surface 1

Surface Edge Surface 1.3 1

Intersecting Surface

3

Surface 2

4

-ApplyY Z

X

4


Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option This form is used to extend a surface by a percentage in the U and/or V parametric directions. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Specify the extend option to use: 2 Surface

Edit

To a Curve

Surface

Method:

To a Plane

Extend

To a Point To a Surface Percentage Fixed Length

Display Parametric Direction Percent Change of U V 100

-99

0.0

U-Min -99

This button toggles between Display Parametric Direction of the geometry in the viewport and Show Parametric Direction to visualize the parametric direction of the surface to extend. Define the percentage of u-min, u-max, v-min, and v-max to change in order to alter the parametric extents of the surface by using the slidebar or entering a value in the databox. Valid range is -99 to +100.

100 0.0

U-Max -99

100 0.0

V-Min -99

100 0.0

V-Max Reset Auto Execute

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface to extend either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface.

Surface List

-Apply-

☞

More Help:



Extending a Surface With the Percentage Option Example Extend Surface 1 by 100% in the U direction starting at U-Max = 1 and shrink Surface 1 by 50% in the V direction starting at V-Max=1. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend

1

Display Parametric Direction Percent Change of U V 100

-99

Y

0.0

U-Min

Z

-99

X

100 100.0

U-Max -99

After:

100 0.0

V-Min -99

100 -50.0

1

V-Max Reset Auto Execute Surface List Y Z

-Apply-

X

4


Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option This form is used to extend a surface by a fixed length. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend



Specify the length to extend the surface starting at the surface edge selected.

Length 1.0


Surface Edge

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface to extend either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge.

☞

More Help:



Extending a Surface With the Fixed Length Option Example Extend Surface 1 by a fixed length of 5.0 units in the X direction. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Surface

Method:

Extend

1

Length Y

5.0

Z

X


After:

Surface 1

Surface Edge Surface 1.3

-Apply-

1

Y Z

X

4


Refitting Surfaces The Refit method creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic patches from existing surfaces. The Refit Tolerance is input as the refit parameter. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method:

Refit

Surface ID List 2

Surface Type NURBS Refit Parameters

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Allows the refit surface, if the toggle is ON, to be created as a NURB Surface or a Piece Wise Rational Polynomial Surface. This depends on the Geometry Preferences (p. 296) toggle, NURBS Accelerator value.

Refit Tolerance Enter a value to define the Refit Tolerance to use for the refit process. Enter the value from the keyboard.

0.005


-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surfaces to refit. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 10.4. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

☞

More Help:



Reversing Surfaces The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by exchanging the positive ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions of the surfaces or faces. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions for the surfaces by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form found under the menu Display/Geometry. When pressed, MSC.Patran draws the positive surface normal vector for each specified surface or solid face. The positive normal direction is based on its parametrization. The normal vectors can also be shown using the Show/Surface/Attributes form.

Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method:

Reverse

If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically reverse the connectivity of the finite elements that are associated with the surfaces or faces that are specified in Surface List. If OFF, MSC.Patran retains the original connectivity of the elements.

Reverse Associated Elements Auto Execute Surface List

Draw Normal Vectors Reset Graphics -Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing surfaces or faces to reverse either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

Erases the normal vectors and reverts the model back to the last display type, such as wireframe, after a MSC.Patran form was executed, as defined on the Display menu forms.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Showing Surface Attributes (p. 588)

5


Surface Reverse Method Example Reverses the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions for Surface 1. Notice that the parametric directions are displayed on the surfaces. Also, notice that Auto Execute is not on so that you can press the Draw Normal Vectors button without executing the form. Geometry Action:

Before:

Edit

Object:

15

Surface

Method:

11

Reverse

3 Reverse Associated Elements

13

1 4

14 2

Auto Execute

10

Surface List

1

YX

Surface 3 4

2 Z

12

Draw Normal Vectors Reset Graphics

After: -Apply-

15 11 3

2

13 4

14 1 10 YX

2 Z

1 12


Sewing Surfaces The Sew method sequentially combines the actions of the Edit/ Point/ Equivalence method to equivalence surface vertices and the Edit/ Surface/Edge Match method to merge edges. The composite action is a "sewing" of the surfaces. Vertices and edges are both equivalenced according to the restrictions of the previously mentioned methods; however, since the operation is sequential, vertices will already be equivalenced before doing the edge merging. Geometry Action: Edit Object: Surface Method: Sew Surface List

Specify the surfaces to sew. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

-Apply-

Gap must be less than10 times the Global Model Tolerance.

5


Surface Sew Method Example Edits surfaces 1 and 2 by closing the gap between edges which share common vertices. Geometry

Before:

Action: Edit Object: Surface Method: Sew Surface List Surface 1 2

2

3 1

-Apply-

1

2 4

Y Z

6

5

X

After:

2

3 1

1

Z

2 4

Y X

6

5


Trimming Surfaces to an Edge This form is used to trim a Surface with one of its edges and optionally delete the surface with the smallest surface area after the trim. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit Surface Trim By Default, Delete Sliver Surface toggle is on which will delete the surface with the smallest surface area as a result of the trim operation.

Delete Sliver Surface Auto Execute Surface to Trim

Trimming Edge

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface to trim from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the edge of the surface to trim the surface with either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge.

☞

More Help:


5


Trim Surface To Edge Example Trim the sliver from surface 5 by selecting the surface edge surface 5.4. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Surface

Method:

Trim

Delete Sliver Surface

5

Auto Execute Surface to Trim Surface 5

Trimming Edge Z

Surface 5.4

-Apply-

Y X

After:

5

Z Y X


Adding a Fillet to a Surface This form facilitates the creation of a fillet edge between two existing edges sharing a given vertex. This operation, when successful will replace the input vertex with a new edge. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method:

Add Fillet

Fillet Radius Fillet Radius specifies the real value of the fillet to be created between edges sharing a given vertex.

0.5 Auto Execute Vertex List

Trimmed Surface

Trimmed Surface identifies the surface that is to be modified. Note that only one surface will be processed at a time. Vertex List identifies the vertices that are to be replaced by fillet edges.

-Apply-

5


Removing Edges from Surfaces Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option This form allows the user to remove a given edge of a trimmed surface. This process differs from the vertex removal function which was topological in nature. This operation is both topological and geometrical in that the shape of the trimmed surface will be altered as well as the topology. The edges adjacent to the removed edge will be extended until they intersect. This intersection must take place within the domain of the parent surface. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method: Remove Edge Option:

Edge

Auto Execute

This option allows the user to identify the specific edges of a surface that he wishes removed.

Edge List

Trimmed Surface

Edge List contains the edges to be removed. Trimmed Surface identifies the surface to be modified. Note that only a single surface may be processed for each application.

-Apply-


Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option This form allows the user to automatically remove all edges whose length is less than a specified value. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method: Remove Edge Option: Edge Length Min Edge Length

This option allows the user to specify a minimum edge length. This results in the removal of all edges whose length is smaller than this value.

Auto Execute Trimmed Surface

Min Edge Length - all edges shorter than this are to be removed. Trimmed Surface - identifies the surface to be modified.

-Apply-

5


Adding a Hole to Surfaces Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option The Add Hole method using the Center Point option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The circular hole is defined in the tangent plane of the supplied, manifolded center point. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method: Option:

Add Hole

Used to express the options available for adding a hole. Options are Center Point, Project Vector, and Inner Loop.

Center Point

Hole Radius 1.0

Loop Interference Checker Auto Execute Center Point List

Surface

Specify the Hole Radius. If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = ON By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the center point for each circular hole either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1. The Point select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

-Apply-

Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 10.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface location.

☞

More Help:



Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Center Point Option Example This will add nine circular holes to surface 1 using points 52:60. Warning messages will be generated for the other points due to interference of holes at these points with surface edges. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit

Before:

Surface

Method:

Add Hole

Option:

Center Point

38

39

48

58

59

60

51

47

55

1 56

57

50

46

52

53

54

49

Hole Radius .0625

Loop Interference Checker Auto Execute Center Point List Point 37:40 46:60

Y

Surface

Z

37

40

X

Surface 1

After: -Apply38

Y Z

48

58

47

55

46

52

37

X

39

73

70

67

59

1 56

53

74

71

68

60

57

54

75

72

69

51

50

49

40

5


Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option The Add Hole method using the Projection Vector option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The circular hole is defined in the plane of the supplied vector and vector-projected onto the surface. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:


Add Hole

Option:

Project Vector

Hole Radius 1.0

Loop Interference Checker Auto Execute Vector List

Center Point List

Specify the Hole Radius. If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = ON By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the projection vector for each circular hole either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 Coord 0.3. The Vector select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors. Specify the center point for each circular hole either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1. The Point select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

Surface

-Apply-

Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 10.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface location.

☞

More Help:



Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Project Vector Option Example This will add two holes to surface 6 using points 78 and 82 and the projection vector defined by the x axis of Coordinate Frame 0. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit

Before:

Surface

Method:

Add Hole

Option:

77

Project Vector

75

82

Hole Radius 78

.0625

Loop Interference Checker Auto Execute

76

74

Vector List Coord 0.1

Y

Center Point List

X

Z

Point 78 82

Surface

After:

Surface 6

77

-Apply8285 86

83 78 84

76

Y Z

X

74

75

5


Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option The Add Hole method using the Inner Loop option adds a hole to a Surface. The hole is defined by the supplied closed, chained curves which will define inner loops for the creation of a Trimmed Surface. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method:

Add Hole

Option:

Inner Loop

Hole Radius


The Hole Radius databox is disabled for this option.

1.0

Loop Interference Checker Auto Execute Inner Loop List

Surface

-Apply-

If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = OFF By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify a closed, chained curve (inner loop) for each hole either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1. The Curve select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves. Note: The Inner Loop List must consist of closed, chained curves. For curves that are closed, but not circles or chains, use the Create,Curve,Chain method to define a valid inner loop. Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 10.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface location.

☞

More Help:



Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Inner Loop Option Example This will add 5 new holes to surface 6 using curves 14, 15, 16, 29, and 30. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit

Before:

Surface

Method:

Add Hole

Option:

Inner Loop 16

Hole Radius

17

15

1.0 14

Loop Interference Checker

29 6

Auto Execute

30

Inner Loop List Curve 14:17 29 30

Surface

Y

Surface 6

Z

-Apply-

X

After:

17

6

Y Z

X

5


Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces The Remove Hole method removes a hole from a Trimmed Surface. The hole to remove can be any edge-curves which are inner loops of a Trimmed Surface. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method: Remove Hole Auto Execute Inner Loop List

Trimmed Surface

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the edge-curve (inner loop) for each hole either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.1. The Curve select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate edge-curves. Specify the trimmed surface by either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface location.

☞

More Help:



Removing a Hole from a Trimmed Surface Example This will remove all the small inner loops from surface 2. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Surface

Method: Remove Hole Auto Execute Inner Loop List Surface 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4

Trimmed Surface Surface 4

-Apply-

Y Z

X

After:

4

Y Z

X

5


Adding a Vertex to Surfaces The Add Vertex method adds a vertex to a surface. The point used to create a vertex can be any point which is on the edge of the selected surface. If a hardpoint is converted to a surface vertex in the process of adding a vertex to a surface, then this point(vertex) cannot be reassociated to the surface as a hardpoint. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit Surface Add Vertex


By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the point for each vertex either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point. The Point select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

Surface

-Apply-

Specify the surface by either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface location.

☞

More Help:



Adding a Vertex to a Surface Example This will add a vertex to surface 2 using point 3. The result is surface 2 becomes a trimmed surface with five vertices. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit 5

Surface

Method:

6

Add Vertex

Auto Execute

2

3

Point List 2

Point 3

Surface

1

Surface 2

Y1

-Apply-

Z

4

7

5

6

X

After:

2

3 2 1

Y1 Z

4 X

7

5


Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces The Remove Vertex method removes a vertex from a Trimmed Surface. The vertex to remove can be any vertex of a Trimmed Surface with the exception that one vertex per loop must remain. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Surface

Method: Remove Vertex

By default, Delete Associated Point is ON which means that all points associated to a vertex to be removed and that is not volatile to the trimmed surface will be deleted.

Delete Associated Point Auto Execute Vertex List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the vertices by either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.1.1. The vertex select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select each vertex location.

☞

More Help:


Removing a Vertex from a Trimmed Surface Example This will remove vertex 3.4.2 from trimmed surface 3. The result is a parametric bicubic surface.



Edit

Before:

Surface

42

45

43

Method: Remove Vertex Delete Associated Point Auto Execute Vertex List

3

Surface 3.4.2

-ApplyY 41 Z

44

X

After: 42

43

3

Y Z

41 X

44

5


6.5

Editing Solids Breaking Solids Breaking Solids with the Point Option The Break method with the Point option breaks an existing solid into two or four smaller solids at a point location. The point location can be on or within the solid. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Break


Solid ID List 1

Option:

Point

Delete Original Solids Auto Execute Solid List

Break Point List

-Apply-

Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface. If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Solid List the existing solids to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids. Specify in Break Point List the point break location, either by cursor selecting the point location or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. The Point select menu will appear. If the point location is on the face, four solids will be created. If it is on an edge, two solids will be created. And if it is inside the solid, eight solids will be created.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)


Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example Breaks Solid 1 into eight solids by referencing Point 9. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 8 7

Break

Solid ID List 2

Option:

Point

2 3


9 5

Y Z1

Solid 1

1

6

X 4


After: -Apply-

8 12

19 2 27 Y Z1

26 7 18 3 6

17 16 313 15 5149 5

25 24 9 8 23 X 22 28 4

2

11

10

4 20

21

7

6

5


Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on a face instead of inside of Solid 1, and four solids are created instead of eight. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 7 6

Break

9

Solid ID List

3

2

2 Option:

Point

1


Y X4

Solid 1

8 Z

5 1


After: -Apply-

7

17 6

15 3 10

9

2 3

13 5

2

Y X4 Z 11

4

8 16 1

14 12

18 5


Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on an edge instead of on a face of Solid 1, and two solids are created instead of four. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Before:

Edit

7

Solid

6

Break

Solid ID List 2

9

3 2

Option:

Point

1


Y X4

Solid 1

8 Z

5 1


After: 7

-Apply-

6 11 9

3 2

3 2 Y X4

8 Z 12 1

10

5

5


Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option The Break method with the Parametric option creates two, four or eight solids from an existing solid. The break location is defined at the solid’s parametric ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 coordinate locations where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Break Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List 1

Option: Parametric

Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.

Break Point 0.0

1.0 0.5


1.0 0.5

v Parametric Value 0.0

1.0 0.5

w Parametric Value Delete Original Solids Auto Execute Solid List

-Apply -

Specify the solid’s ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) and ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate values of the Break Point, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. If the break point will be located on the solid’s face, four solids will be created. If it is on an edge, two solids will be created. And if it is inside the solid, eight solids will be created. The directions of ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 are defined by the solid’s connectivity. You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form under the menu Display/Geometry.


Break Point 0.0

1.0 0.5


1.0 0.5


1.0 0.5

w Parametric Value

If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database.


-Apply -


Specify the solids to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.

☞

More Help:


5


Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example Breaks Solid 1 into eight smaller solids at ξ 1 = 0.5 , ξ 2 = 0.5 , and ξ 3 = 0.5 . Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is displayed. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit

8

Solid

Method:

7

Break

Solid ID List 2

10

Option: Parametric

11

Break Point 0.0

1.0 0.5


3 5 1

Y

6 Z9

1.0

1 2

X 12

0.5


After:

1.0 0.5

8

w Parametric Value

27

7

Delete Original Solids Auto Execute

24

Solid List

3 217 8 131

21636 1

28

Solid 1

3425 3 213 2 2183 1 211 1 19 23 2143 5 3 Y 1 5 215 261 3 21 Z 9 X 20 12

29

10

-Apply -

2193 1 7 30 22

6


Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example This example is similar to the previous example, except ξ 1 = 0 instead of ξ 1 = 0.5 , and Surface 1 is broken into four solids instead of eight. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 8 7

Break

Solid ID List 2

10

Option: Parametric

1 2

11

Break Point 0.0

1.0 0.0


3 5 1

Y

6 X

Z9

12

1.0 0.5


After:

1.0 0.5

2

w Parametric Value

3

Delete Original Solids

15

Auto Execute

2 3 9 3 1

Solid List Solid 1

6 -Apply -

17 Y Z

5X

10

2 312157 2 418 3111

16

2 2 31 1

13

14 8

4

5


Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example This example is similar to the first example, except ξ 1 = 0 and ξ 2 = 0 instead of ξ 1 = 0.5 and ξ 2 = 0.5 , and Surface 1 is broken into two solids instead of eight. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Before: 8

Method:

7

Break

Solid ID List 2

Option: Parametric

10

0.0

1.0

3 5 1

Y

0.0

6


1 2

11

Break Point

X

Z9

1.0

12

0.0


After:

1.0 0.5

2

w Parametric Value

3 Delete Original Solids

10

Auto Execute

11

Solid List Solid 1

6 -Apply -

7 3

5X

2 31 1

2 39 1

Y Z

2

4 8

12


Breaking Solids with the Curve Option The Break method with the Curve option breaks an existing solid into two solids at a curve break location. The curve location must completely lie on and bisect a face of the solid. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Break

Solid ID List


4

Option:

Curve


Break Curve List

-Apply-

If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Solid List, the solids to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids. Specify in Break Curve List, the curve break location, either by cursor selecting the location or by entering the ID from the keyboard. The Curve select menu will appear.

☞

More Help:


5


Solid Break Method with the Curve Option Example Breaks Solids 2 and 3 into two solids each at Curve 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Before:

Solid

Method:

Break

16

Solid ID List

10 14 18

4

Option:

17

15

9

Curve

31

2


Y

Solid List

Z

Solid 2 3

13 1

X

12

20

11 19

3

Break Curve List Curve 1

After: -Apply-

17

15

9 16

10 14 18 4 24

6 122

23 7 21 Y Z

X

13 1 3

5 20

12 11 19


Breaking Solids with the Plane Option The method breaks a solid with a plane. The solid will be broken along its intersection with the plane. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Break

Solid ID List


2

Option:

Plane


Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface. If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database.

Solid List Specify the solids to be broken.

Solid 1 Break Plane List Point 9

-Apply-

Specify the planes to break the surface. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.


☞

More Help:


5


Breaking a Solid with the Plane Option Example Creates Solids 2 and 3 by breaking Solid 1 along its intersection with Plane 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 3

2

Break

9

Solid ID List

1 11

7

6

2

1

Option:

Plane


4

12

1 13

10


Y

Solid 1

Break Plane List Plane 1

Z

8

5

X

After: 3

-Apply-

2

7

6 2 10 1

14

Y X Z

5

9

13

1 11

12 3 8

4


Breaking Solids with the Surface Option The Break method with the Surface option breaks an existing solid into two smaller solids at a surface break location. The surface break location must completely pass through the solid. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Break


Solid ID List Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.

4

Option: Surface

If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database.


Break Surface List

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Solid List, the solids to break either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids. Specify in Break Surface List, the surface break location, either by cursor selecting the location or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. The Surface select menu will appear.

☞

More Help:


5


Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Example Breaks Solid 1 into two solids at Surface 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Before: 2

3

Method:

1

4

Break

11

Solid ID List 2

12

11

10 Option: Surface Delete Original Solids Auto Execute Solid List Solid 1

9

6

Y 7 Z X

5 8


After: -Apply-

2

1

3

4 2 13

14 16

15 3 6 Y

7 Z X

5 8


Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Between Two Surfaces Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that the solid is defined by Surfaces 2 and 3 by using the Solid select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before:

3

22

Break

1

4

11

Solid ID List 2

Option: Surface

12

1

10


9

Auto Execute

6

Y

Solid List Construct 2SurfaceSolid(Eva

5

3

7 Z X

8


After: -Apply-

2

3

1

4 2

13

14 16

15 3 6 Y Solid Select Menu Icon

7 Z X

5 8

5


Blending Solids The Blend method creates a set of parametric tri-cubic solids from an existing set of two or more solids, such that the first derivative continuity is maintained across the surface boundaries between adjacent solids. The existing solids can have any parametrization, but they must share common faces. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Blend

Solid ID List 1

Blend Parameters Weighting Factors 1.0

Delete Original Solids Solid List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Enter n-1 Weighting Factors of solid i relative to solid i+1. By default, a value of 1.0 will cause all solids to receive equal weight. A large value (~1E+6) will cause the first solid of the solid pair to dominate the slope. A small value (~1E-6) will cause the second solid of the pair to dominate the slope. If ON, after Blend completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database. Specify the solids to blend either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11 13. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.

-Apply-

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)


Solid Blend Method Example Creates Solids 4, 5 and 6 by blending Solids 1, 2 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solids 1, 2 and 3 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 2 6

Blend

8

Solid ID List

13

1 11

5

2 37 1

Blend Parameters Weighting Factors

10 Y

1.0


15 22 39 1

12

17

16

X

Z

2 31413 18

Solid List Solid 1 2 3

After: -Apply-

2 6 8 13

4 11

2 7 3 1

25 39 1

10 Y Z

15 2 31416

12 X

17

16 18

5


Solid Blend Method Example This example is similar to the previous example, except that weighting factors, 1e6 and 1e-6, are used so that Solids 1 and 3 dominate the slope. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Blend

Before: 2 6 8

Solid ID List 5

13

1 11

2 7 3 1

Blend Parameters Weighting Factors

10 Y

1e6 1e-6


15 22 39 1

12

17

16

X

Z

2 31413 18

Solid List Solid 1 2 3

After: -Apply-

2 6 8 13

4 11

2 37 1

5 2 39 1

10 Y Z

15 2 31416

12 X

17

16 18


Disassembling B-rep Solids The Disassemble method operates on one or more boundary represented (B-rep) solids and breaks them into the original surfaces that composed each B-rep solid. A B-rep solid can be created by the Geometry Application’s Create/Solid/B-rep form. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Solid

Method: Disassemble Convert to Simply Trimmed Delete Original Solids Solid List

-Apply-

By Default, Convert to Simply Trimmed toggle is on which will convert all surfaces to Simply Trimmed (green) surfaces that satisfy the requirements for a “green” surface. These surfaces can be used for creating TriParametric Solids (blue). By default, Delete Original Solids toggle is ON which means that the original B-rep Solid will be deleted after it has been disassembled. Specify the solid(s) to disassemble from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 1. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solid.

☞

More Help:


5


Disassemble a B-rep Solid Example Disassemble solid 1 into its constituent surfaces and convert all possible surfaces into Simply Trimmed surfaces (green). If “Conver to Simply Trimmed” toggle was OFF, the resulting surfaces would maintain their original type; (magenta). Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Edit Solid

Method: Disassemble Convert to Simply Trimmed Delete Original Solids 1

Solid List Solid 1

-ApplyY X

Z

After:

44 26 2728 15 29 17

48 14 10 9

40 4546 18 21 20 16 31

33

Z

X

22 2324

12 47

Y

25

19 2 8 3 1 35

30

13

41 4243 11 5 7 32 6 4 34 39

37

38

36


Refitting Solids Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid. Geometry Geometry Action: Edit Object:

Solid

Method:

Refit

Solid ID List 1

Option:


To TriCubicNet

Refit Parameters u Density 1

v Density

The To TriCubicNet option creates uniformly parametrized Piecewise Cubic solids from existing solids. The u,v, and w Grid Density is input as the Refit Parameters. The solid must satisfy the requirement of having 5 or 6 faces and no interior regions on any face. Enter values to define the u,v,w Grid Density of the new solids. Enter the value from the keyboard.

1

w Density

If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database.

1


-Apply-


Specify the solids to refit. Either cursor select the solids or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 1 5. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Solids (p. 24) • Building B-rep Solids (p. 40) • Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338)

5


Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Solid

Method:

Refit

Solid ID List 1


Option: To TriParametric Refit Parameters Refit Tolerance

The To TriParametric option creates uniformly parametrized tri-cubic solids from existing solids. The solid must satisfy the requirement of having 5 or 6 faces and no interior regions on any face.

0.005


-Apply-

Enter a value specifying the tolerance to use for refitting the solids. If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.


☞

More Help:



Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid. Geometry Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Solid

Method:

Refit

Solid ID List 1

Option:


To Parasolid

Refit Parameters

The To Parasolid option creates Parasolid B-rep solids from existing non Parasolid solids.

Refit Tolerance 0.005


-Apply-

Enter a value specifying the tolerance to use for refitting the solids. If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid List will be deleted from the database. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.


☞

More Help:


5


Reversing Solids The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of solids by exchanging the positive ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions of the solids. Then, to maintain a positive parametric frame, MSC.Patran translates the parametric origin up the original ξ 3 axis and then reverses the ξ 3 direction. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions for the solids by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form found under the menu Display/Geometry. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Reverse


-Apply-


Specify the solids to reverse either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 11 20.

☞

More Help:

• Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions


Solid Reverse Method Example Reverses the parametric directions for Solid 1 (only the top half of Solid 1 is shown). Notice that the parametric origin is relocated. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Solid

Method:

Reverse

Before: 11

Auto Execute

7

10

3

Solid List

1

6

Solid 1

2 -Apply-

X

Y

Z

1

After: 11

7

2 3

10

6

1 X Z

Y 1

5


Solid Boolean Operation Add This form is used to perform a Solid boolean of “Add”. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit Solid Boolean

Solid ID List 1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Specify the boolean operation type: 1. Add 2. Subtract 3. Intersect Specify the solids to perform an Add Boolean operation on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.

Solid List

Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)

-Apply-

This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after the boolean operation is completed. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.

☞

More Help:



Solid Boolean Operation Add Example Add Solids 2 and 3 to Solid 1. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit

Before:

Solid

Method:

Boolean

Solid ID List 8

Solid List Solid 1:3


-Apply-

Y X

Z

After:

Y Z

X

5


Solid Boolean Operation Subtract This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Subtract”. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit Solid Boolean

Solid ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Specify the boolean operation type: 1. Add

1

2. Subtract 3. Intersect

Auto Execute Target Solid

Subtracting Solid List

Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) -Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the target solid to perform a Subtract Boolean operation on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solid. Specify the solid(s) to subtract from the Target Solid either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids. This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after the boolean operation is completed. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.

☞

More Help:



Solid Boolean Operation Subtract Example Subtract solids 2 and 3 from solid 1. Geometry Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Before:

Solid

Method:

Boolean

Solid ID List 1

Auto Execute Target Solid Solid 1 Y

Subtracting Solid List

Z

X

Solid 2 3


After:

-Apply-

Y Z

X

5


Solid Boolean Operation Intersect This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Intersect”. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit Solid Boolean

Solid ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. Specify the boolean operation type: 1. Add

1

2. Subtract 3. Intersect

Auto Execute Target Solid

Intersecting Solid List


-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the target solid to perform a Intersect Boolean operation on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solid. Specify the solid(s) to intersect with the Target Solid either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids. This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after the boolean operation is completed. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.

☞

More Help:



Solid Boolean Operation Intersect Example Intersect solids 2 and 3 with solid Geometry Geometry Action: Edit Object: Method:

Before:

Solid Boolean

Solid ID List 1

Auto Execute Target Solid solid 1 Y

Intersecting Solid List

X

Z

solid 2 3


After:

-Apply-

Y Z

X

5


Creating Solid Edge Blends Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges This form is used to create a constant radius edge blend on an edge(s) of a solid. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Solid

Method: Edge Blend

Specify which of the two Edge Blend types to create: 1. Constant Radius 2. Chamfer

Blend Parameters Constant Radius

Specify the constant radius for the blend.

0.25 Specify which of the three options to create an edge blend from:

Edges to Blend

1. Edge - Create blend on the input edge(s). 2. Face - Create blend on all edges of the input face(s). 3. Solid - Create blend on all edges of the input solid(s).

Auto Execute Solid Edge List



Specify the edge(s) of a solid which are to blended, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid 10.1.1), or cursor define the edge locations using the Edge Select Menu.

-Apply-

This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after the edge blend is created. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the edge blend operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.

☞

More Help:



Creating Constant Radius Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example Create an Edge Blend of Radius 0.25 on Solid 7 edges Solid 7.1.5 7.3.6 7.11.1 and 7.3.1. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit

Before:

Solid

Method: Edge Blend

Blend Parameters Constant Radius 0.25

Edges to Blend Z Y X

Auto Execute Solid Edge List Solid 7.1.5 7.3.6 7.11.1 7.

After:


Z Y X

5


Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges This form is used to create a constant angle chamfer on an edge(s) of a solid. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit Solid

Method: Edge Blend

Specify which of the two Edge Blend types to create: 1. Constant Radius 2. Chamfer

Chamfer Parameters

Specify the chamfer size on the face to offset.

Offset Specify the chamfer angle.

0.25

Angle

Specify which of the three options to create a chamfer from:

45.0

1. Edge - Create chamfer on the input edge(s). 2. Face - Create chamfer on all edges of the input face(s).

Edges to Blend

Auto Execute Solid Edge List

3. Solid - Create chamfer on all edges of the input solid(s).

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the edge(s) of a solid which are to be chamfered, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid 10.1.1), or cursor define the edge locations using the Edge Select Menu.


-Apply-

This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after the edge blend is created. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the edge blend operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.

☞

More Help:



Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example Create Chamfers with offset of 0.02 and angle of 45 degrees on Solid 1 edges Solid 1.1.3 1.1.12 1.1.6 1.1.4 1.2.4 and 1.4.4. Geometry Action: Object:

Edit

Before:

Solid

Method: Edge Blend

Z 1

Y X

Chamfer Parameters Offset 0.02

Angle 45.0

Z Y X

Edges to Blend

Auto Execute

After:

Solid Edge List Solid 1.1.3 1.1.12 1.1.6 1.

Z Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)

1

-Apply-

Z Y X

Y X

5


Imprinting Solid on Solid This form is used to imprint solid bodies on solid bodies.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the solids to imprint onto a solid body either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 1. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.

Specify the solids to be imprinted onto either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.

This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after the imprinting is completed. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the imprinting operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.

☞

More Help:



Imprint Solid on Solid Example Imprint Solid Cylinders 2 and 3 onto the faces of Solid Block 1. The Cylinders have been deleted to show the results of the imprint.

Before:

3

1 2

Y X

Z

After:

1

Y Z

X

5


Solid Shell Operation This form is used to create a void in a solid by shelling the selected faces. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit Solid Shell

Specify the wall thickness of the resulting solid to be edited.

Thickness 0.25

Auto Execute


Solid Face List Specify the face(s) of a solid to be shelled, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid 10.1), or cursor define the face locations using the Face Select Menu.


This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after the shelling is completed. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the shelling operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.

☞

More Help:



Solid Shell Operation Example Shell solids 1t4 with a wall thickness=0.25 using faces solid 4.1 4.2 3.6 2.1 2.4 2.5 1.4 and 1.2. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Edit

Before:

Solid Shell

Thickness 0.25

Auto Execute Solid Face List

Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) Y

-ApplyX

Z

After:

Y X

Z

5


6.6

Editing Features Suppressing a Feature The Edit,Feature,Suppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that can be suppressed from the geometric model. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Feature

Method:

Suppress

Filter Feature List

*

The “Filter” button and databox widgets are used to filter the features to be displayed in the Feature List. Enter the filter string in the databox and then either select the “Filter” button or press the return key.

Select which features to suppress from the Feature List. Selecting a feature name will highlight the feature in the MSC.Patran viewport for easy identification.

Geometric Entity List

-Apply-

When a geometric entity is selected in the MSC.Patran viewport, the geometric id will be echoed in the selectdatabox and the feature name that the geometric entity is associated with will be highlighted in the Feature List.


Unsuppressing a Feature The Edit,Feature,Unsuppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that can be unsuppressed from the geometric model. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Feature

Method: Unsuppress Filter Feature List

*


Select which features to unsuppress from the Feature List.

-Apply-

5


Editing Feature Parameters The Edit,Feature,Parameters method displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the geometric model based on the new parameter values. Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Feature

Method: Parameters Filter * Feature List [Unassociated Parameters]


Select which features to edit from the Feature List. Selecting a feature name will highlight the feature in the MSC.Patran viewport for easy identification. Multiple features can be selected. A parameters subform will be displayed for each feature selected, showing the features parameters and their values. The Unassociated Parameters entry is displayed whenever there are parameters available for editing that are not directly associated to a feature.

Geometric Entity List

-Apply-

When a geometric entity is selected in the MSC.Patran viewport, the geometric id will be echoed in the selectdatabox and the feature name that the geometric entity is associated with will be highlighted in the Feature List.


Feature Parameter Definition The Feature Parameter Definition form allows the parameters of a CAD feature to be displayed and modified for regeneration of a CAD model. When the “Definition” column of a parameter is selected, the definition is copied to the “Input Parameter Definition” databox for editing. Once the definition is modified, press return to update the “Definition” column with the new parameter definition. When all the desired parameter definitions are modified, press the OK button to save the changes.

Feature Parameter Definition Input Parameter Definition

Feature BLOCK(0) BLOCK(0) CYLINDER>

Description Size X SIZE Y Diameter

Name p8 p10 p9

OK

Definition Value 0.55 0.55000001 p8 * 0.75 0.41249999 0.25 0.25

Reset

Cancel

Feature: Identifies which feature a parameter belongs to. Description: Describes the feature type. Name: The name of the parameter in the CAD system. This is the left-hand side of the expression for the feature. Definition: This is the right-hand side of the expression for the feature which is editable. Value: The value of the parameter.

5



CHAPTER

7

Show Actions

■ Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods ■ The Show Action Information Form ■ Showing Point Locations ■ Showing Point Distance ■ Showing the Nodes on a Point ■ Showing Curve Attributes ■ Showing Curve Arc ■ Showing Curve Angle ■ Showing Curve Length Range ■ Showing the Nodes on a Curve ■ Showing Surface Attributes ■ Showing Surface Area Range ■ Showing the Nodes on a Surface ■ Showing Surface Normals ■ Showing Solid Attributes ■ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes ■ Showing Plane Attributes ■ Showing Vector Attributes


7.1

Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods Figure 7-1 Object

Method

Description

❏ Location

Shows the coordinate value locations for a list of specified points or vertices. You may enter a reference coordinate system ID to express the coordinate values within.

❏ Distance

Shows the distance and the x, y and z offsets between one or more pairs of points and/or vertices.

❏ Node

Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified point or vertex that is within the Global Model Tolerance value.

❏ Attributes

Lists the geometric type, length, and starting and ending points for a list of specified curves or edges.

❏ Arc

Shows the total number of Arcs in the model, total number of Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling tolerance.

❏ Angle

Shows the angle between two curves for a list of specified curves or edges.

❏ Length Range

Shows the Start and End Point, Length, and Type for a list of specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and Maximum Curve Length Range specified.

❏ Node

Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified curve or edge that is within the Global Model Tolerance value.

❏ Attributes

Lists the number of vertices and edges associated with each specified surface or solid face, as well as the area and geometric type.

❏ Area Range

Shows the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for a list of specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area Range specified.

❏ Node

Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified surface or solid face that is within the Global Model Tolerance value.

Solid

❏ Attributes

Lists the number of vertices, surfaces (or faces) associated with each specified solid, as well as the solid’s volume and geometric type.

Coord

❏ Attributes

Shows the ID, the xyz coordinate location of the origin and the type for each specified coordinate frame.

Plane

❏ Attributes

Vector

❏ Attributes

Point

Curve

Surface

CHAPTER 7 Show Actions

The Show Action Information Form When a Show action is executed, MSC.Patran will display a spreadsheet form at the bottom of the screen. This form displays information on the geometric entities that were specified on the Show action form. Cells on the form that have a dot (.), means there is additional information associated with that cell. If a cell with the dot is pressed with the cursor, associated information is displayed in the textbox at the bottom of the form.

The dot means there is additional information associated with the particular cell. The additional information can be displayed in the textbox below by pressing the cell with the cursor.

Show Information Entity ID

• • •

Title 1

Title 2

Title 2

7

2.

1.

0.

8

2.

2.

0.

9

3.

2.

0.

Reference CID

• (Global) Recta • (Global) Recta • (Global) Recta

Reset

This is a scrollable textbox. Information associated with a cell is displayed here. You can copy and paste information from this textbox into any MSC.Patran form. Copy the information by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor over the information. Place the cursor over a databox in another MSC.Patran form and press the middle mouse button to paste the information.

☞

Cancel

Reset erases the information stored in the form. Cancel will make the form disappear.

More Help:

• Show Point Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 572) • Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 574) • Show Point/Surface Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 576) • Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet (p. 585)

5


7.2

Showing Points Showing Point Locations Setting Object to Point and Info to Location will show for a list of specified point locations, the coordinate value locations that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame. Point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Point Location

Point Summary Last ID: 0 Total in Model: 0 Total in 'default_group' : 0 Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Refer. Coordinate Frame

The Point Summary table shows: The last (or highest) point ID used in the database. The total number of points in the database. The total number of points in the current group. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

You can specify an alternate coordinate frame ID for the Reference Coordinate Frame. MSC.Patran will display the point or vertex location within the specified Reference Coordinate Frame. Default is the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Coord 0


Apply


Specify the points, vertices or nodes either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 5 10, Node 10, Surface 5.5.3. The Point select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the point locations.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)


Showing Point Distance Showing Point Distance with the Point Option Show the distance between two points. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and point location data for each point pair. The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point

Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Point Distance

Point Summary Last ID: 0 Total in Model: 0

The Point Summary table shows:

Total in 'default_group' : 0

The total number of points in the database.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999

The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Option: Point

The last (or highest) point ID used in the database. The total number of points in the current group.

Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance information is to be shown (example Coord 3). Defaults to the Default Coordinate Frame preference.


Auto Execute


First Point List Point 2 Second Point List

Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Surface 4.2.1); or by cursor selecting them by using the Point select menu.

Curve 7.1

☞ Apply

Upon execution, the Show Point Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 572) form is launched.

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

5


Show Point Distance Information Spreadsheet Page 1 of 3 Show Point Distance Information To Point ID

From Point ID

•

.2

•

Distance

Curve 7.1

Page

1

7.34937645

of 3

Delta

Reference CID Cancel

Reset <1.23 3.45 2.13> • (Global) Rectan>

Distance

Reset

Cancel

Page 2 of 3 Show Point Distance Information From Point ID

To Point ID

Direction Cosines


Reset

Page 3 of 3 Show Point Distance Information From Point ID

To Point ID

From Location

To Location


Cell Callback Actions From Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

To Point ID


Reference CID

Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other columns

Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays the long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox.

Reset


Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option Show the distance between point/curve pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/curve pair. The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with the


Show Point Distance





Tolerance: 0.0049999999


Option: Curve




Auto Execute




Curve 7

☞ Apply

Upon execution, the Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 574) form is launched.

More Help:


5


Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet Page 1 of 4 Show Point/Curve Distance Information From Curve ID

To Point ID

•

.2

•

Minimum Distance

7

Page

7.34937645

1

of 4


Delta


Distance

Reset

Cancel

Page 2 of 4 Show Point/Curve Distance Information To Point ID

From Curve ID

Direction Cosines

Angle to Curve


Reset

Page 3 of 4 Show Point /Curve Distance Information To Point ID

From Curve ID

Point Location

Min Point Location


Reset

Page 4 of 4 Show Point/Curve Distance Information To Point ID

From Curve ID

Parametric Loc


Cell Callback Actions From Point ID


From Curve ID

Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID

Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other Columns

Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays the long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the curve where the minimum distance occurs.

Reset


Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option Show the distance between point/surface pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/surface pair. The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option,


Show Point Distance





Tolerance: 0.0049999999


Option: Surface Refer. Coordinate Frame



Coord 0

Auto Execute




Surface 7

☞ Apply

Upon execution, the Show Point/Surface Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 576) form is launched.

More Help:


5


Show Point/Surface Distance Information Spreadsheet Page 1 of 4 Show Point/Surface Distance Information From Surface ID

To Point ID

•

.2

•

Minimum Distance

7

Page

7.34937645

1

of 4


Delta


Distance

Reset

Cancel

Page 2 of 4 Show Point/Surface Distance Information To Point ID

From Surface ID

Direction Cosines

Angle to Normal


Reset

Page 3 of 4 Show Point /Surface Distance Information To Point ID

From Surface ID

Point Location

Min Point Location


Reset

Page 4 of 4 Show Point/Surface Distance Information To Point ID

From Surface ID

Parametric Loc


Reset

Cell Callback Actions To Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

From Surface ID

Highlights the surface using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the surface (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID

Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other columns

Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface where the minimum distance occurs.


Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option Show the distance between point/Plane pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/plane pair. The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with


Show Point Distance





Tolerance: 0.0049999999


Option: Plane Refer. Coordinate Frame



Coord 0

Auto Execute


Point List Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Plane 4.2.1); or by cursor selecting them by using the Point select menu.

Point 2 Plane List Plane 7

☞ Apply


More Help:


5


Show Point/Curve Vector Information Spreadsheet Page 1 of 4 Show Point/Vector Distance Information From Vector ID

To Point ID

•

.2

•

Minimum Distance

7

Page

7.34937645

1

of 4


Delta


Distance

Reset

Cancel

Page 2 of 4 Show Point/Vector Distance Information To Point ID

From Vector ID

Direction Cosines

Angle to Normal


Reset

Page 3 of 4 Show Point /Vector Distance Information To Point ID

From Vector ID

Point Location

Min Point Location


Reset

Page 4 of 4 Show Point/Vector Distance Information To Point ID

From Vector ID

Parametric Loc


Reset



From Vector ID

Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the vector (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID


Other columns



Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option Show the distance between point/vector pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/vector pair. The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, point-surface pairs, point-plane pairs or point-vector pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve


Show Point Distance





Tolerance: 0.0049999999


Option: Vector Refer. Coordinate Frame



Coord 0

Auto Execute


Point List Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Vector 4.2.1); or by cursor selecting them by using the Point select menu.

Point 2 Vector List Vector 7

☞ Apply


More Help:


5


Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet Page 1 of 4 Show Point/Plane Distance Information From Plane ID

To Point ID

•

.2

•

Minimum Distance

7

Page

7.34937645

1

of 4


Delta


Distance

Reset

Cancel

Page 2 of 4 Show Point/Plane Distance Information From Plane ID

To Point ID

Direction Cosines

Angle to Normal


Reset

Page 3 of 4 Show Point /Plane Distance Information From Plane ID

To Point ID

Point Location

Min Point Location


Reset

Page 4 of 4 Show Point/Plane Distance Information From Plane ID

To Point ID

Parametric Loc


Reset



From Plane ID

Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the plane (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID


Other columns



Showing the Nodes on a Point Setting Object to Point and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on at specified point locations that are within the Global Model Tolerance. Point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Point Node

Point Summary Last ID: 0


Total in Model: 0


The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.


The total number of points in the current group. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

Auto Execute

Not used for this form.


Point List

Apply

Specify the points, vertices or nodes either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 5 10, Node 10, Solid 4.5.3.1. The Point select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the point locations.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Topology (p. 10) • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

5


7.3

Showing Curves Showing Curve Attributes Setting Object to Curve and Info to Attributes will show the geometric type, length, and the starting and ending points for a list of specified curves or edges. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Curve Attributes

Curve Summary Last ID: 0 Total in Model: 0 Total in 'default_group' : 0

The Curve Summary table shows: The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database. The total number of curves in the database. The total number of curves in the current group. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute Curve List

Apply


Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Topology (p. 10) • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19) • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)


Showing Curve Arc Setting Object to Curve and Info to Arc will show the total number of Arcs in the model, total number of Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling tolerance. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Curve Arc

Arc Summary Total in Model: 0 Total in 'default_group' : 0 Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute


Curve List

Apply


☞

More Help:


5


Showing Curve Angle Setting Object to Curve and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of curves. The point on each curve where the angle is calculated from is shown via a primary graphics marker in the graphics marker color. This is useful if the two curves do not intersect. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Curve Angle

Curve Summary Last ID: 0

The Curve Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 0

The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.


The total number of curves in the current group.

The total number of curves in the database. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute First Curve List


Surface 1.2 Second Curve List Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.

Curve 7

Apply

☞

More Help:

• Topology (p. 10) • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)

Upon execution, the Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet (p. 585) form is launched.


Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet Page 1 of 2 Show Curve Angle Information Second Curve ID

First Curve ID

• Surface 1.2

•

7

Page

1

Angle

90.0

of 2

Minimum Distance Minimum Location 1 Cancel

0.

Reset [1.23.3.45.2.13] >

Angle

Reset

Cancel

Page 2 of 2 Show Curve Angle Information First Curve ID

SecondCurve ID

Minimum Loc 2

Minimum Param1

Minimum Param2 Cancel

Reset

Cell Callback Actions First Curve ID

Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

Second Curve ID

Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Other Columns

Highlights both curves in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on each curve at the respective locations where the minimum distance occurs.

5


Showing Curve Length Range Setting Object to Curve and Info to Length Range will show the Start and End Point, Length, and Type for a list of specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and Maximum Curve Length Range specified. Geometry Show Action: Curve Object: Info: Length Range Curve Summary Last ID: 0

The Curve Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 0

The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.



The total number of curves in the database. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Curve Length Range Minimum Curve Length 0.005

Specify the Minimum and Maximum Curve Length to define the Curve Length Range for filtering curves.

Maximum Curve Length 5.0

Auto Execute


Curve List

Apply


☞

More Help:



Showing the Nodes on a Curve Setting the Object to Curve and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the specified curves or edges that are within the Global Model Tolerance. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Curve Node

Curve Summary Last ID: 0

The Curve Summary table shows: The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.

Total in Model: 0

The total number of curves in the database.




Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute Curve List

Apply



☞

More Help:


5


7.4

Showing Surfaces Showing Surface Attributes Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and edges associated with each specified surface or solid face, as well as the its area and geometry type. Geometry Show

Action: Object: Info:

Surface Attributes

Surface Summary Last ID: 1

The Surface Summary table shows: The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.

Total in Model: 7

The total number of surfaces in the database.



The total number of surfaces in the current group.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute

Specify the surfaces or solid faces, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by cursor selecting them by using the Surface select menu.

Surface List Solid 1.6

Draw Normal Vectors

If pressed, MSC.Patran draws the positive surface normal vector for each specified surface or solid face. The positive normal direction is based on the surface’s or solid face’s parametrization.

Reset Graphics Apply

If pressed, MSC.Patran erases the normal vectors and reverts the model back to the last display type, such as wireframe, after a MSC.Patran form was executed. (This includes the Display menu forms.)

☞

More Help:

• Parameterization (p. 5) • Topology (p. 10)


• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19) • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)


Showing Surface Area Range Setting Object to Surface and Info to Area Range will show the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for a list of specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area Range specified. Geometry Show Action: Surface Object: Info: Area Range Surface Summary Last ID: 1

The Surface Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 1




The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database. The total number of surfaces in the current group.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Surface Area Range Minimum Surface Area 0.005

Maximum Surface Area

Specify the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area to define the Surface Area Range for filtering surfaces.

5.0


Apply

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surfaces or faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by cursor selecting them by using the Surface select menu.

☞

More Help:

• Parameterization (p. 5) • Topology (p. 10) • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19) • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

5


Showing the Nodes on a Surface Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the specified surfaces or solid faces that are within the Global Model Tolerance. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Surface Node


The Surface Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 0 Total in 'default_group' : 0

The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database. The total number of surfaces in the database. The total number of surfaces in the current group. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute Surface List


Surface 1 2

Apply


☞

More Help:



Showing Surface Normals Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Normals enables the user to display surface normals of varying densities on the surface. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Surface Normal


The Surface Summary table shows: The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.

Total in Model: 1




The total number of surfaces in the current group.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Normal Vector Display ◆ Surface Interior ◆ ◆ Surface Boundary

Defines whether the normals are to be displayed on the interior and boundary of a surface or only on the boundary edges of the surface.

Normal Vector Density 1

21 1

Allows the user to input the density of normals on a surface. For the density n the normals are displayed as an n by n set of normals unless the surface is trimmed. If the surface is trimmed, the normals which do not lie on the surface are displayed on the nearest edge.

5


Normal Vector Display ◆ Surface Interior ◆ ◆ Surface Boundary Normal Vector Density 1

21 1

Set Normal Vector Length Normal Vector Length 1.0


Reset Graphics Apply

Allows the user to define the length of the surface normal vectors. By default, the normal vectors are proportional to the surface area. The vector length is set in the Normal Vector Length databox. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. If pressed, MSC.Patran erases the normal vectors and reverts the model back to the last display type, such as wireframe, after a MSC.Patran form was executed. (This includes the Display menu forms.)


☞

More Help:



7.5

Showing Solids Showing Solid Attributes Setting the Object to Solid and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and faces associated with each specified solid, as well as the volume and the geometry type. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Solid Attributes

Solid Summary Last ID: 0

The Solid Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 0

The total number of solids in the database.

The last (or highest) solid ID used in the database.


The total number of solids in the current group. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute Solid List

Apply


Specify the solids either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 4 11.

☞

More Help:

• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Solids (p. 24) • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

5


7.6

Showing Coordinate Frames Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes Setting the Object to Coord and Info to Attributes will list the ID, the coordinate value location of the coordinate frame’s origin and the coordinate frame type for each specified coordinate frame. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Coord Attributes

Coordinate Frame Summary Last ID: 0

The Coordinate Frame Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 1 Total in 'default_group' : 1

The last (or highest) coordinate frame ID used in the database. The total number of coordinate frames in the database. The total number of coordinate frames in the current group. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

Tolerance: 0.0049999999 Auto Execute Coordinate Frame List

Apply

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 10 13.

☞

More Help:

• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)


7.7

Showing Planes Showing Plane Attributes Setting Object to Plane and Info to Attributes will show for a list of specified plane, displaying the plane origins and the plane normal that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame. Geometry Action:

Show

Object:

Plane

Info:

Attributes

Choices are Attributes, Angle and Distance.

Vector Summary Last ID: 0 Total in Model: 0

The Plane Summary table shows: The Last (or highest) plane 1D used in the database.

Total in 'default_group' : 0 Tolerance: 0.0049999999

The total number of planes in the database. The total number of planes in the current group. The current value of the global model tolerance.


Auto Execute

See Showing Point Locations.

Plane List Specify the planes either by cursor or by entering the ID’s from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 4:7 9.

Apply

☞

More Help:

• Showing Point Locations (p. 570)

5


Showing Plane Angle Setting Object to Plane and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of planes. Geometry Action: Object: Info:

Show Plane Angle

Plane Summary Last ID: 2

The Plane Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 2

The last (or highest) plane ID used in the database.


The total number of planes in the current group.

Global Model Tolerance 0.0049999999 Auto Execute First Plane List

The total number of planes in the database. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the planes either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Plane 1); or by cursor selecting them by using the Plane select menu.

Second Plane List

Apply

Upon execution, the Show Plane Angle/Distance Information Spreadsheet (pg ) form is launched.


Show Plane Angle/Distance Information Spreadsheet

Show Plane Show Angle/Distance Information Curve Angle Information First Plane ID

Second Plane ID

1

2

Angle

* 90.0

Minimum Distance

0.

Reset

Cancel

Cell Callback Actions First Plane ID

Highlights the plane using the secondary highlight color.

Second Plane ID

Highlights the plane using the secondary highlight color.

Other Columns

Highlights both planes in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox.

5


Showing Plane Distance Setting Object to Plane and Info to Distance will show the distance between pairs of planes. Geometry Action:

Show

Object:

Plane

Info:

Distance

Plane Summary Last ID: 2

The Plane Summary table shows:

Total in Model: 2

The last (or highest) plane ID used in the database.


The total number of planes in the current group.

Global Model Tolerance 0.0049999999 Auto Execute First Plane List

The total number of planes in the database. The current value of the Global Model Tolerance. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the planes either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Plane 1); or by cursor selecting them by using the Plane select menu.

Second Plane List

Apply

Upon execution, the Show Plane Angle/Distance Information Spreadsheet (pg ) form is launched.


7.8

Showing Vectors Showing Vector Attributes Setting Object to Vector and Info to Attributes will show a list for a specified vector displaying the vector origins and the vector directions that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame. Geometry Action:

Show

Object:

Vector

Info:

Attributes

Vector Summary Last ID: 0 Total in Model: 0 Total in 'default_group' : 0 Tolerance: 0.0049999999

The Vector Summary table shows: The Last (or highest) plane 1D used in the database. The total number of planes in the database. The total number of planes in the current group. The current value of the global model tolerance.


Auto Execute

See Showing Point Locations.

Vector List Specify the vectors either by cursor or by entering the ID’s from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 4:7.

Apply

☞

More Help:

• Showing Point Locations (p. 570)

5



CHAPTER

8

Transform Actions

■ Overview of the Transform Methods ■ Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors ■ Transforming Coordinate Frames


8.1 Object Point

Curve

Overview of the Transform Methods Method

Description

❏ Translate

Create points by successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.

❏ Rotate

Create points by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.

❏ Scale

Create points by scaling an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.

❏ Mirror

Create points by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.

❏ MCoord

Creates points by translating and rotating them from an existing set of points, nodes, or vertices by referencing coordinate frames.

❏ Pivot

Creates points from existing points, nodes or vertices by using a planar rotation defined by three point locations.

❏ Position

Creates points by translating and rotating existing points, nodes or vertices, using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations.

❏ Vsum

Creates points by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two sets of existing points, nodes or vertices.

❏ MScale

Creates points by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.

❏ Translate

Create curves by successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing set of curves or edges.

❏ Rotate

Create curves by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of curves or edges.

❏ Scale

Create curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.

❏ Mirror

Create curves by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of curves or edges.

❏ MCoord

Creates curves by translating and rotating them from an existing set of curves or edges by referencing coordinate frames.

❏ Pivot

Creates curves from existing curves or edges by using a planar rotation defined by three point locations.

❏ Position

Creates curves by translating and rotating existing curves or edges, using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations.

❏ Vsum

Creates curves by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two sets of existing curves or edges.

❏ MScale

Creates curves by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping an existing set of curves or edges.

CHAPTER 8 Transform Actions

Object

Method

Description

Surface

❏ Translate

Create surfaces by successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.

❏ Rotate

Create surfaces by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.

❏ Scale

Create a set of curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.

❏ Mirror

Create surfaces by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.

❏ MCoord

Creates surfaces by translating and rotating them from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by referencing coordinate frames.

❏ Pivot

Creates surfaces from existing surfaces or solid faces by using a planar rotation defined by three point locations.

❏ Position

Creates surfaces by translating and rotating existing surfaces or solid faces, using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations.

❏ Vsum

Creates surfaces by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two sets of existing surfaces or solid faces.

❏ MScale

Creates surfaces by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.

❏ Translate

Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing set of solids.

❏ Rotate

Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of solids.

❏ Scale

Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.

❏ Mirror

Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.

❏ MCoord

Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set of solids by referencing coordinate frames.

❏ Pivot

Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation defined by three point locations.

❏ Position

Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations.

❏ Vsum

Creates solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two sets of existing solids.

❏ MScale

Creates solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping an existing set of solids.

Solid

6


Object Coord

Plane

Vector

Method

Description

❏ Translate

Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing set of coordinate frames.

❏ Rotate

Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of coordinate frames.

❏ Translate


❏ Rotate


❏ Mirror


❏ MCoord


❏ Pivot


❏ Position


❏ Translate


❏ Rotate


❏ Mirror


❏ MCoord


❏ Pivot


❏ Position


❏ Scale

Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.


8.2

Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors The Translate method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids planes or vectors which are successively offset from each other by a defined Translation Vector . Points can be translated from points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be translated from curves or edges. Surfaces can be translated from surfaces or solid faces. Solids are translated from solids. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Method:

Translate

Point ID List 1

Set to either: Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve, surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

Type of Transformation

◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF ◆ ◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

Cartesian in Refer. CF means the Translation Vector coordinates will be applied along the Refer. Coordinate Frame’s principal axes. Curvilinear in Refer. CF means the Translation Vector coordinates will be interpreted as R,θ,Z if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is cylindrical, and R,θ,Φ if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is spherical.

Used by the Translation Vector to express the direction and distance of the translation. Specify a cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame if you chose the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle. Example: Coord 5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

6




The distance and direction to translate the new set of points, curves, surfaces or solids from the existing set. The coordinate values will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <10 0 0>. If Cartesian in Refer. CF is selected, then the Vector select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector.

Translation Parameters Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Points Auto Execute

The number of times to translate the existing set of entities and create new points, curves, surfaces or solids. If ON, after Translate completes, the existing points, curves, surfaces or solids specified in List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

Point List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

Specify the existing entities either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface 5.5.1 Solid 12. The select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.


☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames (p. 66)


Translating Points Radially Creates Points 8 through 14 by translating Points 1 through 7, three units radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed. Geometry Action:

Before:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Translate

4 5

3

Point ID List 8

6


2

◆ ◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF ◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF Refer. Coordinate Frame

7

Z

Coord 100

T

Y

Z100R

X

1

Translation Vector <3 0 0> Translation Parameters

After:

Repeat Count 1

11 12


10


13

9

Point 1:7

-Apply-

14

Y Z

X

5 4 3 T 6 2 7 Z100 R 1

8

6


Translating Points This example is the same as the previous example, except Cartesian in Refer. CF is pressed instead of Curvilinear in Refer. CF. Geometry Transform

Action: Object:

Before:

Point

Method:

4

Translate

5

3

Point ID List 8

6


2

◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF ◆ ◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF Refer. Coordinate Frame

7

Z

Coord 100

T

Y

Z100R

X

1


After: Translation Parameters Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Points Auto Execute

5 6

3

T

Point List

7

Point 1:7

4

Z100R Y

-Apply-

Z

X

12 2

13 1

14

11

10 9 8


Translating Curves Creates Curves 2 through 6 by translating Curves 1 three times - two units in the X direction and one unit in the Y direction within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Translate

Before: 1

Curve ID List 2 Type of Transformation

1


Y

Coord 0

Translation Vector

2 X

Z

<2 1 0> Translation Parameters

After:

Repeat Count 5

11


9

Auto Execute

7

Curve List

5

Curve 1

3 -Apply-

1

2 Y 1 Z

X 2

12 10

8 6

4

5 4

3

6

6


Translating Curves Radially Translates Curve 1 three times and radially one unit outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Translate

Before:

1



2

Z100 R

X

Z

Coord 100

T

Y

1

Translation Vector <1 0 0> Translation Parameters

After:

Repeat Count

4

3 Delete Original Curves

3

Auto Execute

2

Curve List curve 1

1 T

-Apply-

8

Y Z

6

4 X

2

Z100 R 1

3

5

7


Translating Edges Creates Curve 2 by translating the outside edge of Surface 1, two units radially outward within cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Translate

Before: 4


1

3


Y

Coord 100

X

Z

1

Translation Vector

2


After:

Repeat Count

6

1 Delete Original Curves

2


4

surface 1.3

-Apply-

Y Z

3

1

T X Z100 R

1

1

2

5

6


Translating Surfaces Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 by translating Surface 1 two times - one unit in the X direction and two units in the Y direction within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 10. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Translate

Before: 3

Surface ID List

4

2

1


2

◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF ◆ ◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF

1


Y

Coord 10

Translation Vector

Y X

Z

X Z 10

<1 2 0>

After: Translation Parameters

11

Repeat Count 2

10 Delete Original Surfaces

12

3 9

Auto Execute

7

Surface List

6

surface 1

8

2 5

3

-Apply-

2

Y Z

1

X

X1

Y 10 Z

4


Translating Surfaces Radially Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 by translating Surface 1 three times and one unit radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Translate

Before: 4

Surface ID List 2 Type of Transformation

1

3


Y

Coord 100

X

Z

1

Translation Vector

2

<1 0 0> Translation Parameters Repeat Count

After: 9

1

7 Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute

4

5

Surface List

3

surface 1

4

2

-Apply-

1 Y 3 T X Z Z100 R 1

2

6

8

10

6


Translating Solid Faces Creates Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating the top faces of Solids 1 through 4, 0.5 units radially outward within the spherical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Translate

Before: 3

Surface ID List

2

1 Type of Transformation

◆ ◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF ◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF

41

3

4 T 1 R 20 Z

5

2

Y


X

Z

6

Translation Vector <.5 0 0> Translation Parameters

After:

Repeat Count

8

1

4


3

Auto Execute

1

2

Surface List

2 11 1 34 4 P

solid 4.6 3.6 2.6 1.6

-Apply-

5

10 Y Z

X

120 R T 6 7

2

9


Translating Solids Translates Solids 1 through 4, 1.5 units in the X direction and 1.5 units in the Y direction, within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solids 1:4 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

Translate

Before: 3

Solid ID List

2

5

3



41 4 T 1 R 20 Z

5

2

Y

Coord 0

Z

X 6

Translation Vector <1.5 1.5 0> Translation Parameters

After: 9

Repeat Count 1

6 7


105 8

Auto Execute

11

Solid List

7

solid 1:4

12 -Apply-

Y P X Z20 R T

8

6


Translating Solids Creates Solid 2 by translating Solid 1, 90 degrees within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 1. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

Translate

Before: 6 7

Solid ID List 2 Type of Transformation

5


1

8 T


Y

Coord 1

Z

1 X Z

R

1

2

4

Translation Vector

3

<.5 0 0> Translation Parameters

After:

Repeat Count 1

6 7


5

2

Solid 1

1

8 T

-Apply-

10 Y 11 Z

9 12 X

Z1

R

1 4

2 3


Translating Planes Translates Plane 1 2 units in the Z direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Note that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Plane

Method:

Translate

Before:

Plane ID List 1 Type of Transformation


Z

X

Coord 0

Y


After:

Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Plane Auto Execute Plane List plane 1

-Apply-

Z

X Y

6


Translating Vectors Translates Vector 1 2 units in the X direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Vector

Method:

Translate

Before:

Vector ID List 1 Type of Transformation


Y

Coord 0

Z

X


After:

Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Vector Auto Execute Vector List Vector 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X


Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of entities. Points can be rotated from other points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be rotated from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be rotated from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are rotated from other solids. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Method:

Rotate

ID List 5

Set to either Point, Curve Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve, surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Used by the defined rotation Axis to express the axis’ beginning and ending coordinates values. Example: Coord 5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Coord 0 Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle 90.0 Offset Angle 0.0 Repeat Count

This is the rotation axis that the new points, curves, surfaces or solids will be rotated about from the existing set of entities. If coordinate values are entered, they will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} . An Axis select menu appears to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the rotation axis. When an axis is specified using a non-default coordinate frame, e.g., Coord 5.2, the Reference Coordinate Frame should be set to the default Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.

1

Point 3 Point 2 Delete Original

θr


Axis

θr θo

Repeat Count = 2 -Apply-

Point 1

6


Point 3 Point 2 The Rotation Angle (θr) defines how many degrees to rotate the existing set of entities about the axis.

θr Axis

Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle

θr θo

Point 1

Repeat Count = 2

90.0 The Offset Angle (θo) defines how many degrees to offset from the starting point of rotation.

Offset Angle 0.0 Count IfRepeat ON, after Rotate completes, the points, curves, surfaces or solids 1 specified in List will be deleted from the database. Delete Original Auto Execute Point List

The Repeat Count defines the number of times to rotate the existing set of entities within θr to create new ones.


[0 0 0]

-Apply-

Specify the entities to rotate, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Curve 10.1 Surface 5.5 Solid 10. The select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.

☞ If ON, after Rotate completes, the points, curves, surfaces or solids specified in List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)


Rotating Points and Nodes Creates Points 7 through 14 from Point 1 and Node 10 by rotating them six times, 30 degrees about the global rectangular coordinate frame’s Z axis, Coord 0.3, with an offset angle of 60 degrees. (Coord 0.3 can be cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below and cursor selecting Coord 0.) Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Rotate

Before:

Point ID List 7

1

10

1

10


Y

Coord 0

X

Z

Axis coord 0.3 Rotation Parameters

30.0 Offset Angle

After:

60.0 Repeat Count

8

6

10 Delete Original Points Auto Execute

12

Point List

9

Point 1 Node 10

-Apply-

11 14

13

Y Axis Select Menu Icon

3

7

Z

X

6


Rotating Curves Creates Curves 2 through 7 by rotating Curve 1 six times, 30 degrees about the axis defined by {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that the axis definition is equivalent to Coord 0.3 from the previous example. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Rotate

Before:

Curve ID List 2

1

1

2


Y

Axis

Z

X

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle 30.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 6

8 10


6 4

Auto Execute

5

Curve List

12

curve 1

9

6 11 -Apply-

14

Y Z

7

13 X

3 7

4

5

2 3 1

1

2


Rotating From An Edge This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 6 are rotated from an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Rotate

Before:

Curve ID List 1

1

2


Y

Axis

Z

1 3

X

4

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle 30.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 6

10 12


8 4

Auto Execute

14

Curve List

11

5

surface 1.4

13 -Apply-

3

16

Y Z

6

15 X

9

2 6

7

1 5 1

2 1

3

4

6


Rotating Surfaces Creates Surfaces 4 through 18 by rotating from Surfaces 1, 2 and 3, five times, 30 degrees each about the axis defined by Points 4 and 1. The axis is defined by cursor selecting the points using the Axis select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Rotate

Before:

5 Surface ID List 4 Refer. Coordinate Frame

3

3

2 6

4

1

Coord 0

Y Z X

Axis

2

1

Construct 2PointAxis(Ev Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle 30.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 5 Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List

12 14

14 17 18

surface 1 2 3

16 -Apply-

Y Z X


10 15 11 8

12 8

9 11

5 13

4 15

2

5

9 6

7

10 7 43 13 6 1 16 1

3 2


Rotating From Solid Faces This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 16 are rotated from the outside faces of Solid 1. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Rotate

Before:

5

Surface ID List 1

3 Refer. Coordinate Frame

61

4

Coord 0 Axis Construct 2PointAxis(Eva

2

1

Y Z X

Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle 30.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 5 Delete Original Surfaces

12

Auto Execute Surface List surface 1.5 1.2 1.6

-Apply-

14

16

14 9 12 15 Y Z


10 11

138

6 153 1

X

8

115

10 133

9 7 7 24 1 14

2

5

6

6


Rotating Solids Creates Solids 2 through 4 by rotating from Solid 1, three times, 90 degrees each about the global Z axis, Coord 0.3. Coord 0.3 is cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

Rotate

Before:

5

Solid ID List

3


61

4

Coord 0.3

Construct 2PointAxis(Eval

2

1

Y

Axis

Z X

Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle 90.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0

8

Repeat Count

7

3

10

9


5

2

3


12

solid 1

-Apply-

Y Z

4

14 11

3

3

6

1 4

13

X

15 16


1

18

17

2


Rotating Planes Rotates Plane 1 90 degrees around the Y Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Plane

Method:

Rotate

Before:

Plane ID List 1 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Axis Coord

Y

X

Rotation Parameters

Z

Rotation Angle 90.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Planes Auto Execute Plane List plane 1

-Apply-


3

X Z

6


Rotating Vectors Rotates Vector 1 90 degrees around the Z Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Vector

Method:

Rotate

Before:

Vector ID List 1 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Axis Coord

Y Rotation Parameters

Z

Rotation Angle

X

90.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Vector Auto Execute Vector List vector 1

-Apply-


3

Z

X


Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors The Scale method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids or vectors by scaling an existing set of entities. Points can be scaled from other points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be scaled from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are scaled from other solids. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Method:

Scale

ID List 5

Set to either Point, Curve Surface, Solid or Vector.




Cartesian in Refer. CF means the Scale Factor values will be applied along the Refer. Coordinate Frame’s principal axes.


Curvilinear in Refer. CF means the Scale Factor values will be interpreted as R,θ,Z if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is cylindrical, and R,θ,Φ if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is spherical.

Coord 0

Used by the Origin of Scaling and Scale Factor to express the scale origin’s coordinate values and the scale factors. Example: Coord 5. Specify a cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame if you chose the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.

6


Enter the coordinate location of the origin to scale the existing entities from. The coordinate values are expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: [10 0 0] . If Cartesian in Refer. CF is selected, the Point select menu appears to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the point location.

Origin of Scaling [0 0 0] Scale Parameters Scale Factor 1.0 1.0 1.0

The Scale Factor are three scaling factor values to be applied along the three principal axes of the Refer. Coordinate Frame. A scale factor of one means no scaling will take place along the specific coordinate frame axis. Example: 10 20 1. The Repeat Count defines the number of times to scale the existing set of entities to create the new ones.

Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Auto Execute Point List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

If ON, after Scale completes, the points, curves, surfaces or solids specified in List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the entities to scale, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames (p. 66)


Scaling Points and Nodes Creates Points 6 through 9 by scaling them from Points 1, 2, 5 and Node 100 two times along the global X and Y axes, with Point 4 as the origin of scaling. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Scale

Before: 2

Point ID List 6

1 4


100


Y

Coord 0

Z

5 X

Origin of Scaling Point 4

After:

Scale Parameters

8

Scale Factor 2 2 1 Repeat Count

2

1 Delete Original Points

7

1

4

Auto Execute Point List Point 5 1 2 Node 100

Z -Apply-

5

Y X 6

100

9

6


Scaling Points Radially Creates Points 25 through 44 by scaling them from the points on the outside edge of Surfaces 1 through 4, two times radially within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF and Delete Original Points are pressed. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Scale

Before: 13

Point ID List

11

2


10 9

T

6


1

3

16

25

Coord 100

12

14 15


4

5

100 R Z

1

2

17

24 18

Y Z

7

3

4

19

X

23

22 20

8

43

44

21

Origin of Scaling

After:

[0 0 0] Scale Parameters

28

42

Scale Factor 2 1 1

27

41

Repeat Count

40

1 Delete Original Points

39

Auto Execute

6

38

2

3

5

100 1

3

7

Point List Point 2 4 6 8 9:24

Y Z

-Apply-

25

1 2

30

4

31

8

37 X

26

4

29

36

32 35

34

33


Scaling Curves Creates Curve 2 by scaling them from Curve 1, 1.5 times along the X axis of rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 1 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Scale

Before:

1

Curve ID List 2

X

Y


20 Z


1


Y

Coord 20

Z

X

Origin of Scaling [0 0 0]

After:

Scale Parameters Scale Factor

2

1.5 1 1 Repeat Count 1

X

Y Delete Original Curves

20 Z


Y

curve 1

-Apply-

Z

2 X

6


Scaling From An Edge Creates Curves 1 through 4 by scaling them from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, 1.5 times radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Scale

Before: 4

2

Curve ID List

1

3

1

T


6


Y

Coord 20

Z

5

20 R Z

1

3

7

4

2

X 8


After: 11

Scale Parameters Scale Factor

3

1.5 1 1

2

4

Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Curves

6

12

2

3 T

1

5

20 R 1 Z

3

7

2

Auto Execute Curve List surface 3.3 4.3 1.3 2.3

-Apply-

Y Z

4

8

X 9

4 1

10


Scaling Surfaces Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by scaling Surfaces 1 through 4 1.5 times along the radial axis of cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Cartesian in Refer. CF and Delete Original Surfaces are pressed. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Scale

Before: 4

2

Surface ID List

3

5

1

T


6


Y

Coord 20

Z

5

20 R Z

1

2

3

7

4

X 8


After:

Scale Parameters Scale Factor 1.5 1 1 Repeat Count

4


12

6

3T

5

11

20 R Z

9

7

7

8


8

Y

surface 1:4

Z -Apply-

X

10

6


Scaling Surfaces Radially This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is selected instead of Cartesian in Refer. CF. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Scale

Before:

4

Surface ID List

2 6

5

1 3 T 20 R 1 Z

Y Z X

3

7

5 Type of Transformation

◆ ◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF ◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 20

2

4

8


After:

Scale Parameters

11

Scale Factor 1.5 1 1

6

Repeat Count

10

5

1

T Delete Original Surfaces

14

13

20 R Z

9

7

15

8

Auto Execute Surface List surface 1:4

-Apply-

Y Z

X 16

12


Scaling From Solid Faces Creates Surface 1 by scaling it from the top face of Solid 1, 1.5 times in the X, Y and Z directions of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Scale

Before:

Surface ID List 1

8 9



11 10

1 5 7

1 6


Y

Coord 0

Z

X


After: Scale Parameters Scale Factor 1.5 1.5 1.5 Repeat Count

15


13

12

Auto Execute

1 6

Surface List

Y

solid 1.3

Z -Apply-

14

1

X

8 9

1

5 7

11 10

6


Scaling From Solids Creates Solids 5 through 8 by scaling them from Solids 1 through 4, two times in the X and Y directions of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

Scale

Before:

Solid ID List 5

2 3



1 4


Y

Coord 0

X

Z Origin of Scaling [0 0 0] Scale Parameters

After:

Scale Factor 2 2 1

6

Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Solids

7

Auto Execute

2 3

1 4

Curve List solid 1:4

Y

8

-Apply-

Z

X

5


Scaling From Vectors Scales Vector 1 with a scale factor of 2 in the X direction in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Vector

Method:

Scale

Before:

Vector ID List 1 Type of Transformation


Y

Coord 0

Z

X


After: Scale Parameters Scale Factor 2 0 0 Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Vector Auto Execute Vector List vector 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X

6


Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of entities. Points can be mirrored from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be mirrored from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be mirrored from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are mirrored from other solids. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Method:

Mirror

ID List 1 Define Mirror Plane Normal {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Offset Parameters

Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve, surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. These are the three global x,y,z coordinates that define the location and direction of the mirror plane’s normal vector. The new entities will be mirrored on the opposite side of the mirror plane. An Axis select menu appears to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the normal vector. The number of units to offset the Mirror Plane in the direction defined by Define Mirror Normal, and from the starting point of that normal vector. Default is zero.

Offset 0.0 Delete Original Auto Execute

If ON, after Mirror completes, the points, curves, surfaces or solids specified in List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

Point List By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0]

-ApplySpecify the entities to mirror, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.

☞

More Help:



Mirroring Points and Nodes Creates Points 7 through 12 by mirroring them from Points 1 through 6 and Node 100, about the mirror plane whose normal is the global X axis, Coord 0.1. Coord 0.1 can be cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Mirror

Before:

2

1

Point ID List 7

3 5

Define Mirror Plane Normal

6

Coord 0.1

100

Offset Parameters

Y

Offset

Z

0.0

X

Delete Original Points Auto Execute

After:

Point List Point 1 2 3 5 6 Node 100

-Apply-

8

7

2

1

9

3 10 11

12 Y Z Axis Select Menu Icon 1

5

X

6

100

6


Mirroring Curves Creates Curves 3 and 4 by mirroring them from Curves 1 and 2 about the plane whose normal is the global Y axis, Coord 0.2, and with an offset of Y=-1. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Mirror

Before:

2

Curve ID List

2

3

1

Define Mirror Plane Normal Coord 0.2 Offset Parameters

3

1

Y

Offset

Z

-1

X

Reverse Curve Delete Original Curves Auto Execute

After:

Curve List

2 2

Curve 1 2

-Apply-

Y Z

X

1

3

1

6

4 4

3 5


Mirroring From Edges Creates Curves 1 through 8 by mirroring them from the inner and outer edges of Surfaces 5 through 8 about the plane whose normal is rectangular coordinate frame 1’s Y axis, Coord 1.2. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Mirror

Before: 5 7

6

3

5 6

Curve ID List 1

8

7

4 Y

Define Mirror Plane Normal

9

Coord 1.2

X

10 8

Offset Parameters

1 Z 12

Offset

Y

0.0 Reverse Curve

Z

X

11


After: 5

Curve List Surface8.47.46.45.45.26.27.2

7

6

3

5 6

-Apply-

8

7

Y 9

10 8

Y Z

X

4

X 1 Z

12

5

4

1

13 2

15

16

3 14

11

6 17

8

18

7

6


Mirroring Surfaces This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 9 through 12 are mirrored from Surfaces 5 through 8. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Mirror

Before: 5 7

6 6

Surface ID List 1

8

7 9

X

10 8

Offset Parameters Offset

4 Y

Define Mirror Plane Normal Coord 1.2

3

5

Z 1 12

Y

0.0 Reverse Surface

Z

X

11


After: 5

Surface List Surface 5:8

7

6

3

5 6

-Apply-

8

7

4 Y

9

10 8

X 1Z

12

14 16

13 10

18

Y Z

9

X

11

12

11 17

15


Mirroring Solids Creates Solid 2 by mirroring Solid 1 about the plane whose normal is defined by {[0 0 0][1 0 0]}. Notice that the mirror plane normal definition is the same as entering the global X axis, Coord 0.1. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

Mirror

Before:

Solid ID List 2 Define Mirror Plane Normal

1

{[0 0 0][1 0 0]}

Y

Offset Parameters Offset

X

Z

0.0 Reverse Solid Delete Original Solids Auto Execute

After:

Solid List Solid 1

-Apply-

2 1 Y Z

X

6


Mirroring Planes Mirrors Plane 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Plane is not pressed and Plane 2 is not reversed.

Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Plane

Method:

Mirror

Before:

Plane ID List 1 Define Mirror Plane Normal Coord 0 Offset Parameters Offset

Y

1 Reverse Plane

Z

X

Delete Original Planes Auto Execute

After:

Plane List Plane 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X


Mirroring Vectors Mirrors Vector 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Vector is not pressed and Vector 2 is not reversed. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Vector

Method:

Mirror

Before:

Vector ID List 1 Define Mirror Plane Normal Coord 0 Offset Parameters Offset

Y

1

Z

Reverse Vector

X

Delete Original Vectors Auto Execute

After:

Vector List Vector 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X

6


Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate Frame Reference (MCoord Method) Translates and rotates a new set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from an existing set of entities by referencing coordinate frames. The new entities’ local position with respect to the To Coordinate Frame is the same as the local position of the original entities with respect to the From Coordinate Frame. Points can be moved from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be moved from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be moved from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are moved from other solids. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Method:

MCoord

ID List 1

Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve, surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

From Coordinate Frame From Coordinate Frame is the coordinate frame ID defining the orientation of the existing entities. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Coord 0 To Coordinate Frame

To Coordinate Frame is the coordinate frame ID defining the orientation of the new entities. Example: Coord 5. Delete Original Auto Execute

If ON, after MCoord completes, the points, curves, surfaces or solids specified in List are deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

Point List By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0]

-ApplySpecify the entities to move, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.

☞

More Help:



Moving Points and Nodes Creates Points 7 through 12 from Points 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 and Node 100 by moving them from the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

MCoord

Before: Y

X 100 Z

Point ID List 7 From Coordinate Frame Coord 0 To Coordinate Frame Coord 100

Y 1


Z

3

4

5

6

100

X

Auto Execute Point List Point 1 3:6 Node 100

After: 8

-Apply-

12 11 Y

9X 7Z 100

Y Z X 1 3 4

5

6

100

10

6


Moving Curves Creates Curves 7 through 12 by moving Curves 1 through 6 from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200 to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

MCoord

Before:

T Curve ID List

300 R Z

4

7

Coord 200

2 5

Z a R 1 Y

To Coordinate Frame Coord 300


3

T

From Coordinate Frame

6

X

Z


After:

Curve 1:6

-Apply-

9 10 8 12 11

4 3 T 200 Y R 1 X Z

Z

5 6

2

7

T 300R Z


Moving From Edges This example is similar to the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 8 are moved from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, from Coord 200 to Coord 300. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

MCoord

Before:

T R 300 Z

Curve ID List

4

1 From Coordinate Frame Coord 200 To Coordinate Frame

1 T Z 200 R

Coord 300

3 2

Y


X

Z

Auto Execute Curve List Surface 1:4

After: 6

-Apply-

5 7

T Z Y200R X Z

8

1 T

4

4 300R Z

2

1 3 2

3

6


Moving Surfaces Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by moving from Surfaces 1 through 4 from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200, to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

MCoord

Before:

T R 300 Z

Surface ID List

4

5

1

From Coordinate Frame Coord 200 To Coordinate Frame

T Z 200 R

Coord 300

3 2

Y


X

Z

Auto Execute Surface List Surface 1:4

After:

-Apply-

8 7 T

5 4

6

1 T Z Y200R X Z

3 2

300R Z


Moving Solids Creates Solids 5 through 8 by moving Solids 1 through 4 from the global coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

MCoord

Before:

Z

Solid ID List

X

2

1 Y

5

1 From Coordinate Frame Coord 0 To Coordinate Frame

Y

Coord 1


3 4

X

Z


After:

Solid 1:4

7

-Apply-

8 Z X

2 1

1 Y 5

Y Z

3 X

4

6

6


Moving Planes Moves Plane 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Plane

Method:

MCoord

Before:

Y

X

Plane ID List

Z1

2

Z 2 Y

X

From Coordinate Frame Coord 0 To Coordinate Frame Coord 1

Y Delete Original Planes

Z

X


After:

Plane 1

-Apply-

Y Z1

Y Z

X

X X

Z 2 Y


Moving Vectors Moves Vector 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Vector

Method:

MCoord

Before:

Vector ID List 1 From Coordinate Frame

X

Coord 0

Y To Coordinate Frame

Z 1

Coord 1

Y

X Delete Original Vectors

Z Auto Execute Vector List

After:

Vector 1

-Apply-

X Y

X Z

Y

Z 1

6


Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by using a planar rotation defined by a specified Pivot Point about which the entity will be rotated, and a Starting Point and Ending Point for the rotation. Points can be pivoted from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be pivoted from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be pivoted from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are pivoted from other solids. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Method:

Pivot

ID List 1

Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector.


Pivot Point [0 0 0] Starting Point [0 0 0] Ending Point [0 0 0]

Pivot Point defines the location about which the specified entities will be rotated. (Example: [10 0 0] ). Starting Point defines the location that the rotation will begin from. (Example: Surface 1.1.2). Ending Point defines the location that the rotation will end at. (Example: Point 12). A Point select menu will appear that allows you to define how you want to cursor define these point locations.


If ON, after Pivot completes, the points, curves, surfaces or solids specified in List are deleted from the MSC.Patran database. Delete Original Auto Execute Point List

-Apply-


Specify the entities to pivot, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.

☞

More Help:


6


Pivoting Points Creates Point 4 from Point 3 by pivoting at the global origin, [0 0 0], from Node 100 to Point 2. Geometry Action:

Before:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Pivot

Point ID List 4

2 Pivot Point [0 0 0]

100

Starting Point Node 100

Y

Ending Point

Z X

3

Point 2


After:

Auto Execute

4

Point List Point 3

2

-Apply-

100 Y Z X

3


Pivoting Curves Creates Curves 9 through 15 from Curves 1 through 6 by pivoting them at Point 12, from Point 14 to Point 13. (Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.) Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Before: 12

Pivot

Method:

3

Curve ID List

42

2

9

5

7

Pivot Point

8

3 6

Point 12

4 5

Starting Point Point 14

Y71 6 14 X 8 1 Z

Ending Point Point 13


13

After: 12

Auto Execute Curve List Curve 1:6

42

3

-Apply-

5

7 6

16

18

2 10 22

20 8

3 5

Y71 6 14 X 8 1 Z

12

11

4 14

13 1713 15 19 9 21

6


Pivoting From Edges Creates Curves 9 through 16 by pivoting from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, at Point 12, from Point 14 to Point 13. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Before: 12

Pivot

Method: Curve ID List 9

7

Pivot Point

4

Point 12

3 1

Starting Point

8 2

Point 14

Y Ending Point

X

Z

Point 13


14 13

After:

Auto Execute

12

Curve List Surface1.3 2.33.34.3 2.1 1.1 3.1

18

12 15 9

-Apply-

7 4

3 1

Y Z

X

14

11 17 10 16 8

2 16 2213 15 21 14 19


Pivoting Surfaces This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 4 are pivoted to create Surfaces 5 through 8. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot. Geometry

Before: Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

12

Pivot

Method: Surface ID List 5

7

Pivot Point

4

Point 12

3 1

2

Starting Point Point 14

Y

Ending Point

X

Z

Point 13


8

14 13

After: 12

Auto Execute Surface List Surface 1:4

20

22 -Apply-

7 4

3 1

Y Z

X

14

17 8

18

7 2

8

6

5 2113 19 15 16

6


Pivoting Solids Creates Solid 2 by pivoting from Solid 1 at Point 1, from Point 2 to Point 3. Curves 1 and 2 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot. Geometry Action:

Before:

Transform Solid

Object:

Pivot

Method: Solid ID List

2

2 Pivot Point Point 1 Starting Point

5

1

Y

9

Point 2

X

Z

6

4110

8

7 2

11

Ending Point Point 3


After: 3


1418 1519 2 1317 2 1216

Solid 1

-Apply-

Z

5

1

Y

9 X

8

6

4110 11

7 2


Pivoting Planes Pivots Plane 1 using the 3 pivoting point, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Plane

Before: 2

3

Pivot

Method: Plane ID List 1 Pivot Point Point 1 Starting Point Point 2

Y

Ending Point

Z

X

1

Point 3

Delete Original Planes

After:

Auto Execute

2

Plane List Plane 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X 1

1

3

6


Pivoting Vectors Pivots Vector 1 using the 3 pivoting point, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Vector

Before:

2

Pivot

Method:

3

Vector ID List 1 Pivot Point Point 1 Starting Point Point 2

Y

Ending Point

Z

X

1

Point 3

Delete Original Vector

After:


2

Vector 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X 1

1

3


Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by translating and rotating an existing set of entities using a transformation defined by three original point locations to three destination point locations. The original points and destination points need not match exactly; however, if either the original point locations or the destination point locations lie in a straight line, the transformation cannot be performed. Points can be repositioned from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be repositioned from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be repositioned from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are repositioned from other solids. Geometry Action: Object:

Transform

Method:

Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector.

Position

ID List 5 Original Position Point 1


[0 0 0] Original Position Point 2 [0 0 0] Original Position Point 3 [0 0 0]

The Original Position Points 1, 2 and 3 define the original position and orientation. (Examples: [0 10 0], Surface 5.3.1, Point 10.) A Point select menu appears which allows you to define how you want to cursor select each point location.

Destination Position Point 1 [0 0 0] Destination Position Point 2 [0 0 0] Destination Position Point 3 [0 0 0]

The Destination Position Points 1,2 and 3 define the three point locations onto which the original group of entities are to be transformed. (Examples: [10 0 0], Surface 4.3.1, Point 20.) A Point select menu appears which allows you to define how you want to cursor select each point location.

6


Destination Position Point 2 [0 0 0] Destination Position Point 3 [0 0 0] Delete Original

If ON, after Position completes, the points, curves, surfaces or solids specified in List are deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Point List [0 0 0]

-ApplySpecify the entities to reposition, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.

☞

More Help:



Positioning Points Creates Points 9 through 12 from Points 1through 4 by repositioning them based on the original and destination point locations listed on the form. Geometry Action:

Before:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Position

4 3

Point ID List

5

9 Original Position Point 1

6

1

8

Point 1

1

7

2

Original Position Point 2 Point 2

Y


X

Z

Destination Position Point 1 [0 1 0] Destination Position Point 2

After:

[0 1 1]

12

Destination Position Point 3

9

11

4

[-1 1 1]

10

3


5


6

1

8

Point 1:4

7 -Apply-

Y Z

X

1 2

6


Positioning Curves Creates Curves 25 through 32 by repositioning Curves 13 through 24 from Points 9, 13 and 12, to destination Points 2, 6 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curves 13 through 24 are deleted. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Position

Before: 10 23 11 15 14 24 1519 16 20 14 18

Curve ID List 25

9 21 12 13 13 22 1617


2

11 3 6 12 7 7 4 8 Y 2 1 69 4 Z X1 5 10 8 5

Original Position Point 2

3

Point 13 Original Position Point 3 Point 12 Destination Position Point 1 Point 2 Destination Position Point 2

After:

Point 6

18

31

32

19

26 17

Destination Position Point 3 Point 3

20 29

27


25

28

Auto Execute

2

Curve List

3 6

Curve 13:24

-Apply-

Z

12 4

2

Y X

11

3 7

7

1

6 9

10

8

1 5

30

8 4 5


Positioning From Edges This example is similar to the previous example, except that the edges of Solid 1 are repositioned to the new location to create Curves 13 through 20. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Position

Before: 10

11

14

15

Curve ID List

1

13

9


12

13

Point 12 Original Position Point 2

6

Point 9

Point 13

2 12 4

11 7

3

7

8 2 1 69 4 X 1 5 5 10 8

Y


3

16

Z

Destination Position Point 1 Point 3 Destination Position Point 2

After:

Point 2

10

11

14

Destination Position Point 3 Point 6

20


17

19 18

16 18

13

20

Auto Execute

19

Curve List Solid1.2.31.2.41.2.21.4.111.4

6 -Apply-

Y Z

17

2 12 4

2 1 X 1 5 10

1 9

14 13

15 3

11 7

7

3 8

69 8

15

5

4

12 16

6


Positioning Surfaces Creates Surface 5 from Surface 4 by positioning it from Points 8, 9 and 11 to the destination Points 7, 2 and 3. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 9

10

Position

2

Surface ID List

3

4 7

5 Original Position Point 1

8

Point 8

1

3

11


1

Point 9

Y


X

Z

4

2

5

6


After: 9

Point 2

10


2

Point 3

12

5

4 7


3

13

Auto Execute

8

Surface List

1

3

11

Surface 4

1 Y

-Apply -

5 Z

X

4

2 6


Positioning Solids Creates Solid 3 by repositioning it from Solid 2, based on the original and destination points listed on the form. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 2 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Before:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

Position

14 13

Solid ID List

10 9

2

15 16

3

2


3

6

Point 13

7 1


1

Y Z

Point 9

4

5 X


8


After:

Point 6 Destination Position Point 3

21

Point 3

22


6

Auto Execute

2 193

18 17

20

3

7

Solid List

1

Solid 2

1 4

5Y

-Apply-

8 Z

X

11 12

6


Positioning Planes Positions Plane 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Plane

Method:

Position

Before: 6 4

5

Plane ID List 2 Original Position Point 1 Point 1 Original Position Point 2

2

Point 2 Original Position Point 3

3

Y

Point 3

Z

1

X


After: 6


4

Point 6 Delete Original Plane Auto Execute Plane List Plane 1

2 -Apply-

Y Z

X

1

1

3

5


Positioning Vectors Positions Vector 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Vector

Method:

Before: 6

Position

4

5

Vector ID List 2 Original Position Point 1 Point 1 Original Position Point 2 Point 2

2


Y


Z

3

1

X


After: 6


4

Point 6 Delete Original Vector Auto Execute Vector List Vector 1

2 -Apply-

Y Z

X

1

1

3

5

6


Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids Creates points, curves, surfaces or solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two sets of existing entities to form one set of new entities. Points can be created from the summation of other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be created from the summation of other curves or edges. Surfaces can be created from the summation of other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are created from the summation of other solids. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Transform

Set to either Point, Curve, Surface or Solid.

Vsum

ID List 1 Origin of Vector 1


[0 0 0] Origin of Vector 2

Origin of Vector 1 is a point location for the base of the vectors to the entities specified in 1 List.

[0 0 0]

Origin of Vector 2 is a point location for the base of the vectors to the entities specified in 2 List.

Vsum Parameters

A Point select menu appears that allows you alternate methods to cursor define the vector point locations.

Multiplication Factor 1 1.0 1.0 1.0 Multiplication Factor 2 1.0 1.0 1.0

Multiplication Factors 1 and 2 are multiplying factors on the global X, Y and Z components of the entities specified in 1 List and 2 List, respectively.


Vsum Parameters Multiplication Factor 1 1.0 1.0 1.0 Multiplication Factor 2 1.0 1.0 1.0 Auto Execute Point 1 List


[0 0 0] 1 List is a list of entities which MSC.Patran will sum with the specified entities in 2 List to form the new points, curves, surfaces or solids.

Point 2 List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

The select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids for both listboxes.

☞

More Help:


6


Vector Summing Points Creates Points 7, 8 and 9 by summing the vectors drawn from the origin, [0 0 0], to Points 1 and 4, 2 and 5 and 3 and 6. The “After” picture below has the vectors drawn to Points 2 and 5 to show how Point 8 was created. Geometry Action:

Before:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

Vsum

4 5

Point ID List

6

7 Origin of Vector 1 [0 0 0]

1

Origin of Vector 2 [0 0 0]

Y

Vsum Parameters

Z

2 X 3

Multiplication Factor 1 1.0 1.0 1.0 Multiplication Factor 2

After:

1.0 1.0 1.0

7 Auto Execute Point 1 List

4

Point 1 2 3

8 5

Point 2 List Point 4 5 6

6

-Apply-

1

Y Z

X

2 3

9


Vector Summing Points This example is the same as the previous example, except that a Multiplication Factor 2 is increased from “1 1 1” to “2 2 2”. Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Transform

4

Point

Method:

Vsum

5

Point ID List

6

7 Origin of Vector 1 [0 0 0]

1

Origin of Vector 2 [0 0 0]

Y

Vsum Parameters

Z

2 X 3

Multiplication Factor 1 1.0 1.0 1.0 Multiplication Factor 2

After:

2 2 2

7 Auto Execute Point 1 List

8

Point 1 2 3 Point 2 List

9

Point 4 5 6

4 5 -Apply-

6 Y Z

1 X

2 3

6


Vector Summing Curves Creates Curves 20 through 27 which are summed between Curves 12 through 19 and Curves 1 through 4. Notice that in order to create the spiral, Curve 1:4 must be entered twice in the Curve 2 List to match the eight curves listed in the Curve 1 List. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Before: 19

Vsum

Method:

18

Curve ID List

17

20

16

Curve Type

15

PATRAN 2 Convention

14 Origin of Vector 1

Y


X

Z

3

2 13 12

1

4

[0 0 0] Vsum Parameters Multiplication Factor 1

After:

1.0 1.0 1.0 Multiplication Factor 2 1.0 1.0 1.0

26

19 25 27 18 17

Auto Execute Curve 1 List

16

Curve 12:19 Curve 2 List

22

Curve 1:4 1:4

Y

-Apply-

Z

X

3

24

15 21 23 14 2 13 12 4

20 1


Vector Summing Curves Creates Curve 3 by summing Curves 1 and 2. Notice that the multiplication factors of “.5 .5 .5” are entered for both Multiplication Factors 1 and 2 and Curve 3 becomes the “average” of Curves 1 and 2 in length and in curvature. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

Before:

Vsum

Curve ID List

8

2

7

3 Curve Type PATRAN 2 Convention Origin of Vector 1

1

1

6

[0 0 0]

Y Origin of Vector 2

Z X


After:

.5 .5 .5 Multiplication Factor 2 .5 .5 .5 Auto Execute Curve 1 List

8

2

7

Curve 1

10

3

9 Curve 2 List Curve 2

1 -Apply-

Y Z X

1

6

6


Vector Summing Surfaces This example creates Surface 4 from vector summing the coordinate locations of Surfaces 1 and 3. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

10

Vsum

9

Surface ID List 4

3

2

Surface Type PATRAN 2 Convention

4 1

7

Origin of Vector 1

8

[0 0 0]

Y

1

Origin of Vector 2

3

X

Z


After:

1 1 1

14

Multiplication Factor 2 1 1 1

13

Auto Execute

4

Surface 1 List

10

Surface 1

9

Surface 2 List

3

2 4

Surface 3

1 -Apply-

7

Y Z

11

8 X

1 3

12


Vector Summing With Solid Faces This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surface 4 is created by vector summing the coordinate locations of the outside face of Solid 1 and Surface 3. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before: 10

Vsum

9

Surface ID List

3

2

4

4

Surface Type PATRAN 2 Convention

7 1

Origin of Vector 1

Y


12


8

11 X

Z

1 3

After:

1 1 1

16

Multiplication Factor 2 1 1 1

15

Auto Execute

4

Surface 1 List

10 9

Solid 1.5

3

2

Surface 2 List

4

Surface 3

-Apply-

7

Y

1 Z 11 X 12

13

8 1 3

14

6


Vector Summing Solids Creates Solid 3 by vector summing the coordinate locations of Solids 1 and 2. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

Before: 13 17

Vsum

18 2 12

Solid ID List

16

3

14 15

19

Solid Type PATRAN 2 Convention Origin of Vector 1

21 22 25 20 126 23 24 27

Y

[0 0 0]

X

Z

Origin of Vector 2 [0 0 0] Vsum Parameters Multiplication Factor 1

After:

1 1 1

13

Multiplication Factor 2

17

1 1 1 Auto Execute

16

Solid1 List Solid 1

18 2 12

29

14

30

33 15

34 283

19

31

32

Solid 2 List

35

Solid 2

21

Y -Apply-

Z

X

22 25 20 126 23 24 27


Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces and solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping an existing set of entities. Points can be moved and scaled from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be moved and scaled from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be moved and scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are moved and scaled from other solids. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

Transform

Set to either Point, Curve, Surface or Solid.

MScale

ID List



Used by the Origin of Scaling and Translation Vector to express the coordinate location of the scale origin and the orientation of the translation vector. (Example: Coord 5.)

Coord 0 Origin of Scaling [0 0 0] Translation Vector

Enter the point location of the origin to scale the existing entities from. If coordinate values are entered, they will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame. (Example: [10 0 0].) The Point select menu appears that allows you alternate methods to cursor define the point location.

<1 0 0> Rotation Matrix Column 1 1.0 0.0 0.0 Column 2

The distance and direction to move the new set of points, curves, surfaces or solids from the existing set. If coordinate values are entered, they will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame. (Example: <10 0 0>.) An Axis select menu appears that allows you alternate methods to cursor define the translation vector.

0.0 1.0 0.0 Column 3 0.0 0.0 1.0 Delete Original Auto Execute Point List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

Rotation Matrix is a 3 by 3 transformation matrix in column sort. See next page for more information. By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

6


The suggested values for the Rotation Matrix, Q, and their results are the following (do not enter all zeros):

Rotation Matrix Column 1 1.0 0.0 0.0 Column 2 0.0 1.0 0.0 Column 3 0.0 0.0 1.0

Translation Only (No Effect) - Enter values of +1 on the positive diagonal to produce a translation of the entities only. That is, “1 0 0” for Column 1, “0 1 0” for Column 2 and “0 0 1” for Column 3. This is the default for the Q matrix. Scale - Enter positive non-zero values less than or greater than 1.0 which are the scale factors for the diagonal and zero’s for the remaining positions. That is, “Sx 0 0” for Column 1, “0 Sy 0” for Column 2 and “0 0 Sz” for Column 3. Mirror - Enter +1 on the diagonal, with a -1 for the axis that is normal to the mirror plane, which is either the Reference Coordinate Frame’s XY, YZ or XZ mirror plane. For example, “-1 0 0” in Column 1, “0 1 0” for Column 2 and “0 0 1” for Column 3 will mirror across the YZ plane. Rotation About an angle, θ - The table below shows the appropriate values for Columns 1, 2 and 3 to rotate the entities about the Reference Coordinate Frame’s X, Y or Z axis.

Axis

Column 1

Column 2

Column 3

X

[1 0 0]

[0 cosθ sinθ]

[0 -sinθ cosθ]

Y

[cosθ 0 sinθ]

[0 1 0]

[-sinθ 0 cosθ]

Z

[cosθ sinθ 0]

[-sinθ cosθ 0] [0 0 1]

Simultaneous Scale, Mirror and Rotation - Calculate a resulting Q matrix which is the matrix product of each action: Q = [qscale] [qmirror] [qrotate] Warp - A non-orthogonal Q matrix will warp the entities as a function of position. Use with caution.

☞

More Help:



Translating and Mirroring Points Creates Points 8 through 13 by simultaneously translating and mirroring Points 1 though 7, two units in the global X direction and mirroring about the global YZ plane. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Point

Method:

MScale

Before: 7

6

5 4

Point ID List

3

8

2


1

Origin of Scaling [0 0 0] Translation Vector

Y

<2 0 0> Rotation Matrix

Z

X

Column 1 -1.0 0.0 0.0

After:

Column 2 0.0 1.0 0.0 Column 3 0.0 0.0 1.0

7

6

12 5


11 4


10 3

9

Point 1:7

28 -Apply-

Y Z X

1

13

6


Mirroring and Scaling Curves Creates Curves 7 through 12 by simultaneously scaling and mirroring Curves 1 through 6. The curves are scaled two times in the global Y direction and they are mirrored about the global XZ plane. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

MScale

Before:

6

Curve ID List 7

4

6


5

Coord 0

3 2

2 4

Origin of Scaling

1

[0 0 0] Translation Vector

Y

9

Z

<0 0 0>

8

7

1

X

Rotation Matrix Column 1 1.0 0.0 0.0

After:

Column 2 0.0 -1.5 0.0

6

Column 3

5

0.0 0.0 1.0 Delete Original Curves

4

6 4 2

3 1

9 8 7

2 1 3 5


10

Curve 1:6

11

7 10

8

-Apply-

Y Z

12

11

X 12

9

3

5


Mirroring and Scaling Curves This example is similar to the previous example, except that the curves are mirrored and scaled within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Curve

Method:

MScale

Before: Y Z 100 X

Curve ID List

3

4 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 100

2

Origin of Scaling

1

[0 0 0] Translation Vector

Y 6

<0 0 0>

Z

4X

2

1

Rotation Matrix Column 1 1.0 0.0 0.0

After:

Column 2

12 108

0.0 -1.5 0.0

7 9 11

Column 3 0.0 0.0 1.0

4


5


6

Curve 1:3

Z 100 X 3 2 1

-Apply-

Y Z

X 6 42

13 5

3

5

6


Translating and Rotating Surfaces Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 from Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating them 10 units in the global Z direction and rotating them -120 degrees about the global X axis. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Surface

Method:

Before:

MScale

Surface ID List 5 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

22

Origin of Scaling

Translation Vector

X

Z

1 1 4 3

3 4

Y

[0 0 0]

1

5

<0 0 10> Rotation Matrix Column 1 1.0 0.0 0.0

After:

Column 2 0.0 -.5 -.87 Column 3 0.0 .87 -.5

22 11


8

Surface List Surface 1:4

107 8 6

7 9 5 Y

-Apply-

Z

X

3 4 5

1 1 4 3 1


Translating, Mirroring and Scaling Solids This example simultaneously translates, mirrors and scales Solids 5 through 8 from Solids 1 through 4, by translating them 1.57 units in the global X direction and 1.0 unit in the global Y direction; mirroring them about the global XZ plane; and scaling them .5 in the X direction and .5 in the Y direction. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Solid

Method:

MScale

Before:

Solid ID List

1


4

Origin of Scaling

2

[0 0 0]

3

Y

Translation Vector <1.57 1 0>

X

Z

Rotation Matrix Column 1 .5 0.0 0.0

After:

Column 2 0.0 -.5 0.0

6

Column 3

5

0.0 0.0 1.0

7 8


1


4

Solid 1:4

2 -Apply-

3

Y Z

X

6


8.3

Transforming Coordinate Frames Translating Coordinate Frames Creates coordinate frames which are successively offset from each other by the Translation Vector , starting from an existing set of specified coordinate frames. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Coord

Method:

Translate


Coord ID List 1

Used by the Translation Vector to express the direction and distance of the translation.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Translation Vector <1 0 0>

This is the distance and direction to translate the new set of coordinate frames from the existing set. If coordinate values are entered, they will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <10 0 0>. An Axis select menu will appear to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the vector.

Translation Parameters Defines the number of times to translate the existing coordinate frames to create ones.

Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Coords

If ON, after Translate completes, the coordinate frames specified in Coordinate List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

Auto Execute Coordinate Frame List Coord 0

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 5.

☞

More Help:



Translating Coordinate Frames Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by translating it two units in the global X direction. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Coord

Method:

Translate

Before:

Y Z 1 X

Coord ID List 2 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Translation Vector

Y


Z

X


After:


-Apply-

Y Z1 X Y Z2 X Y Z

X

6


Translating Coordinate Frames Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by translating it through a translation vector defined by Points 1 and 2, using the Vector select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Coord

Method:

MScale

Coord ID List

Before:

Y Z1 X

2


5

Translation Vector

Y

Construct 2PointVector(Ev

Z

Translation Parameters

X


After:


-Apply-

Y Z1 X 1

Y Z Vector Select Menu Icon

X

Y Z2 X


Rotating Coordinate Frames Creates a set of coordinate frames which are formed from a specified set of existing coordinate frames by a rigid body rotation about a defined axis. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Coord

Method:

Rotate

Coord ID List



Used by the defined rotation Axis to express the axis’ beginning and ending coordinates. Example: Coord 5.

Coord 0 Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle

This is the rotation axis that the new coordinate frames will be rotated about from the existing set. If coordinate values are entered, they will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. An Axis select menu appears to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the rotation axis.

90.0 Offset Angle 0.0 Repeat Count 1

Rotation Angle (θr) defines how many degrees to rotate the existing set of coordinate frames about the axis. Offset Angle (θo) defines how many degrees to offset from the starting point of rotation. Repeat Count defines the number of times to rotate the existing set of coordinate frames to create the new coordinate frames.

Coord 2 Coord 3 Axis

θr

θr θo

Repeat Count = 2

Coord 1

6


Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle 90.0 Offset Angle 0.0 Repeat Count If ON, after Rotate completes, the coordinate frames specified in Coordinate List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran database.

1 Delete Original Coords Auto Execute Coordinate Frame List Coord 0

-Apply-

By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 5.

☞

More Help:



Rotating Coordinate Frames Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by rotating it 45 degrees about the axis listed on the form. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Coord

Method:

Before:

Rotate

Y

Coord ID List 2

1

Z


X

Coord 0 Axis

Y

{[0 0 0][1 1 1]} Rotation Parameters

X

Z

Rotation Angle 45.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Coords

Y

Auto Execute

Z

Coordinate Frame List Coord 1

Y

-Apply-

Z

X

Y X 1 Z

X

6


Rotating Coordinate Frames Creates the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200, from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, by rotating it 90 degrees about Coord 100’s Z axis, Coord 100.3, using the Axis select menu icon listed below. Notice that Delete Original Coords is pressed and Coord 100 is deleted. Geometry Action:

Transform

Object:

Coord

Method:

Before:

Rotate

Coord ID List

1

200

T Refer. Coordinate Frame

2

Z 100 R 1 1

Coord 0 Axis Coord 100.3

Y Rotation Parameters Rotation Angle

Z

X

90.0 Offset Angle

After:

0.0 Repeat Count 1 Delete Original Coords Auto Execute

1

Coordinate Frame List

R

Coord 100

T 200 Z 1

-Apply-


Z 3

X

2 1


CHAPTER

9

Verify Actions

■ Verify Action


9.1

Verify Action Verifying Surface Boundaries The Boundary method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a list of specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one other surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid faces. Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright for surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used in creating a B-rep solid. Geometry Action:

Verify

Object:

Surface

Method: Boundary

The free edges are highlighted in the primary color. Primary markers mark free edges and secondary markers indicate non-manifold edges. Both the primary color choice and the marker sizes are controlled by the Graphics Preferences form under the menu Preferences/Graphics.

Verification Criteria ◆ Topology ◆ ◆ Geometry Tolerance 0.005

The Topology Verification Criteria will not plot a free edge if two adjacent surfaces or solid faces are topologically congruent. The topology of the geometric model is created and stored in the MSC.Patran database at the time the geometry is created and therefore, the tolerance is only dependent on the geometric tolerance at that time. Thus, the tolerance is not applicable.

The Geometry Verification Criteria will compare an edge to an adjacent surface or solid face and see if they are coincident within a specified tolerance. If two edges are not coincident then a free edge is displayed. The geometry toggle allows the user to run the verification process in a more complete manner. Any existing topological gaps can be checked at various tolerances to determine at which tolerance the edges may be equivalenced.

CHAPTER 9 Verify Actions

◆ Topology ◆ ◆ Geometry Tolerance Should be set to a value that is smaller than the smallest dimension in the model. The default is the current global geometric tolerance.

0.005

Update Graphics...

Surface List

Apply

Brings up a smaller Update Graphics subordinate form that is described on page 701.

Specify the surfaces or solid faces either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 4 10 Solid 5.4. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the surfaces or solid faces.

☞

More Help:

• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran • Graphics Preferences (p. 291) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)

6


Verifying Surfaces for B-reps The B-rep method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a list of specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one other surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid faces. Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright for surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used in creating a B-rep solid. Geometry Action:

Verify

Object:

Solid

Method: B-rep Verification Criteria Tolerance 0.005

Surface List

The free edges are highlighted in the primary color. Primary markers mark free edges and secondary markers indicate nonmanifold edges. Both the primary color choice and the marker sizes are controlled by the Graphics Preferences form under the menu Preferences/Graphics. The Verification Criteria will not plot a free edge if two adjacent surfaces or solid faces are topologically congruent. The topology of the geometric model is created and stored in the MSC.Patran database at the time the geometry is created and therefore, the tolerance is only dependent on the geometric tolerance at that time. Thus, the tolerance is not applicable.

- Apply Specify the surfaces or solid faces either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 4 10 Solid 5.4. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select the surfaces or solid faces. (Note: similar functionality to the Verify/Surface/Boundary option.)

Should be set to a value that is smaller than the smallest dimension in the model. The default is the current global geometric tolerance.

CHAPTER 9 Verify Actions

Update Graphics Subordinate Form The Update Graphics subordinate form is displayed when the Update Graphics button is pressed on the Verify/Surface/Boundaries form. This subordinate form allows you to erase or plot in the current viewport, groups of congruent or incongruent surfaces. This form is useful for checking for surface cracks, topologically incongruent surfaces, or nonmanifold edges shared by more than two surfaces. MSC.Software Corporation suggests you use either the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form (see Matching Surface Edges (p. 481)) or the Create/Surface/Match form (see Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270)) to correct any incongruent surfaces that have a gap between them.

Update Graphics Plot Incongruent Surfaces

Plots only the surfaces that are incongruent or nonmanifold. All other surfaces are erased from the viewport. MSC.Patran will plot markers along the edges of the incongruent surfaces.

Plot All Geometry Erase Markers

Plots all geometry that are associated with the current viewport’s posted groups.

Erase Congruent Surfaces OK

Erases the markers that were plotted along the edges of the incongruent surfaces.

Press OK to erase the form. If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically erase any surface that becomes congruent in the model. You do not need to select the Plot Incongruent Surfaces button to update the display of the viewport.

☞

More Help:

• Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12) • Building a Congruent Model (p. 31) • Group Create (p. 159) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

7


Verify - Surface (Duplicates) Surfaces in the entire model are checked for being duplicate. Geometry Verify

Action: Object:

Surface Duplicates

Test: Test Control

Display Only ◆ Delete Higher ID ◆ ◆ Delete Lower ID Reset Graphics Apply

MSC.Patran gives the option to highlight any duplicate surfaces found, or, if you select the icon, you may choose to have MSC.Patran automatically eliminate any duplicates found. When delete duplicates is selected you may choose which surface ID of the two to remove from the database.

Returns your graphic display back to the way it was when the form was opened.This will unhighlight duplicate elements. Exiting this form will also reset graphics.


CHAPTER

10

Associate Actions

■ Overview of the Associate Action


10.1

Overview of the Associate Action The Associate action causes a geometric entity to become embedded on another geometric entity. Surfaces with associated geometry will not get trimmed (i.e., a four sided iso parametric patch will remain so even after associations are made to the patch). Associations allow the mesher to create nodes on or along the associated geometry. Loads or boundary conditions may be applied to associated geometries. Mesh seeds can be placed on the associated geometry. The nodes lying on the associated geometry have the associated geometry as topological associations (i.e., nodes that lie on a curve associated to a surface will have their topological associations to the curve rather than with the surface). Associations are marked by filled blue triangles for points and filled yellow triangles for curves. Table 10-1 Geometry Associate Action Objects and Descriptions Object ❏ Point

❏ Curve

Method

Description

Curve

Associate point to a curve.

Surface

Associate point to a surface.

Curve

Associate curve to a curve.

Surface

Associate curve to a surface.

Important: The iso-mesher will not generate meshes that conform to hard geometries, if the hard geometries lie interior to the surface. The iso-mesher ignores the interior hard geometries to mesh the surface.

CHAPTER 10 Associate Actions

Associating Point Object Figure 10-1 Geometry Action: Object:

Associate Point

Method:

Set to either Curve or Surface.

Auto Execute Point List List of points to be associated to curves or surfaces. List List of curves or surfaces to which the points must be associated. Points not within global geometric tolerance will not be associated.

-Apply-

7


Figure 10-2 Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Associate

2

Point

5

6

3

Method:

7 Auto Execute Point List

8

10 1 List

9 -Apply-

Y Z X1

4

After: 2

5

6

3

7

10 1

8

9 Y Z X1

4

CHAPTER 10 Associate Actions

Associating Curve Object Figure 10-3 Geometry Action: Object:

Associate Curve

Method:

Set to either Curve or Surface.

Auto Execute Curve List List of curves to be associated to curves or surfaces. List List of curves or surfaces to which curves in the first list must be associated. Curves not within global geometric tolerance will not be associated.

-Apply-

7


Figure 10-4 Geometry Action: Object:

Before:

Associate

2

Curve

11

3

Method:

6

Auto Execute

10

5

Curve List

2 List

-Apply-

Y Z 1X

4

After: 2

11

3 6 5

10

2

Y Z X1

4


CHAPTER

11

Disassociate Actions

■ Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods


11.1

Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods The disassociate action causes the association records to be deleted. All other information such as mesh seed and loads and boundary conditions will be preserved on the disassociated entity, if there are any. The disassociate action causes the filled blue triangles and yellow triangles that mark the association of points and curves respectively, to be removed. Object

Description

❏ Point

Remove all point associations.

❏ Curve

Remove all curve associations.

❏ Surface

Remove all surface associations.

CHAPTER 11 Disassociate Actions

Disassociating Points Figure 11-1 Geometry Action:

Disassociate

Object:

Point

Auto Execute Point List List of points whose associations must be removed. No action will be taken if the point(s) are not associated.

-Apply-

7


Disassociating Curves Geometry Action:

Disassociate

Object:

Curve

Auto Execute Curve List List of curves whose associations must be removed. No action will be taken if the curve(s) are not associated.

-Apply-

CHAPTER 11 Disassociate Actions

Disassociating Surfaces Figure 11-2 Geometry Action:

Disassociate

Object: Surface

Auto Execute Surface List List of surfaces in which all associations must be removed.

-Apply-

7



CHAPTER

12

The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry

■ Renumber Forms


12.1

Introduction Most often, ID numbers (IDs) for geometric entities are chosen and assigned automatically. The Renumber Action permits the IDs of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes, or vectors to be changed. This capability is useful to: • Offset the IDs of a specific list of entities. • Renumber the IDs of all existing entities within a specified range. • Compact the IDs of an entity type sequentially from 1 to N. IDs must be positive integers. Duplicate IDs are not permitted in the List of New IDs, or in the selected Entity List (old IDs). A Starting ID or a List of New IDs may be entered in the input databox. If a geometric entity outside the list of entities being renumbered is using the new ID, the renumber process will print a warning message stating which ID is already in use and proceed to use the next highest avaliable ID since each entity must have a unique ID. The default is to renumber all the existing entities beginning with the minimum ID through the maximum ID consecutively starting with 1. If only one ID is entered, it is assumed to be the starting ID. The entities will be renumbered consecutively beginning with the starting ID. If more than one ID is entered and there are fewer IDs in the List of New IDs than there are valid entities in the selected Entity List, renumbering will use the IDs provided and when the list is exhausted, the next highest available ID will be used thereafter to complete the renumbering. The List of New IDs may contain a # signifying to use the maximum ID + 1 as the Starting ID. However, the list may have more IDs than needed. The IDs in the selected Entity List may contain a #. The value of the maximum existing ID is automatically substituted for the #. There may be gaps of nonexisting entities in the list but there must be at least one valid entity ID in order for renumbering to take place. A percent complete form shows the status of the renumber process. When renumbering is complete, a report appears in the command line indicating the number of entities renumbered and their new IDs. The renumber process may be halted at any time by pressing the Abort button and the old IDs will be restored.

CHAPTER 12 The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry

12.2

Renumber Forms When Renumber is the selected Action the following options are available. Object

Description

❏ Point

The point menu selection provides the capability to renumber or change the IDS of points.

❏ Curve

The curve menu selection provides the capability to renumber or change the IDs of curves.

❏ Surface

The surface menu selection provides the capability to renumber or change the IDs of surfaces.

❏ Solid

The solid menu selection provides the capability to renumber or change the IDs of solids.

❏ Plane

The plane menu selection provides the capability to renumber or change the IDs of planes.

❏ Vector

The vector menu selection provides the capability to renumber or change the IDs of vectors.

7


Renumber Geometry Geometry Action: Renumber Object:

Use this option to renumber points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes, or vectors. See Introduction (p. 716).

Set to either: Point, Curve, Surface,Solid, Plane, or Vector.

Summary Shows how many exist in the model and minimum⁄ maximum values of IDs. Note: All are numbered sequentially when the Maximum ID is equal to Total in Model.

Total in Model: 2713 Minimum ID 21 Maximum ID 2733

Specifies the option to use for renumbering Starting ID(s) is used to input the new ID(s) for the existing and Offset ID is used to offset the existing ID(s) by the specified value ( inputting a value of 10 for Offset ID will change an ID of 1 to 11 ).

Numbering Option Starting ID(s)

1

List 21:2733

Specifies the starting ID, or a list of new IDs to assign. IDs must be positive integers. The # is a valid entry here. If the number of IDs is less than the number of valid , renumbering will not take place.

Node List -ApplySpecifies which old are to be renumbered. A list of can be entered here or an active group of can be selected from the viewport. The default is to renumber all ( minimum ID to maximum ID) consecutively beginning with the Start ID. The entry, 1:#, is also valid to indicate all . There may be gaps of nonexisting in the list, but there must be at least one valid in order for renumbering to take place. Duplicate IDs are not permitted. If a outside the list of being renumbered is using the new ID, the renumber process will use the next highest available ID since each must have a unique ID.

7

I

N

D

E

X

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling I N D E X MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

Numerics 3 point method overview, 63

A accuracy, 2 any geometry entity delete action, 409 arc center point, 79 arc3point method curve, 128 axis method overview, 64

B bi-parametric surface, 19, 20 blend method curve, 426 solid, 538 surface, 475 body, 10 break method curve, 418, 422, 425 example, 31 solid, 522, 526, 531, 533, 534, 535 surface, 457, 461, 465, 469, 471 B-rep method, 40 B-rep solid, 8, 19, 24, 40 exterior shell, 40 shell, 24 building a B-rep solid, 40 building a congruent model, 31 example, 31 building a degenerate solid, 41 building a degenerate surface, 41 building optimal surfaces, 33

C CAD access modules, 47 CAD user file, 2, 20, 46, 47 CADDS 5, 2, 47 capabilities, 2 Cartesian in Refer. CF button, 66 CATIA, 2, 47 chain method curve, 131 chained curve, 20, 21 Computervision, 2, 47 conic method curve, 133 connectivity curve, 15 definition, 15 modifying, 16 solid, 16 surface, 15 coordinate frame angles, 60 attributes show action, 594 create method overview, 63 definitions, 60 delete action, 411 rotate method, 693 translate method, 690 create action, 27 overview, 70

INDEX

curve arc3point method, 128 blend method, 426 break method, 418, 422, 425 chain method, 131 conic method, 133 delete action, 410 disasemble method, 429 extend method, 431, 436, 438, 440 extract method, 137, 142 fillet method, 144 fit method, 148 intersect method, 150, 154 manifold method, 160 mcoord method, 648 merge method, 443 mirror method, 640 mscale method, 683 offset method constant, 171 offset method variable, 173 pivot method, 656 point method, 117, 119, 123 position method, 665 refit method, 447 reverse method, 448 rotate method, 619 scale method, 629 translate method, 605 trim method, 451, 454 vsum method, 674 XYZ method, 199 curve 4 point parametric positions subordinate form, 127 curve angle show action, 584 curve arc show action, 583 curve attributes show action, 582 curve length range show action, 586 curve method, 41 curvilinear coordinate frame, 66 examples using translate and scale, 66 scale method, 66 translate method, 66 Curvilinear in Refer. CF button, 66 cylindrical coordinate frame definition, 61

D Dassault Systemes, 2, 47 Decompose method, 37 decomposing trimmed surfaces, 37 example, 37 default colors, 19, 20, 21, 24 degenerate surfaces and solids, 41 delete action any geometry entity, 409 coordinate frame, 411 curve, 410 overview, 408 plane, 410 point, 410 solid, 410 surface, 410 vector, 410 DGA, 2, 47 Direct Geometry Access, 2, 47 disasemble method curve, 429 surface, 478 disassemble method solid, 541 display lines, 33, 39

E edge, 10 edge match method, 31 closing gaps, 13 surface, 481, 484 edge method, 41 edge refit method surface, 500 edit action, 27 overview, 414 EDS/Unigraphics, 2, 47 element connectivity, 34 element properties, 2 equivalence method point, 416 EUCLID 3, 2, 47 euler method overview, 64

INDEX

examples arc3point curve, 129, 130 ArcCenter point, 80 blend curve, 427, 428 solid, 539, 540 surface, 476, 477 break curve, 419, 420, 421, 423, 424 solid, 523, 524, 525, 528, 529, 530, 532, 536, 537 surface, 458, 459, 460, 462, 466, 467, 468, 470, 472, 473, 474 chain curve, 132 conic curve, 135, 136 disassemble curve, 430 surface, 479, 480 edge match surface, 482, 483, 485 equivalencene point, 417 extend curve, 433, 434, 435, 437, 439, 441, 442 extend surface, 487, 489, 491, 493, 495, 497, 499 extract curve, 139, 140, 141, 143 point, 82, 83 point from surface, 85 point from surface diagonal, 87 point from surface parametric, 89 fillet curve, 146, 147 fit curve, 149 interpolate point, 92, 93, 95, 96 interpolate vector, 392 intersect curve, 151, 152, 153, 155, 156 point at edge, 98 point with curve and plane, 102 point with two curves, 99, 100, 101 point with vector and curve, 103, 104 point with vector and plane, 106 point with vector and surface, 105 manifold curve, 162, 163 mcoord curve, 650, 651 plane, 654 point, 649 solid, 653 surface, 652 vector, 655 merge curve, 444, 445, 446, 450, 453, 455,

456 mirror curve, 642, 643 plane, 646 point, 641 solid, 645, 647 surface, 644 mscale curve, 686, 687 point, 685 solid, 689 surface, 688 offset curve, 172, 175 offset point, 108 offset surface, 273 pierce point, 110, 111 pivot curve, 659, 660 plane, 663 point, 658 solid, 662 surface, 661 vector, 664 point curve, 118, 121, 122, 125, 126 position curve, 668, 669 point, 667 solid, 671, 672, 673 surface, 670 project point, 114, 115, 116 reverse curve, 449 solid, 547 surface, 502 rotate coordinate frame, 695, 696 curve, 622, 623 plane, 627 point, 621 solid, 626 surface, 624, 625 vectors, 628 scale curve, 633, 634 point, 631, 632 solid, 638 surface, 635, 636, 637 vector, 639 sew surface, 504 translate coordinate frame, 691, 692 curve, 609, 610, 611

7

INDEX

plane, 617 point, 607, 608 solid, 615, 616 surface, 612, 613, 614 vector, 618 trim curve, 452 vsum curve, 678, 679 point, 676, 677 solid, 682 surface, 680, 681 XYZ curve, 200 point, 75, 76, 77, 78 solid, 202 surface, 201 extend method curve, 431, 436, 438, 440 surface, 486, 488, 490, 492, 494, 496, 498 extract method curve, 137, 142 multiple points, 86, 88 point, 81 single point, 84

F face, 10 face method, 42 field function, 4, 17 fillet method curve, 144 fit method curve, 148

G general trimmed surface, 20 geometry types, 19 global coordinate frame, 60 global model tolerance, 18 surface gaps, 13 grid, 25

H hyperpatch, 25

I IGES, 2, 20, 25, 46 interpolate method point, 91, 94 vector, 391 intersect method curve, 150, 154 intersect parameters subordinate form, 157 point, 97 intersect parameters subordinate form, 157 IsoMesh, 17, 24, 37

L line, 25 load/BC, 2 loads/BC, 2

M manifold method curve, 160 match method closing gaps, 13 mathematical representation, 2 Matra Datavision, 2, 47 mcoord method curve, 648 plane, 648 point, 648 solid, 648 surface, 648 vector, 648 merge method curve, 443 refit, 447 meshing, 12 mirror method curve, 640 plane, 640 point, 640 solid, 640 surface, 640 vector, 640 MSC.Patran CADDS 5, 47 MSC.Patran CATIA, 47 MSC.Patran EUCLID 3, 47

INDEX

MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 47, 55 .geo intermediate file, 56 executing from MSC.Patran, 55 executing from Pro/ENGINEER, 55 MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47 features, 47 global model tolerance, 48 user tips, 48 mscale method curve, 683 point, 683 solid, 683 surface, 683 multiple points extract method, 86, 88

N native geometry, 3 neutral file, 3, 25, 46, 57 nodes, 718 renumber, 718 nodes on curve show action, 587 nodes on point show action, 581 nodes on surface show action, 590 normal method overview, 65

O offset method constant curve, 171 point, 107 surface, 272 variable curve, 173

P p3_proe, 55 parameterization B-rep solid, 8 curve, 5 definition, 5 point, 5 solid, 8 surface, 7 trimmed surface, 7

parameterized geometry, 3 parametric axes, 15 plotting, 16 parametric cubic equation, 25 parametric cubic geometry, 57 definition, 25 limitations, 25, 26 recommendations, 25, 26 subtended arcs, 26 parametric curve, 19 Parametric Technology, 2, 47 Parasolid tips for accessing, 49 patch, 25 PATRAN 2 Convention, 27, 28, 29 PATRAN 2 Convention button, 25, 27 Paver, 37 pentahedron, 41 pierce method point, 109 pivot method curve, 656 plane, 656 point, 656 solid, 656 surface, 656 vector, 656 plane mcoord method, 648 mirror method, 640 pivot method, 656 position method, 665 rotate method, 619 translate method, 605 plane angle show action, 596 plane distance show action, 598

7

INDEX

point, 19 delete action, 410 equivalence method, 416 extract method, 81 interpolate method, 91, 94 intersect method, 97 mcoord method, 648 mirror method, 640 mscale method, 683 offset method, 107 pierce method, 109 pivot method, 656 position method, 665 project method, 112 rotate method, 619 scale method, 629 translate method, 605 vsum method, 674 XYZ method, 74 point distance show action, 571 point location show action, 570 point method curve, 117, 119, 123 curve 4 point parametric positions subordinate form, 127 position method curve, 665 plane, 665 point, 665 solid, 665 surface, 665 vector, 665 pressure load, 4, 17, 34 Pro/ENGINEER, 2, 47 project method point, 112

R rectangular coordinate frame definition, 60 refit method solid, 543 renumber action, 717 reverse method, 16, 34 curve, 448 solid, 546 surface, 501

rotate method coordinate frame, 693 curve, 619 point, 619 solid, 619 surface, 619

S scale method curve, 629 point, 629 solid, 629 surface, 629 vector, 629 sew method surface, 503 show action coordinate frame attributes, 594 curve angle, 584 curve arc, 583 curve attributes, 582 length range, 586 nodes on curve, 587 nodes on point, 581 nodes on surface, 590 overview, 568 plane angle, 596 plane distance, 598 point distance, 571 point location, 570 showing plane attributes, 595 showing vector attributes, 599 solid attributes, 593 surface area range, 589 surface attributes, 588 surface normals, 591 show action information form, 569 simply trimmed surface, 21 single point extract method, 84

INDEX

solid blend method, 538 break method, 522, 526, 531, 533, 534, 535 delete action, 410 disassemble method, 541 mcoord method, 648 mirror method, 640 mscale method, 683 pivot method, 656 position method, 665 refit method, 543 reverse method, 546 rotate method, 619 scale method, 629 translate method, 605 vsum method, 674 XYZ method, 199 solid attributes show action, 593 solids type of, 24 spherical coordinate frame definition, 61 suface normals show action, 591 surface blend method, 475 break method, 457, 461, 465, 469, 471 delete action, 410 disassemble method, 478 edge match method, 481, 484 extend method, 486, 488, 490, 492, 494, 496, 498 mcoord method, 648 mirror method, 640 mscale method, 683 offset method, 272 pivot method, 656 position method, 665 refit method, 500 reverse method, 501 rotate method, 619 scale method, 629 sew method, 503 sharp corners, 33 top and bottom locations, 34 translate method, 605 vsum method, 674 XYZ method, 199 surface area range show action, 589

surface attributes show action, 588 surface boundaries verify action, 698 surface method, 42 surface normals, 17, 34, 40 example of aligning, 35

T TetMesh, 24, 40 tetrahedron, 41 topologic entities edge, 10 face, 10 vertex, 10 topological congruency, 31 definition, 12 gaps, 13 topology definition, 10 ID assignment, 11, 17 transform action overview, 602 translate method coordinate frame, 690 curve, 605 plane, 605 point, 605 solid, 605 surface, 605 vector, 605 trim method curve, 451, 454 trimmed surface, 19 decomposing, 37 default colors, 20 definition, 20 general trimmed, 20 parent surface, 20 simply trimmed, 21 tri-parametric solid, 8, 19, 24 types of geometry, 27 curves, 27 solids, 29 surfaces, 28

U update graphics subordinate form, 701

7

INDEX

V vector interpolate method, 391 mcoord method, 648 mirror method, 640 pivot method, 656 position method, 665 rotate method, 619 scale method, 629 translate method, 605 verify action surface boundaries, 698 update graphics subordinate form, 701 vertex, 10 volume solid, 19 vsum method curve, 674 point, 674 solid, 674 surface, 674

W wedge solid, 42

X XYZ method curve, 199 point, 74 solid, 199 surface, 199

Geometry Modeling,Patran

Recommend Documents